diff options
Diffstat (limited to 'doc/man')
72 files changed, 1018 insertions, 1018 deletions
diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqaccel.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqaccel.3qt index d38a0a29c..3b551a89d 100644 --- a/doc/man/man3/tqaccel.3qt +++ b/doc/man/man3/tqaccel.3qt @@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ In most cases, you will not need to use this class directly. Use the TQAction cl .PP .nf .br - QPushButton p( "&Exit", parent ); // automatic shortcut ALT+Key_E + TQPushButton p( "&Exit", parent ); // automatic shortcut ALT+Key_E .br TQPopupMenu *fileMenu = new fileMenu( parent ); .br @@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ Each accelerator item consists of an identifier and a QKeySequence. A single key .PP When an accelerator key is pressed, the accelerator sends out the signal activated() with a number that identifies this particular accelerator item. Accelerator items can also be individually connected, so that two different keys will activate two different slots (see connectItem() and disconnectItem()). .PP -The activated() signal is \fInot\fR emitted when two or more accelerators match the same key. Instead, the first matching accelerator sends out the activatedAmbiguously() signal. By pressing the key multiple times, users can navigate between all matching accelerators. Some standard controls like QPushButton and QCheckBox connect the activatedAmbiguously() signal to the harmless setFocus() slot, whereas activated() is connected to a slot invoking the button's action. Most controls, like TQLabel and QTabBar, treat activated() and activatedAmbiguously() as equivalent. +The activated() signal is \fInot\fR emitted when two or more accelerators match the same key. Instead, the first matching accelerator sends out the activatedAmbiguously() signal. By pressing the key multiple times, users can navigate between all matching accelerators. Some standard controls like TQPushButton and TQCheckBox connect the activatedAmbiguously() signal to the harmless setFocus() slot, whereas activated() is connected to a slot invoking the button's action. Most controls, like TQLabel and QTabBar, treat activated() and activatedAmbiguously() as equivalent. .PP Use setEnabled() to enable or disable all the items in an accelerator, or setItemEnabled() to enable or disable individual items. An item is active only when both the QAccel and the item itself are enabled. .PP diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqapplication.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqapplication.3qt index 4e9a030b0..0b91f3d75 100644 --- a/doc/man/man3/tqapplication.3qt +++ b/doc/man/man3/tqapplication.3qt @@ -623,7 +623,7 @@ See also quit(). .SH "TQWidget * QApplication::activeModalWidget ()\fC [static]\fR" Returns the active modal widget. .PP -A modal widget is a special top level widget which is a subclass of QDialog that specifies the modal parameter of the constructor as TRUE. A modal widget must be closed before the user can continue with other parts of the program. +A modal widget is a special top level widget which is a subclass of TQDialog that specifies the modal parameter of the constructor as TRUE. A modal widget must be closed before the user can continue with other parts of the program. .PP Modal widgets are organized in a stack. This function returns the active modal widget at the top of the stack. .PP @@ -1115,7 +1115,7 @@ Example: .PP .nf .br - QPushButton *quitButton = new QPushButton( "Quit" ); + TQPushButton *quitButton = new TQPushButton( "Quit" ); .br connect( quitButton, TQ_SIGNAL(clicked()), tqApp, TQ_SLOT(quit()) ); .br @@ -1487,7 +1487,7 @@ See also setStartDragDistance(), startDragTime(), and TQPoint::manhattanLength() .SH "int QApplication::startDragTime ()\fC [static]\fR" If you support drag and drop in you application and a drag should start after a mouse click and after a certain time elapsed, you should use the value which this method returns as the delay (in ms). .PP -Qt also uses this delay internally, e.g. in TQTextEdit and QLineEdit, for starting a drag. +Qt also uses this delay internally, e.g. in TQTextEdit and TQLineEdit, for starting a drag. .PP The default value is 500 ms. .PP diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqasciidict.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqasciidict.3qt index 915cb8288..e02592ef1 100644 --- a/doc/man/man3/tqasciidict.3qt +++ b/doc/man/man3/tqasciidict.3qt @@ -95,11 +95,11 @@ Example: .PP .nf .br - TQAsciiDict<QLineEdit> fields; // char* keys, QLineEdit* values + TQAsciiDict<TQLineEdit> fields; // char* keys, TQLineEdit* values .br - fields.insert( "forename", new QLineEdit( this ) ); + fields.insert( "forename", new TQLineEdit( this ) ); .br - fields.insert( "surname", new QLineEdit( this ) ); + fields.insert( "surname", new TQLineEdit( this ) ); .br .br fields["forename"]->setText( "Homer" ); @@ -107,7 +107,7 @@ Example: fields["surname"]->setText( "Simpson" ); .br .br - TQAsciiDictIterator<QLineEdit> it( fields ); // See TQAsciiDictIterator + TQAsciiDictIterator<TQLineEdit> it( fields ); // See TQAsciiDictIterator .br for( ; it.current(); ++it ) .br diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqasciidictiterator.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqasciidictiterator.3qt index 2ce41d233..2c4e9569b 100644 --- a/doc/man/man3/tqasciidictiterator.3qt +++ b/doc/man/man3/tqasciidictiterator.3qt @@ -56,13 +56,13 @@ Example: .PP .nf .br - TQAsciiDict<QLineEdit> fields; + TQAsciiDict<TQLineEdit> fields; .br - fields.insert( "forename", new QLineEdit( this ) ); + fields.insert( "forename", new TQLineEdit( this ) ); .br - fields.insert( "surname", new QLineEdit( this ) ); + fields.insert( "surname", new TQLineEdit( this ) ); .br - fields.insert( "age", new QLineEdit( this ) ); + fields.insert( "age", new TQLineEdit( this ) ); .br .br fields["forename"]->setText( "Homer" ); @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ Example: fields["age"]->setText( "45" ); .br .br - TQAsciiDictIterator<QLineEdit> it( fields ); + TQAsciiDictIterator<TQLineEdit> it( fields ); .br for( ; it.current(); ++it ) .br diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqbutton.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqbutton.3qt index 3e83ac43d..cf1be83c2 100644 --- a/doc/man/man3/tqbutton.3qt +++ b/doc/man/man3/tqbutton.3qt @@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ QButton \- The abstract base class of button widgets, providing functionality co .PP Inherits TQWidget. .PP -Inherited by QCheckBox, QPushButton, QRadioButton, and TQToolButton. +Inherited by TQCheckBox, TQPushButton, TQRadioButton, and TQToolButton. .PP .SS "Public Members" .in +1c @@ -168,11 +168,11 @@ Inherited by QCheckBox, QPushButton, QRadioButton, and TQToolButton. .SH DESCRIPTION The QButton class is the abstract base class of button widgets, providing functionality common to buttons. .PP -\fBIf you want to create a button use QPushButton.\fR +\fBIf you want to create a button use TQPushButton.\fR .PP The QButton class implements an \fIabstract\fR button, and lets subclasses specify how to reply to user actions and how to draw the button. .PP -QButton provides both push and toggle buttons. The QRadioButton and QCheckBox classes provide only toggle buttons; QPushButton and TQToolButton provide both toggle and push buttons. +QButton provides both push and toggle buttons. The TQRadioButton and TQCheckBox classes provide only toggle buttons; TQPushButton and TQToolButton provide both toggle and push buttons. .PP Any button can have either a text or pixmap label. setText() sets the button to be a text button and setPixmap() sets it to be a pixmap button. The text/pixmap is manipulated as necessary to create the "disabled" appearance when the button is disabled. .PP @@ -190,7 +190,7 @@ setToggleButton() sets whether the button is a toggle button or not. .PP The difference between isDown() and isOn() is as follows: When the user clicks a toggle button to toggle it on, the button is first \fIpressed\fR and then released into the \fIon\fR state. When the user clicks it again (to toggle it off), the button moves first to the \fIpressed\fR state, then to the \fIoff\fR state (isOn() and isDown() are both FALSE). .PP -Default buttons (as used in many dialogs) are provided by QPushButton::setDefault() and QPushButton::setAutoDefault(). +Default buttons (as used in many dialogs) are provided by TQPushButton::setDefault() and TQPushButton::setAutoDefault(). .PP QButton provides five signals: <ol type=1> .TP @@ -208,7 +208,7 @@ If the button is a text button with an ampersand (&) in its text, QButton create .PP .nf .br - QPushButton *p = new QPushButton( "Ro&ck && Roll", this ); + TQPushButton *p = new TQPushButton( "Ro&ck && Roll", this ); .br .fi .PP @@ -224,7 +224,7 @@ You can also set a custom accelerator using the setAccel() function. This is use .br .fi .PP -All of the buttons provided by TQt (QPushButton, TQToolButton, QCheckBox and QRadioButton) can display both text and pixmaps. +All of the buttons provided by TQt (TQPushButton, TQToolButton, TQCheckBox and TQRadioButton) can display both text and pixmaps. .PP To subclass QButton, you must reimplement at least drawButton() (to draw the button's outline) and drawButtonLabel() (to draw its text or pixmap). It is generally advisable to reimplement sizeHint() as well, and sometimes hitButton() (to determine whether a button press is within the button). .PP diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqbuttongroup.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqbuttongroup.3qt index 9b09ff7fe..da6fc1c13 100644 --- a/doc/man/man3/tqbuttongroup.3qt +++ b/doc/man/man3/tqbuttongroup.3qt @@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ A button can be removed from the group with remove(). A pointer to a button with .ce 1 .B "[Image Omitted]" .PP -See also QPushButton, QCheckBox, QRadioButton, Widget Appearance and Style, Layout Management, and Organizers. +See also TQPushButton, TQCheckBox, TQRadioButton, Widget Appearance and Style, Layout Management, and Organizers. .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION .SH "QButtonGroup::QButtonGroup ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )" Constructs a button group with no title. diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqcanvas.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqcanvas.3qt index 802b50b6b..de7e76b5a 100644 --- a/doc/man/man3/tqcanvas.3qt +++ b/doc/man/man3/tqcanvas.3qt @@ -156,7 +156,7 @@ The TQCanvas class provides a 2D area that can contain TQCanvasItem objects. .PP The TQCanvas class manages its 2D graphic area and all the canvas items the area contains. The canvas has no visual appearance of its own. Instead, it is displayed on screen using a TQCanvasView. Multiple TQCanvasView widgets may be associated with a canvas to provide multiple views of the same canvas. .PP -The canvas is optimized for large numbers of items, particularly where only a small percentage of the items change at any one time. If the entire display changes very frequently, you should consider using your own custom QScrollView subclass. +The canvas is optimized for large numbers of items, particularly where only a small percentage of the items change at any one time. If the entire display changes very frequently, you should consider using your own custom TQScrollView subclass. .PP Qt provides a rich set of canvas item classes, e.g. TQCanvasEllipse, TQCanvasLine, TQCanvasPolygon, TQCanvasPolygonalItem, TQCanvasRectangle, TQCanvasSpline, TQCanvasSprite and TQCanvasText. You can subclass to create your own canvas items; TQCanvasPolygonalItem is the most common base class used for this purpose. .PP diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqcanvasview.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqcanvasview.3qt index 32a46003d..66253369e 100644 --- a/doc/man/man3/tqcanvasview.3qt +++ b/doc/man/man3/tqcanvasview.3qt @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ TQCanvasView \- On-screen view of a TQCanvas .SH SYNOPSIS \fC#include <tqcanvas.h>\fR .PP -Inherits QScrollView. +Inherits TQScrollView. .PP .SS "Public Members" .in +1c @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ The TQCanvasView class provides an on-screen view of a TQCanvas. .PP A TQCanvasView is widget which provides a view of a TQCanvas. .PP -If you want users to be able to interact with a canvas view, subclass TQCanvasView. You might then reimplement QScrollView::contentsMousePressEvent(). For example, assuming no transformation matrix is set: +If you want users to be able to interact with a canvas view, subclass TQCanvasView. You might then reimplement TQScrollView::contentsMousePressEvent(). For example, assuming no transformation matrix is set: .PP .nf .br @@ -136,7 +136,7 @@ Repaints part of the TQCanvas that the canvas view is showing starting at \fIcx\ .PP See also TQCanvas::setDoubleBuffering(). .PP -Reimplemented from QScrollView. +Reimplemented from TQScrollView. .SH "const TQWMatrix & TQCanvasView::inverseWorldMatrix () const" Returns a reference to the inverse of the canvas view's current transformation matrix. .PP diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqcheckbox.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqcheckbox.3qt index 327555d65..0a964040b 100644 --- a/doc/man/man3/tqcheckbox.3qt +++ b/doc/man/man3/tqcheckbox.3qt @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ '\" t -.TH QCheckBox 3qt "2 February 2007" "Trolltech AS" \" -*- nroff -*- +.TH TQCheckBox 3qt "2 February 2007" "Trolltech AS" \" -*- nroff -*- .\" Copyright 1992-2007 Trolltech ASA. All rights reserved. See the .\" license file included in the distribution for a complete license .\" statement. @@ -7,19 +7,19 @@ .ad l .nh .SH NAME -QCheckBox \- Checkbox with a text label +TQCheckBox \- Checkbox with a text label .SH SYNOPSIS -\fC#include <ntqcheckbox.h>\fR +\fC#include <tqcheckbox.h>\fR .PP Inherits QButton. .PP .SS "Public Members" .in +1c .ti -1c -.BI "\fBQCheckBox\fR ( TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )" +.BI "\fBTQCheckBox\fR ( TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )" .br .ti -1c -.BI "\fBQCheckBox\fR ( const TQString & text, TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )" +.BI "\fBTQCheckBox\fR ( const TQString & text, TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )" .br .ti -1c .BI "bool \fBisChecked\fR () const" @@ -119,9 +119,9 @@ Inherits QButton. .br .in -1c .SH DESCRIPTION -The QCheckBox widget provides a checkbox with a text label. +The TQCheckBox widget provides a checkbox with a text label. .PP -QCheckBox and QRadioButton are both option buttons. That is, they can be switched on (checked) or off (unchecked). The classes differ in how the choices for the user are restricted. Radio buttons define a "one of many" choice, whereas checkboxes provide" many of many" choices. +TQCheckBox and TQRadioButton are both option buttons. That is, they can be switched on (checked) or off (unchecked). The classes differ in how the choices for the user are restricted. Radio buttons define a "one of many" choice, whereas checkboxes provide" many of many" choices. .PP A QButtonGroup can be used to group check buttons visually. .PP @@ -129,9 +129,9 @@ Whenever a checkbox is checked or cleared it emits the signal toggled(). Connect .PP \fBWarning:\fR The toggled() signal can not be trusted for tristate checkboxes. .PP -In addition to the usual checked and unchecked states, QCheckBox optionally provides a third state to indicate "no change". This is useful whenever you need to give the user the option of neither checking nor unchecking a checkbox. If you need this third state, enable it with setTristate() and use state() to query the current toggle state. When a tristate checkbox changes state, it emits the stateChanged() signal. +In addition to the usual checked and unchecked states, TQCheckBox optionally provides a third state to indicate "no change". This is useful whenever you need to give the user the option of neither checking nor unchecking a checkbox. If you need this third state, enable it with setTristate() and use state() to query the current toggle state. When a tristate checkbox changes state, it emits the stateChanged() signal. .PP -Just like QPushButton, a checkbox can display text or a pixmap. The text can be set in the constructor or with setText(); the pixmap is set with setPixmap(). +Just like TQPushButton, a checkbox can display text or a pixmap. The text can be set in the constructor or with setText(); the pixmap is set with setPixmap(). .PP .ce 1 .B "[Image Omitted]" @@ -140,13 +140,13 @@ Just like QPushButton, a checkbox can display text or a pixmap. The text can be .ce 1 .B "[Image Omitted]" .PP -See also QButton, QRadioButton, Fowler: Check Box, and Basic Widgets. +See also QButton, TQRadioButton, Fowler: Check Box, and Basic Widgets. .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION -.SH "QCheckBox::QCheckBox ( TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )" +.SH "TQCheckBox::TQCheckBox ( TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )" Constructs a checkbox with no text. .PP The \fIparent\fR and \fIname\fR arguments are sent to the TQWidget constructor. -.SH "QCheckBox::QCheckBox ( const TQString & text, TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )" +.SH "TQCheckBox::TQCheckBox ( const TQString & text, TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )" Constructs a checkbox with text \fItext\fR. .PP The \fIparent\fR and \fIname\fR arguments are sent to the TQWidget constructor. @@ -171,7 +171,7 @@ Returns the group that this button belongs to. If the button is not a member of any QButtonGroup, this function returns 0. .PP See also QButtonGroup. -.SH "bool QCheckBox::isChecked () const" +.SH "bool TQCheckBox::isChecked () const" Returns TRUE if the checkbox is checked; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "checked" property for details. .SH "bool QButton::isDown () const" Returns TRUE if the button is pressed; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "down" property for details. @@ -181,7 +181,7 @@ Returns TRUE if the button is an exclusive toggle; otherwise returns FALSE. See Returns TRUE if the button is toggled; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "on" property for details. .SH "bool QButton::isToggleButton () const" Returns TRUE if the button is a toggle button; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "toggleButton" property for details. -.SH "bool QCheckBox::isTristate () const" +.SH "bool TQCheckBox::isTristate () const" Returns TRUE if the checkbox is a tri-state checkbox; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "tristate" property for details. .SH "const TQPixmap * QButton::pixmap () const" Returns the pixmap shown on the button. See the "pixmap" property for details. @@ -200,11 +200,11 @@ See also pressed(), clicked(), and toggled(). Sets the accelerator associated with the button. See the "accel" property for details. .SH "void QButton::setAutoRepeat ( bool )\fC [virtual]\fR" Sets whether autoRepeat is enabled. See the "autoRepeat" property for details. -.SH "void QCheckBox::setChecked ( bool check )\fC [slot]\fR" +.SH "void TQCheckBox::setChecked ( bool check )\fC [slot]\fR" Sets whether the checkbox is checked to \fIcheck\fR. See the "checked" property for details. .SH "void QButton::setDown ( bool )\fC [virtual]\fR" Sets whether the button is pressed. See the "down" property for details. -.SH "void QCheckBox::setNoChange ()" +.SH "void TQCheckBox::setNoChange ()" Sets the checkbox to the "no change" state. .PP See also tristate. @@ -212,7 +212,7 @@ See also tristate. Sets the pixmap shown on the button. See the "pixmap" property for details. .SH "void QButton::setText ( const TQString & )\fC [virtual]\fR" Sets the text shown on the button. See the "text" property for details. -.SH "void QCheckBox::setTristate ( bool y = TRUE )" +.SH "void TQCheckBox::setTristate ( bool y = TRUE )" Sets whether the checkbox is a tri-state checkbox to \fIy\fR. See the "tristate" property for details. .SH "ToggleState QButton::state () const" Returns the state of the toggle button. See the "toggleState" property for details. @@ -283,7 +283,7 @@ The default is two-state, i.e. tri-state is FALSE. Set this property's value with setTristate() and get this property's value with isTristate(). .SH "SEE ALSO" -.BR http://doc.trolltech.com/ntqcheckbox.html +.BR http://doc.trolltech.com/tqcheckbox.html .BR http://www.trolltech.com/faq/tech.html .SH COPYRIGHT Copyright 1992-2007 Trolltech ASA, http://www.trolltech.com. See the diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqchecklistitem.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqchecklistitem.3qt index 879c5d88d..cc0307078 100644 --- a/doc/man/man3/tqchecklistitem.3qt +++ b/doc/man/man3/tqchecklistitem.3qt @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ '\" t -.TH QCheckListItem 3qt "2 February 2007" "Trolltech AS" \" -*- nroff -*- +.TH TQCheckListItem 3qt "2 February 2007" "Trolltech AS" \" -*- nroff -*- .\" Copyright 1992-2007 Trolltech ASA. All rights reserved. See the .\" license file included in the distribution for a complete license .\" statement. @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ .ad l .nh .SH NAME -QCheckListItem \- Checkable list view items +TQCheckListItem \- Checkable list view items .SH SYNOPSIS \fC#include <ntqlistview.h>\fR .PP @@ -22,31 +22,31 @@ Inherits QListViewItem. .BI "enum \fBToggleState\fR { Off, NoChange, On }" .br .ti -1c -.BI "\fBQCheckListItem\fR ( QCheckListItem * parent, const TQString & text, Type tt = RadioButtonController )" +.BI "\fBTQCheckListItem\fR ( TQCheckListItem * parent, const TQString & text, Type tt = RadioButtonController )" .br .ti -1c -.BI "\fBQCheckListItem\fR ( QCheckListItem * parent, QListViewItem * after, const TQString & text, Type tt = RadioButtonController )" +.BI "\fBTQCheckListItem\fR ( TQCheckListItem * parent, QListViewItem * after, const TQString & text, Type tt = RadioButtonController )" .br .ti -1c -.BI "\fBQCheckListItem\fR ( QListViewItem * parent, const TQString & text, Type tt = RadioButtonController )" +.BI "\fBTQCheckListItem\fR ( QListViewItem * parent, const TQString & text, Type tt = RadioButtonController )" .br .ti -1c -.BI "\fBQCheckListItem\fR ( QListViewItem * parent, QListViewItem * after, const TQString & text, Type tt = RadioButtonController )" +.BI "\fBTQCheckListItem\fR ( QListViewItem * parent, QListViewItem * after, const TQString & text, Type tt = RadioButtonController )" .br .ti -1c -.BI "\fBQCheckListItem\fR ( QListView * parent, const TQString & text, Type tt = RadioButtonController )" +.BI "\fBTQCheckListItem\fR ( QListView * parent, const TQString & text, Type tt = RadioButtonController )" .br .ti -1c -.BI "\fBQCheckListItem\fR ( QListView * parent, QListViewItem * after, const TQString & text, Type tt = RadioButtonController )" +.BI "\fBTQCheckListItem\fR ( QListView * parent, QListViewItem * after, const TQString & text, Type tt = RadioButtonController )" .br .ti -1c -.BI "\fBQCheckListItem\fR ( QListViewItem * parent, const TQString & text, const TQPixmap & p )" +.BI "\fBTQCheckListItem\fR ( QListViewItem * parent, const TQString & text, const TQPixmap & p )" .br .ti -1c -.BI "\fBQCheckListItem\fR ( QListView * parent, const TQString & text, const TQPixmap & p )" +.BI "\fBTQCheckListItem\fR ( QListView * parent, const TQString & text, const TQPixmap & p )" .br .ti -1c -.BI "\fB~QCheckListItem\fR ()" +.BI "\fB~TQCheckListItem\fR ()" .br .ti -1c .BI "virtual void \fBpaintCell\fR ( TQPainter * p, const TQColorGroup & cg, int column, int width, int align )" @@ -95,9 +95,9 @@ Inherits QListViewItem. .br .in -1c .SH DESCRIPTION -The QCheckListItem class provides checkable list view items. +The TQCheckListItem class provides checkable list view items. .PP -QCheckListItems are used in QListViews to provide QListViewItems that are checkboxes, radio buttons or controllers. +TQCheckListItems are used in QListViews to provide QListViewItems that are checkboxes, radio buttons or controllers. .PP Checkbox and controller check list items may be inserted at any level in a list view. Radio button check list items must be children of a controller check list item. .PP @@ -111,72 +111,72 @@ The item can be checked or unchecked with setOn(). Its type can be retrieved wit .PP See also QListViewItem, QListView, and Advanced Widgets. .SS "Member Type Documentation" -.SH "QCheckListItem::ToggleState" -This enum specifies a QCheckListItem's toggle state. +.SH "TQCheckListItem::ToggleState" +This enum specifies a TQCheckListItem's toggle state. .TP -\fCQCheckListItem::Off\fR +\fCTQCheckListItem::Off\fR .TP -\fCQCheckListItem::NoChange\fR +\fCTQCheckListItem::NoChange\fR .TP -\fCQCheckListItem::On\fR -.SH "QCheckListItem::Type" -This enum type specifies a QCheckListItem's type: +\fCTQCheckListItem::On\fR +.SH "TQCheckListItem::Type" +This enum type specifies a TQCheckListItem's type: .TP -\fCQCheckListItem::RadioButton\fR +\fCTQCheckListItem::RadioButton\fR .TP -\fCQCheckListItem::CheckBox\fR +\fCTQCheckListItem::CheckBox\fR .TP -\fCQCheckListItem::Controller\fR - \fIobsolete\fR (use RadioButtonController instead) +\fCTQCheckListItem::Controller\fR - \fIobsolete\fR (use RadioButtonController instead) .TP -\fCQCheckListItem::RadioButtonController\fR +\fCTQCheckListItem::RadioButtonController\fR .TP -\fCQCheckListItem::CheckBoxController\fR +\fCTQCheckListItem::CheckBoxController\fR .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION -.SH "QCheckListItem::QCheckListItem ( QCheckListItem * parent, const TQString & text, Type tt = RadioButtonController )" +.SH "TQCheckListItem::TQCheckListItem ( TQCheckListItem * parent, const TQString & text, Type tt = RadioButtonController )" Constructs a checkable item with parent \fIparent\fR, text \fItext\fR and of type \fItt\fR. Note that a RadioButton must be the child of a RadioButtonController, otherwise it will not toggle. -.SH "QCheckListItem::QCheckListItem ( QCheckListItem * parent, QListViewItem * after, const TQString & text, Type tt = RadioButtonController )" +.SH "TQCheckListItem::TQCheckListItem ( TQCheckListItem * parent, QListViewItem * after, const TQString & text, Type tt = RadioButtonController )" Constructs a checkable item with parent \fIparent\fR, which is after \fIafter\fR in the parent's list of children, and with text \fItext\fR and of type \fItt\fR. Note that a RadioButton must be the child of a RadioButtonController, otherwise it will not toggle. -.SH "QCheckListItem::QCheckListItem ( QListViewItem * parent, const TQString & text, Type tt = RadioButtonController )" +.SH "TQCheckListItem::TQCheckListItem ( QListViewItem * parent, const TQString & text, Type tt = RadioButtonController )" Constructs a checkable item with parent \fIparent\fR, text \fItext\fR and of type \fItt\fR. Note that this item must \fInot\fR be a RadioButton. Radio buttons must be children of a RadioButtonController. -.SH "QCheckListItem::QCheckListItem ( QListViewItem * parent, QListViewItem * after, const TQString & text, Type tt = RadioButtonController )" +.SH "TQCheckListItem::TQCheckListItem ( QListViewItem * parent, QListViewItem * after, const TQString & text, Type tt = RadioButtonController )" Constructs a checkable item with parent \fIparent\fR, which is after \fIafter\fR in the parent's list of children, with text \fItext\fR and of type \fItt\fR. Note that this item must \fInot\fR be a RadioButton. Radio buttons must be children of a RadioButtonController. -.SH "QCheckListItem::QCheckListItem ( QListView * parent, const TQString & text, Type tt = RadioButtonController )" +.SH "TQCheckListItem::TQCheckListItem ( QListView * parent, const TQString & text, Type tt = RadioButtonController )" Constructs a checkable item with parent \fIparent\fR, text \fItext\fR and of type \fItt\fR. Note that \fItt\fR must \fInot\fR be RadioButton. Radio buttons must be children of a RadioButtonController. -.SH "QCheckListItem::QCheckListItem ( QListView * parent, QListViewItem * after, const TQString & text, Type tt = RadioButtonController )" +.SH "TQCheckListItem::TQCheckListItem ( QListView * parent, QListViewItem * after, const TQString & text, Type tt = RadioButtonController )" Constructs a checkable item with parent \fIparent\fR, which is after \fIafter\fR in the parent's list of children, with text \fItext\fR and of type \fItt\fR. Note that \fItt\fR must \fInot\fR be RadioButton. Radio buttons must be children of a RadioButtonController. -.SH "QCheckListItem::QCheckListItem ( QListViewItem * parent, const TQString & text, const TQPixmap & p )" +.SH "TQCheckListItem::TQCheckListItem ( QListViewItem * parent, const TQString & text, const TQPixmap & p )" Constructs a RadioButtonController item with parent \fIparent\fR, text \fItext\fR and pixmap \fIp\fR. -.SH "QCheckListItem::QCheckListItem ( QListView * parent, const TQString & text, const TQPixmap & p )" +.SH "TQCheckListItem::TQCheckListItem ( QListView * parent, const TQString & text, const TQPixmap & p )" Constructs a RadioButtonController item with parent \fIparent\fR, text \fItext\fR and pixmap \fIp\fR. -.SH "QCheckListItem::~QCheckListItem ()" +.SH "TQCheckListItem::~TQCheckListItem ()" Destroys the item, and all its children to any depth, freeing up all allocated resources. -.SH "void QCheckListItem::activate ()\fC [virtual protected]\fR" +.SH "void TQCheckListItem::activate ()\fC [virtual protected]\fR" Toggle check box or set radio button to on. .PP Reimplemented from QListViewItem. -.SH "bool QCheckListItem::isOn () const" +.SH "bool TQCheckListItem::isOn () const" Returns TRUE if the item is toggled on; otherwise returns FALSE. -.SH "bool QCheckListItem::isTristate () const" +.SH "bool TQCheckListItem::isTristate () const" Returns TRUE if the item is tristate; otherwise returns FALSE. .PP See also setTristate(). -.SH "void QCheckListItem::paintCell ( TQPainter * p, const TQColorGroup & cg, int column, int width, int align )\fC [virtual]\fR" +.SH "void TQCheckListItem::paintCell ( TQPainter * p, const TQColorGroup & cg, int column, int width, int align )\fC [virtual]\fR" Paints the item using the painter \fIp\fR and the color group \fIcg\fR. The item is in column \fIcolumn\fR, has width \fIwidth\fR and has alignment \fIalign\fR. (See TQt::AlignmentFlags for valid alignments.) .PP Reimplemented from QListViewItem. -.SH "void QCheckListItem::paintFocus ( TQPainter * p, const TQColorGroup & cg, const TQRect & r )\fC [virtual]\fR" +.SH "void TQCheckListItem::paintFocus ( TQPainter * p, const TQColorGroup & cg, const TQRect & r )\fC [virtual]\fR" Draws the focus rectangle \fIr\fR using the color group \fIcg\fR on the painter \fIp\fR. .PP Reimplemented from QListViewItem. -.SH "int QCheckListItem::rtti () const\fC [virtual]\fR" +.SH "int TQCheckListItem::rtti () const\fC [virtual]\fR" Returns 1. .PP Make your derived classes return their own values for rtti(), and you can distinguish between list view items. You should use values greater than 1000, to allow for extensions to this class. .PP Reimplemented from QListViewItem. -.SH "void QCheckListItem::setOn ( bool b )\fC [virtual]\fR" +.SH "void TQCheckListItem::setOn ( bool b )\fC [virtual]\fR" Sets the button on if \fIb\fR is TRUE, otherwise sets it off. Maintains radio button exclusivity. -.SH "void QCheckListItem::setState ( ToggleState s )" +.SH "void TQCheckListItem::setState ( ToggleState s )" Sets the toggle state of the checklistitem to \fIs\fR. \fIs\fR can be Off, NoChange or On. .PP Tristate can only be enabled for CheckBox or CheckBoxController, therefore the NoChange only applies to them. @@ -184,27 +184,27 @@ Tristate can only be enabled for CheckBox or CheckBoxController, therefore the N Setting the state to On or Off on a CheckBoxController will recursivly set the states of its children to the same state. .PP Setting the state to NoChange on a CheckBoxController will make it recursivly recall the previous stored state of its children. If there was no previous stored state the children are all set to On. -.SH "void QCheckListItem::setTristate ( bool b )" +.SH "void TQCheckListItem::setTristate ( bool b )" Sets tristate to \fIb\fR if the Type is either a CheckBoxController or a CheckBox. .PP \fCCheckBoxControllers\fR are tristate by default. .PP See also state() and isTristate(). -.SH "ToggleState QCheckListItem::state () const" +.SH "ToggleState TQCheckListItem::state () const" Returns the state of the item. .PP -See also QCheckListItem::ToggleState. -.SH "void QCheckListItem::stateChange ( bool )\fC [virtual protected]\fR" +See also TQCheckListItem::ToggleState. +.SH "void TQCheckListItem::stateChange ( bool )\fC [virtual protected]\fR" This virtual function is called when the item changes its state. NoChange (if tristate is enabled and the type is either CheckBox or CheckBoxController) reports the same as Off, so use state() to determine if the state is actually Off or NoChange. -.SH "TQString QCheckListItem::text () const" +.SH "TQString TQCheckListItem::text () const" Returns the item's text. -.SH "void QCheckListItem::turnOffChild ()\fC [protected]\fR" +.SH "void TQCheckListItem::turnOffChild ()\fC [protected]\fR" If this is a RadioButtonController that has RadioButton children, turn off the child that is on. -.SH "Type QCheckListItem::type () const" +.SH "Type TQCheckListItem::type () const" Returns the type of this item. .SH "SEE ALSO" -.BR http://doc.trolltech.com/qchecklistitem.html +.BR http://doc.trolltech.com/tqchecklistitem.html .BR http://www.trolltech.com/faq/tech.html .SH COPYRIGHT Copyright 1992-2007 Trolltech ASA, http://www.trolltech.com. See the diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqchecktableitem.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqchecktableitem.3qt index 1245be951..b2e99a38c 100644 --- a/doc/man/man3/tqchecktableitem.3qt +++ b/doc/man/man3/tqchecktableitem.3qt @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ '\" t -.TH QCheckTableItem 3qt "2 February 2007" "Trolltech AS" \" -*- nroff -*- +.TH TQCheckTableItem 3qt "2 February 2007" "Trolltech AS" \" -*- nroff -*- .\" Copyright 1992-2007 Trolltech ASA. All rights reserved. See the .\" license file included in the distribution for a complete license .\" statement. @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ .ad l .nh .SH NAME -QCheckTableItem \- Checkboxes in QTables +TQCheckTableItem \- Checkboxes in QTables .SH SYNOPSIS \fC#include <ntqtable.h>\fR .PP @@ -16,7 +16,7 @@ Inherits QTableItem. .SS "Public Members" .in +1c .ti -1c -.BI "\fBQCheckTableItem\fR ( QTable * table, const TQString & txt )" +.BI "\fBTQCheckTableItem\fR ( QTable * table, const TQString & txt )" .br .ti -1c .BI "virtual void \fBsetChecked\fR ( bool b )" @@ -29,17 +29,17 @@ Inherits QTableItem. .br .in -1c .SH DESCRIPTION -The QCheckTableItem class provides checkboxes in QTables. +The TQCheckTableItem class provides checkboxes in QTables. .PP -A QCheckTableItem is a table item which looks and behaves like a checkbox. The advantage of using QCheckTableItems rather than real checkboxes is that a QCheckTableItem uses far less resources than a real checkbox would in a QTable. When the cell has the focus it displays a real checkbox which the user can interact with. When the cell does not have the focus the cell \fIlooks\fR like a checkbox. Pixmaps may not be used in QCheckTableItems. +A TQCheckTableItem is a table item which looks and behaves like a checkbox. The advantage of using TQCheckTableItems rather than real checkboxes is that a TQCheckTableItem uses far less resources than a real checkbox would in a QTable. When the cell has the focus it displays a real checkbox which the user can interact with. When the cell does not have the focus the cell \fIlooks\fR like a checkbox. Pixmaps may not be used in TQCheckTableItems. .PP -QCheckTableItem items have the edit type WhenCurrent (see EditType). +TQCheckTableItem items have the edit type WhenCurrent (see EditType). .PP To change the checkbox's label use setText(). The checkbox can be checked and unchecked with setChecked() and its state retrieved using isChecked(). .PP -To populate a table cell with a QCheckTableItem use QTable::setItem(). +To populate a table cell with a TQCheckTableItem use QTable::setItem(). .PP -QCheckTableItems can be distinguished from QTableItems and QComboTableItems using their Run Time Type Identification (rtti) value. +TQCheckTableItems can be distinguished from QTableItems and TQComboTableItems using their Run Time Type Identification (rtti) value. .PP <center> .ce 1 @@ -47,15 +47,15 @@ QCheckTableItems can be distinguished from QTableItems and QComboTableItems usin .PP </center> .PP -See also rtti(), EditType, QComboTableItem, QTableItem, QCheckBox, and Advanced Widgets. +See also rtti(), EditType, TQComboTableItem, QTableItem, TQCheckBox, and Advanced Widgets. .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION -.SH "QCheckTableItem::QCheckTableItem ( QTable * table, const TQString & txt )" -Creates a QCheckTableItem with an EditType of WhenCurrent as a child of \fItable\fR. The checkbox is initially unchecked and its label is set to the string \fItxt\fR. -.SH "bool QCheckTableItem::isChecked () const" +.SH "TQCheckTableItem::TQCheckTableItem ( QTable * table, const TQString & txt )" +Creates a TQCheckTableItem with an EditType of WhenCurrent as a child of \fItable\fR. The checkbox is initially unchecked and its label is set to the string \fItxt\fR. +.SH "bool TQCheckTableItem::isChecked () const" Returns TRUE if the checkbox table item is checked; otherwise returns FALSE. .PP See also setChecked(). -.SH "int QCheckTableItem::rtti () const\fC [virtual]\fR" +.SH "int TQCheckTableItem::rtti () const\fC [virtual]\fR" Returns 2. .PP Make your derived classes return their own values for rtti()to distinguish between different table item subclasses. You should use values greater than 1000, preferably a large random number, to allow for extensions to this class. @@ -63,13 +63,13 @@ Make your derived classes return their own values for rtti()to distinguish betwe See also QTableItem::rtti(). .PP Reimplemented from QTableItem. -.SH "void QCheckTableItem::setChecked ( bool b )\fC [virtual]\fR" +.SH "void TQCheckTableItem::setChecked ( bool b )\fC [virtual]\fR" If \fIb\fR is TRUE the checkbox is checked; if \fIb\fR is FALSE the checkbox is unchecked. .PP See also isChecked(). .SH "SEE ALSO" -.BR http://doc.trolltech.com/qchecktableitem.html +.BR http://doc.trolltech.com/tqchecktableitem.html .BR http://www.trolltech.com/faq/tech.html .SH COPYRIGHT Copyright 1992-2007 Trolltech ASA, http://www.trolltech.com. See the diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqcolordialog.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqcolordialog.3qt index 967c8cda4..15fb0bba0 100644 --- a/doc/man/man3/tqcolordialog.3qt +++ b/doc/man/man3/tqcolordialog.3qt @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ TQColorDialog \- Dialog widget for specifying colors .SH SYNOPSIS \fC#include <tqcolordialog.h>\fR .PP -Inherits QDialog. +Inherits TQDialog. .PP .SS "Static Public Members" <li class=fn>TQColor \fBgetColor\fR ( const TQColor & initial = white, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 ) <li class=fn>TQRgb \fBgetRgba\fR ( TQRgb initial, bool * ok = 0, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 ) <li class=fn>int \fBcustomCount\fR () <li class=fn>TQRgb \fBcustomColor\fR ( int i ) <li class=fn>void \fBsetCustomColor\fR ( int i, TQRgb c ) <li class=fn>void \fBsetStandardColor\fR ( int i, TQRgb c ) diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqcombobox.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqcombobox.3qt index fff211689..14bafe163 100644 --- a/doc/man/man3/tqcombobox.3qt +++ b/doc/man/man3/tqcombobox.3qt @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ '\" t -.TH QComboBox 3qt "2 February 2007" "Trolltech AS" \" -*- nroff -*- +.TH TQComboBox 3qt "2 February 2007" "Trolltech AS" \" -*- nroff -*- .\" Copyright 1992-2007 Trolltech ASA. All rights reserved. See the .\" license file included in the distribution for a complete license .\" statement. @@ -7,22 +7,22 @@ .ad l .nh .SH NAME -QComboBox \- Combined button and popup list +TQComboBox \- Combined button and popup list .SH SYNOPSIS -\fC#include <ntqcombobox.h>\fR +\fC#include <tqcombobox.h>\fR .PP Inherits TQWidget. .PP .SS "Public Members" .in +1c .ti -1c -.BI "\fBQComboBox\fR ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )" +.BI "\fBTQComboBox\fR ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )" .br .ti -1c -.BI "\fBQComboBox\fR ( bool rw, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )" +.BI "\fBTQComboBox\fR ( bool rw, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )" .br .ti -1c -.BI "\fB~QComboBox\fR ()" +.BI "\fB~TQComboBox\fR ()" .br .ti -1c .BI "int \fBcount\fR () const" @@ -124,10 +124,10 @@ Inherits TQWidget. .BI "QListBox * \fBlistBox\fR () const" .br .ti -1c -.BI "virtual void \fBsetLineEdit\fR ( QLineEdit * edit )" +.BI "virtual void \fBsetLineEdit\fR ( TQLineEdit * edit )" .br .ti -1c -.BI "QLineEdit * \fBlineEdit\fR () const" +.BI "TQLineEdit * \fBlineEdit\fR () const" .br .ti -1c .BI "virtual void \fBsetAutoCompletion\fR ( bool )" @@ -221,19 +221,19 @@ Inherits TQWidget. .br .in -1c .SH DESCRIPTION -The QComboBox widget is a combined button and popup list. +The TQComboBox widget is a combined button and popup list. .PP A combobox is a selection widget which displays the current item and can pop up a list of items. A combobox may be editable in which case the user can enter arbitrary strings. .PP Comboboxes provide a means of showing the user's current choice out of a list of options in a way that takes up the minimum amount of screen space. .PP -QComboBox supports three different display styles: Aqua/Motif 1.x, Motif 2.0 and Windows. In Motif 1.x, a combobox was called XmOptionMenu. In Motif 2.0, OSF introduced an improved combobox and named that XmComboBox. QComboBox provides both. +TQComboBox supports three different display styles: Aqua/Motif 1.x, Motif 2.0 and Windows. In Motif 1.x, a combobox was called XmOptionMenu. In Motif 2.0, OSF introduced an improved combobox and named that XmComboBox. TQComboBox provides both. .PP -QComboBox provides two different constructors. The simplest constructor creates an "old-style" combobox in Motif (or Aqua) style: +TQComboBox provides two different constructors. The simplest constructor creates an "old-style" combobox in Motif (or Aqua) style: .PP .nf .br - QComboBox *c = new QComboBox( this, "read-only combobox" ); + TQComboBox *c = new TQComboBox( this, "read-only combobox" ); .br .fi .PP @@ -241,9 +241,9 @@ The other constructor creates a new-style combobox in Motif style, and can creat .PP .nf .br - QComboBox *c1 = new QComboBox( FALSE, this, "read-only combobox" ); + TQComboBox *c1 = new TQComboBox( FALSE, this, "read-only combobox" ); .br - QComboBox *c2 = new QComboBox( TRUE, this, "editable combobox" ); + TQComboBox *c2 = new TQComboBox( TRUE, this, "editable combobox" ); .br .fi .PP @@ -283,118 +283,118 @@ A combobox can be populated using the insert functions, insertStringList() and i .PP (Windows style) .PP -Depending on the style, QComboBox will use a QListBox or a TQPopupMenu to display the list of items. See setListBox() for more information. +Depending on the style, TQComboBox will use a QListBox or a TQPopupMenu to display the list of items. See setListBox() for more information. .PP -See also QLineEdit, QListBox, QSpinBox, QRadioButton, QButtonGroup, GUI Design Handbook: Combo Box, GUI Design Handbook: Drop-Down List Box, and Basic Widgets. +See also TQLineEdit, QListBox, TQSpinBox, TQRadioButton, QButtonGroup, GUI Design Handbook: Combo Box, GUI Design Handbook: Drop-Down List Box, and Basic Widgets. .SS "Member Type Documentation" -.SH "QComboBox::Policy" -This enum specifies what the QComboBox should do when a new string is entered by the user. +.SH "TQComboBox::Policy" +This enum specifies what the TQComboBox should do when a new string is entered by the user. .TP -\fCQComboBox::NoInsertion\fR - the string will not be inserted into the combobox. +\fCTQComboBox::NoInsertion\fR - the string will not be inserted into the combobox. .TP -\fCQComboBox::AtTop\fR - insert the string as the first item in the combobox. +\fCTQComboBox::AtTop\fR - insert the string as the first item in the combobox. .TP -\fCQComboBox::AtCurrent\fR - replace the previously selected item with the string the user has entered. +\fCTQComboBox::AtCurrent\fR - replace the previously selected item with the string the user has entered. .TP -\fCQComboBox::AtBottom\fR - insert the string as the last item in the combobox. +\fCTQComboBox::AtBottom\fR - insert the string as the last item in the combobox. .TP -\fCQComboBox::AfterCurrent\fR - insert the string after the previously selected item. +\fCTQComboBox::AfterCurrent\fR - insert the string after the previously selected item. .TP -\fCQComboBox::BeforeCurrent\fR - insert the string before the previously selected item. +\fCTQComboBox::BeforeCurrent\fR - insert the string before the previously selected item. .PP activated() is always emitted when the string is entered. .PP If inserting the new string would cause the combobox to breach its content size limit, the item at the other end of the list is deleted. The definition of "other end" is implementation-dependent. .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION -.SH "QComboBox::QComboBox ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )" +.SH "TQComboBox::TQComboBox ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )" Constructs a combobox widget with parent \fIparent\fR called \fIname\fR. .PP This constructor creates a popup list if the program uses Motif (or Aqua) look and feel; this is compatible with Motif 1.x and Aqua. .PP -Note: If you use this constructor to create your QComboBox, then the pixmap() function will always return 0. To workaround this, use the other constructor. -.SH "QComboBox::QComboBox ( bool rw, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )" +Note: If you use this constructor to create your TQComboBox, then the pixmap() function will always return 0. To workaround this, use the other constructor. +.SH "TQComboBox::TQComboBox ( bool rw, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )" Constructs a combobox with a maximum size and either Motif 2.0 or Windows look and feel. .PP The input field can be edited if \fIrw\fR is TRUE, otherwise the user may only choose one of the items in the combobox. .PP The \fIparent\fR and \fIname\fR arguments are passed on to the TQWidget constructor. -.SH "QComboBox::~QComboBox ()" +.SH "TQComboBox::~TQComboBox ()" Destroys the combobox. -.SH "void QComboBox::activated ( int index )\fC [signal]\fR" +.SH "void TQComboBox::activated ( int index )\fC [signal]\fR" This signal is emitted when a new item has been activated (selected). The \fIindex\fR is the position of the item in the combobox. .PP This signal is not emitted if the item is changed programmatically, e.g. using setCurrentItem(). .PP Examples: .)l fileiconview/mainwindow.cpp, helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp, lineedits/lineedits.cpp, listboxcombo/listboxcombo.cpp, and qmag/qmag.cpp. -.SH "void QComboBox::activated ( const TQString & string )\fC [signal]\fR" +.SH "void TQComboBox::activated ( const TQString & string )\fC [signal]\fR" This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. .PP This signal is emitted when a new item has been activated (selected). \fIstring\fR is the selected string. .PP You can also use the activated(int) signal, but be aware that its argument is meaningful only for selected strings, not for user entered strings. -.SH "bool QComboBox::autoCompletion () const" +.SH "bool TQComboBox::autoCompletion () const" Returns TRUE if auto-completion is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "autoCompletion" property for details. -.SH "bool QComboBox::autoResize () const" +.SH "bool TQComboBox::autoResize () const" Returns TRUE if auto resize is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "autoResize" property for details. -.SH "void QComboBox::changeItem ( const TQString & t, int index )" +.SH "void TQComboBox::changeItem ( const TQString & t, int index )" Replaces the item at position \fIindex\fR with the text \fIt\fR. -.SH "void QComboBox::changeItem ( const TQPixmap & im, int index )" +.SH "void TQComboBox::changeItem ( const TQPixmap & im, int index )" This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. .PP Replaces the item at position \fIindex\fR with the pixmap \fIim\fR, unless the combobox is editable. .PP See also insertItem(). -.SH "void QComboBox::changeItem ( const TQPixmap & im, const TQString & t, int index )" +.SH "void TQComboBox::changeItem ( const TQPixmap & im, const TQString & t, int index )" This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. .PP Replaces the item at position \fIindex\fR with the pixmap \fIim\fR and the text \fIt\fR. .PP See also insertItem(). -.SH "void QComboBox::clear ()\fC [slot]\fR" +.SH "void TQComboBox::clear ()\fC [slot]\fR" Removes all combobox items. -.SH "void QComboBox::clearEdit ()\fC [slot]\fR" +.SH "void TQComboBox::clearEdit ()\fC [slot]\fR" Clears the line edit without changing the combobox's contents. Does nothing if the combobox isn't editable. .PP This is particularly useful when using a combobox as a line edit with history. For example you can connect the combobox's activated() signal to clearEdit() in order to present the user with a new, empty line as soon as Enter is pressed. .PP See also setEditText(). -.SH "void QComboBox::clearValidator ()\fC [slot]\fR" +.SH "void TQComboBox::clearValidator ()\fC [slot]\fR" This slot is equivalent to setValidator( 0 ). -.SH "int QComboBox::count () const" +.SH "int TQComboBox::count () const" Returns the number of items in the combobox. See the "count" property for details. -.SH "int QComboBox::currentItem () const" +.SH "int TQComboBox::currentItem () const" Returns the index of the current item in the combobox. See the "currentItem" property for details. -.SH "TQString QComboBox::currentText () const" +.SH "TQString TQComboBox::currentText () const" Returns the text of the combobox's current item. See the "currentText" property for details. -.SH "bool QComboBox::duplicatesEnabled () const" +.SH "bool TQComboBox::duplicatesEnabled () const" Returns TRUE if duplicates are allowed; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "duplicatesEnabled" property for details. -.SH "bool QComboBox::editable () const" +.SH "bool TQComboBox::editable () const" Returns TRUE if the combobox is editable; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "editable" property for details. -.SH "void QComboBox::highlighted ( int index )\fC [signal]\fR" +.SH "void TQComboBox::highlighted ( int index )\fC [signal]\fR" This signal is emitted when a new item has been set to be the current item. The \fIindex\fR is the position of the item in the combobox. .PP This signal is not emitted if the item is changed programmatically, e.g. using setCurrentItem(). -.SH "void QComboBox::highlighted ( const TQString & string )\fC [signal]\fR" +.SH "void TQComboBox::highlighted ( const TQString & string )\fC [signal]\fR" This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. .PP This signal is emitted when a new item has been set to be the current item. \fIstring\fR is the item's text. .PP You can also use the highlighted(int) signal. -.SH "void QComboBox::insertItem ( const TQString & t, int index = -1 )" +.SH "void TQComboBox::insertItem ( const TQString & t, int index = -1 )" Inserts a text item with text \fIt\fR, at position \fIindex\fR. The item will be appended if \fIindex\fR is negative. .PP Examples: .)l chart/optionsform.cpp, fileiconview/mainwindow.cpp, helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp, lineedits/lineedits.cpp, listboxcombo/listboxcombo.cpp, regexptester/regexptester.cpp, and tictac/tictac.cpp. -.SH "void QComboBox::insertItem ( const TQPixmap & pixmap, int index = -1 )" +.SH "void TQComboBox::insertItem ( const TQPixmap & pixmap, int index = -1 )" This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. .PP Inserts a \fIpixmap\fR item at position \fIindex\fR. The item will be appended if \fIindex\fR is negative. -.SH "void QComboBox::insertItem ( const TQPixmap & pixmap, const TQString & text, int index = -1 )" +.SH "void TQComboBox::insertItem ( const TQPixmap & pixmap, const TQString & text, int index = -1 )" This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. .PP Inserts a \fIpixmap\fR item with additional text \fItext\fR at position \fIindex\fR. The item will be appended if \fIindex\fR is negative. -.SH "void QComboBox::insertStrList ( const char ** strings, int numStrings = -1, int index = -1 )" +.SH "void TQComboBox::insertStrList ( const char ** strings, int numStrings = -1, int index = -1 )" Inserts the array of char * \fIstrings\fR at position \fIindex\fR in the combobox. .PP The \fInumStrings\fR argument is the number of strings. If \fInumStrings\fR is -1 (default), the \fIstrings\fR array must be terminated with 0. @@ -412,98 +412,98 @@ Example: See also insertStringList(). .PP Example: qmag/qmag.cpp. -.SH "void QComboBox::insertStrList ( const TQStrList & list, int index = -1 )" +.SH "void TQComboBox::insertStrList ( const TQStrList & list, int index = -1 )" This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. .PP Inserts the \fIlist\fR of strings at position \fIindex\fR in the combobox. .PP This is only for compatibility since it does not support Unicode strings. See insertStringList(). -.SH "void QComboBox::insertStrList ( const TQStrList * list, int index = -1 )" +.SH "void TQComboBox::insertStrList ( const TQStrList * list, int index = -1 )" This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. .PP Inserts the \fIlist\fR of strings at position \fIindex\fR in the combobox. .PP This is only for compatibility since it does not support Unicode strings. See insertStringList(). -.SH "void QComboBox::insertStringList ( const TQStringList & list, int index = -1 )" +.SH "void TQComboBox::insertStringList ( const TQStringList & list, int index = -1 )" Inserts the \fIlist\fR of strings at position \fIindex\fR in the combobox. -.SH "Policy QComboBox::insertionPolicy () const" +.SH "Policy TQComboBox::insertionPolicy () const" Returns the position of the items inserted by the user. See the "insertionPolicy" property for details. -.SH "QLineEdit * QComboBox::lineEdit () const" +.SH "TQLineEdit * TQComboBox::lineEdit () const" Returns the line edit, or 0 if there is no line edit. .PP Only editable listboxes have a line editor. -.SH "QListBox * QComboBox::listBox () const" -Returns the current list box, or 0 if there is no list box. (QComboBox can use TQPopupMenu instead of QListBox.) Provided to match setListBox(). +.SH "QListBox * TQComboBox::listBox () const" +Returns the current list box, or 0 if there is no list box. (TQComboBox can use TQPopupMenu instead of QListBox.) Provided to match setListBox(). .PP See also setListBox(). .PP Example: listboxcombo/listboxcombo.cpp. -.SH "int QComboBox::maxCount () const" +.SH "int TQComboBox::maxCount () const" Returns the maximum number of items allowed in the combobox. See the "maxCount" property for details. -.SH "const TQPixmap * QComboBox::pixmap ( int index ) const" +.SH "const TQPixmap * TQComboBox::pixmap ( int index ) const" Returns the pixmap item at position \fIindex\fR, or 0 if the item is not a pixmap. -.SH "void QComboBox::popup ()\fC [virtual]\fR" +.SH "void TQComboBox::popup ()\fC [virtual]\fR" Pops up the combobox popup list. .PP If the list is empty, no items appear. -.SH "void QComboBox::removeItem ( int index )" +.SH "void TQComboBox::removeItem ( int index )" Removes the item at position \fIindex\fR. -.SH "void QComboBox::setAutoCompletion ( bool )\fC [virtual]\fR" +.SH "void TQComboBox::setAutoCompletion ( bool )\fC [virtual]\fR" Sets whether auto-completion is enabled. See the "autoCompletion" property for details. -.SH "void QComboBox::setAutoResize ( bool )\fC [virtual]\fR" +.SH "void TQComboBox::setAutoResize ( bool )\fC [virtual]\fR" Sets whether auto resize is enabled. See the "autoResize" property for details. -.SH "void QComboBox::setCurrentItem ( int index )\fC [virtual]\fR" +.SH "void TQComboBox::setCurrentItem ( int index )\fC [virtual]\fR" Sets the index of the current item in the combobox to \fIindex\fR. See the "currentItem" property for details. -.SH "void QComboBox::setCurrentText ( const TQString & )\fC [virtual]\fR" +.SH "void TQComboBox::setCurrentText ( const TQString & )\fC [virtual]\fR" Sets the text of the combobox's current item. See the "currentText" property for details. -.SH "void QComboBox::setDuplicatesEnabled ( bool enable )" +.SH "void TQComboBox::setDuplicatesEnabled ( bool enable )" Sets whether duplicates are allowed to \fIenable\fR. See the "duplicatesEnabled" property for details. -.SH "void QComboBox::setEditText ( const TQString & newText )\fC [virtual slot]\fR" +.SH "void TQComboBox::setEditText ( const TQString & newText )\fC [virtual slot]\fR" Sets the text in the line edit to \fInewText\fR without changing the combobox's contents. Does nothing if the combobox isn't editable. .PP This is useful e.g. for providing a good starting point for the user's editing and entering the change in the combobox only when the user presses Enter. .PP See also clearEdit() and insertItem(). -.SH "void QComboBox::setEditable ( bool )" +.SH "void TQComboBox::setEditable ( bool )" Sets whether the combobox is editable. See the "editable" property for details. -.SH "void QComboBox::setFont ( const TQFont & font )\fC [virtual]\fR" +.SH "void TQComboBox::setFont ( const TQFont & font )\fC [virtual]\fR" Sets the font for both the combobox button and the combobox popup list to \fIfont\fR. .PP Reimplemented from TQWidget. -.SH "void QComboBox::setInsertionPolicy ( Policy policy )\fC [virtual]\fR" +.SH "void TQComboBox::setInsertionPolicy ( Policy policy )\fC [virtual]\fR" Sets the position of the items inserted by the user to \fIpolicy\fR. See the "insertionPolicy" property for details. -.SH "void QComboBox::setLineEdit ( QLineEdit * edit )\fC [virtual]\fR" +.SH "void TQComboBox::setLineEdit ( TQLineEdit * edit )\fC [virtual]\fR" Sets the line edit to use \fIedit\fR instead of the current line edit. -.SH "void QComboBox::setListBox ( QListBox * newListBox )\fC [virtual]\fR" +.SH "void TQComboBox::setListBox ( QListBox * newListBox )\fC [virtual]\fR" Sets the combobox to use \fInewListBox\fR instead of the current list box or popup. As a side effect, it clears the combobox of its current contents. .PP -\fBWarning:\fR QComboBox assumes that newListBox->text(n) returns non-null for 0 <= n < newListbox->count(). This assumption is necessary because of the line edit in QComboBox. -.SH "void QComboBox::setMaxCount ( int )\fC [virtual]\fR" +\fBWarning:\fR TQComboBox assumes that newListBox->text(n) returns non-null for 0 <= n < newListbox->count(). This assumption is necessary because of the line edit in TQComboBox. +.SH "void TQComboBox::setMaxCount ( int )\fC [virtual]\fR" Sets the maximum number of items allowed in the combobox. See the "maxCount" property for details. -.SH "void QComboBox::setPalette ( const TQPalette & palette )\fC [virtual]\fR" +.SH "void TQComboBox::setPalette ( const TQPalette & palette )\fC [virtual]\fR" Sets the palette for both the combobox button and the combobox popup list to \fIpalette\fR. .PP Reimplemented from TQWidget. -.SH "void QComboBox::setSizeLimit ( int )\fC [virtual]\fR" +.SH "void TQComboBox::setSizeLimit ( int )\fC [virtual]\fR" Sets the maximum on-screen size of the combobox. See the "sizeLimit" property for details. -.SH "void QComboBox::setValidator ( const QValidator * v )\fC [virtual]\fR" +.SH "void TQComboBox::setValidator ( const QValidator * v )\fC [virtual]\fR" Applies the validator \fIv\fR to the combobox so that only text which is valid according to \fIv\fR is accepted. .PP This function does nothing if the combobox is not editable. .PP See also validator(), clearValidator(), and QValidator. -.SH "int QComboBox::sizeLimit () const" +.SH "int TQComboBox::sizeLimit () const" Returns the maximum on-screen size of the combobox. See the "sizeLimit" property for details. -.SH "TQString QComboBox::text ( int index ) const" +.SH "TQString TQComboBox::text ( int index ) const" Returns the text item at position \fIindex\fR, or TQString::null if the item is not a string. .PP See also currentText. .PP Examples: .)l fileiconview/mainwindow.cpp and helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp. -.SH "void QComboBox::textChanged ( const TQString & string )\fC [signal]\fR" +.SH "void TQComboBox::textChanged ( const TQString & string )\fC [signal]\fR" This signal is used for editable comboboxes. It is emitted whenever the contents of the text entry field changes. \fIstring\fR contains the new text. -.SH "const QValidator * QComboBox::validator () const" +.SH "const QValidator * TQComboBox::validator () const" Returns the validator which constrains editing for this combobox if there is one; otherwise returns 0. .PP See also setValidator(), clearValidator(), and QValidator. @@ -578,7 +578,7 @@ This property is ignored for both Motif 1.x style and non-editable comboboxes in Set this property's value with setSizeLimit() and get this property's value with sizeLimit(). .SH "SEE ALSO" -.BR http://doc.trolltech.com/ntqcombobox.html +.BR http://doc.trolltech.com/tqcombobox.html .BR http://www.trolltech.com/faq/tech.html .SH COPYRIGHT Copyright 1992-2007 Trolltech ASA, http://www.trolltech.com. See the diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqcombotableitem.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqcombotableitem.3qt index ca4314ea0..3d0db43e8 100644 --- a/doc/man/man3/tqcombotableitem.3qt +++ b/doc/man/man3/tqcombotableitem.3qt @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ '\" t -.TH QComboTableItem 3qt "2 February 2007" "Trolltech AS" \" -*- nroff -*- +.TH TQComboTableItem 3qt "2 February 2007" "Trolltech AS" \" -*- nroff -*- .\" Copyright 1992-2007 Trolltech ASA. All rights reserved. See the .\" license file included in the distribution for a complete license .\" statement. @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ .ad l .nh .SH NAME -QComboTableItem \- Means of using comboboxes in QTables +TQComboTableItem \- Means of using comboboxes in QTables .SH SYNOPSIS \fC#include <ntqtable.h>\fR .PP @@ -16,10 +16,10 @@ Inherits QTableItem. .SS "Public Members" .in +1c .ti -1c -.BI "\fBQComboTableItem\fR ( QTable * table, const TQStringList & list, bool editable = FALSE )" +.BI "\fBTQComboTableItem\fR ( QTable * table, const TQStringList & list, bool editable = FALSE )" .br .ti -1c -.BI "\fB~QComboTableItem\fR ()" +.BI "\fB~TQComboTableItem\fR ()" .br .ti -1c .BI "virtual void \fBsetCurrentItem\fR ( int i )" @@ -53,21 +53,21 @@ Inherits QTableItem. .br .in -1c .SH DESCRIPTION -The QComboTableItem class provides a means of using comboboxes in QTables. +The TQComboTableItem class provides a means of using comboboxes in QTables. .PP -A QComboTableItem is a table item which looks and behaves like a combobox. The advantage of using QComboTableItems rather than real comboboxes is that a QComboTableItem uses far less resources than real comboboxes in QTables. When the cell has the focus it displays a real combobox which the user can interact with. When the cell does not have the focus the cell \fIlooks\fR like a combobox. Only text items (i.e. no pixmaps) may be used in QComboTableItems. +A TQComboTableItem is a table item which looks and behaves like a combobox. The advantage of using TQComboTableItems rather than real comboboxes is that a TQComboTableItem uses far less resources than real comboboxes in QTables. When the cell has the focus it displays a real combobox which the user can interact with. When the cell does not have the focus the cell \fIlooks\fR like a combobox. Only text items (i.e. no pixmaps) may be used in TQComboTableItems. .PP -QComboTableItem items have the edit type WhenCurrent (see EditType). The QComboTableItem's list of items is provided by a TQStringList passed to the constructor. +TQComboTableItem items have the edit type WhenCurrent (see EditType). The TQComboTableItem's list of items is provided by a TQStringList passed to the constructor. .PP The list of items may be changed using setStringList(). The current item can be set with setCurrentItem() and retrieved with currentItem(). The text of the current item can be obtained with currentText(), and the text of a particular item can be retrieved with text(). .PP -If isEditable() is TRUE the QComboTableItem will permit the user to either choose an existing list item, or create a new list item by entering their own text; otherwise the user may only choose one of the existing list items. +If isEditable() is TRUE the TQComboTableItem will permit the user to either choose an existing list item, or create a new list item by entering their own text; otherwise the user may only choose one of the existing list items. .PP -To populate a table cell with a QComboTableItem use QTable::setItem(). +To populate a table cell with a TQComboTableItem use QTable::setItem(). .PP -QComboTableItems may be deleted with QTable::clearCell(). +TQComboTableItems may be deleted with QTable::clearCell(). .PP -QComboTableItems can be distinguished from QTableItems and QCheckTableItems using their Run Time Type Identification number (see rtti()). +TQComboTableItems can be distinguished from QTableItems and TQCheckTableItems using their Run Time Type Identification number (see rtti()). .PP <center> .ce 1 @@ -75,31 +75,31 @@ QComboTableItems can be distinguished from QTableItems and QCheckTableItems usin .PP </center> .PP -See also QCheckTableItem, QTableItem, QComboBox, and Advanced Widgets. +See also TQCheckTableItem, QTableItem, TQComboBox, and Advanced Widgets. .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION -.SH "QComboTableItem::QComboTableItem ( QTable * table, const TQStringList & list, bool editable = FALSE )" +.SH "TQComboTableItem::TQComboTableItem ( QTable * table, const TQStringList & list, bool editable = FALSE )" Creates a combo table item for the table \fItable\fR. The combobox's list of items is passed in the \fIlist\fR argument. If \fIeditable\fR is TRUE the user may type in new list items; if \fIeditable\fR is FALSE the user may only select from the list of items provided. .PP -By default QComboTableItems cannot be replaced by other table items since isReplaceable() returns FALSE by default. +By default TQComboTableItems cannot be replaced by other table items since isReplaceable() returns FALSE by default. .PP See also QTable::clearCell() and EditType. -.SH "QComboTableItem::~QComboTableItem ()" -QComboTableItem destructor. -.SH "int QComboTableItem::count () const" +.SH "TQComboTableItem::~TQComboTableItem ()" +TQComboTableItem destructor. +.SH "int TQComboTableItem::count () const" Returns the total number of list items in the combo table item. -.SH "int QComboTableItem::currentItem () const" +.SH "int TQComboTableItem::currentItem () const" Returns the index of the combo table item's current list item. .PP See also setCurrentItem(). -.SH "TQString QComboTableItem::currentText () const" +.SH "TQString TQComboTableItem::currentText () const" Returns the text of the combo table item's current list item. .PP See also currentItem() and text(). -.SH "bool QComboTableItem::isEditable () const" +.SH "bool TQComboTableItem::isEditable () const" Returns TRUE if the user can add their own list items to the combobox's list of items; otherwise returns FALSE. .PP See also setEditable(). -.SH "int QComboTableItem::rtti () const\fC [virtual]\fR" +.SH "int TQComboTableItem::rtti () const\fC [virtual]\fR" Returns 1. .PP Make your derived classes return their own values for rtti()to distinguish between different table item subclasses. You should use values greater than 1000, preferably a large random number, to allow for extensions to this class. @@ -107,31 +107,31 @@ Make your derived classes return their own values for rtti()to distinguish betwe See also QTableItem::rtti(). .PP Reimplemented from QTableItem. -.SH "void QComboTableItem::setCurrentItem ( int i )\fC [virtual]\fR" +.SH "void TQComboTableItem::setCurrentItem ( int i )\fC [virtual]\fR" Sets the list item \fIi\fR to be the combo table item's current list item. .PP See also currentItem(). .PP Example: table/small-table-demo/main.cpp. -.SH "void QComboTableItem::setCurrentItem ( const TQString & s )\fC [virtual]\fR" +.SH "void TQComboTableItem::setCurrentItem ( const TQString & s )\fC [virtual]\fR" This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. .PP Sets the list item whose text is \fIs\fR to be the combo table item's current list item. Does nothing if no list item has the text \fIs\fR. .PP See also currentItem(). -.SH "void QComboTableItem::setEditable ( bool b )\fC [virtual]\fR" +.SH "void TQComboTableItem::setEditable ( bool b )\fC [virtual]\fR" If \fIb\fR is TRUE the combo table item can be edited, i.e. the user may enter a new text item themselves. If \fIb\fR is FALSE the user may may only choose one of the existing items. .PP See also isEditable(). -.SH "void QComboTableItem::setStringList ( const TQStringList & l )\fC [virtual]\fR" -Sets the list items of this QComboTableItem to the strings in the string list \fIl\fR. -.SH "TQString QComboTableItem::text ( int i ) const" +.SH "void TQComboTableItem::setStringList ( const TQStringList & l )\fC [virtual]\fR" +Sets the list items of this TQComboTableItem to the strings in the string list \fIl\fR. +.SH "TQString TQComboTableItem::text ( int i ) const" Returns the text of the combo's list item at index \fIi\fR. .PP See also currentText(). .SH "SEE ALSO" -.BR http://doc.trolltech.com/qcombotableitem.html +.BR http://doc.trolltech.com/tqcombotableitem.html .BR http://www.trolltech.com/faq/tech.html .SH COPYRIGHT Copyright 1992-2007 Trolltech ASA, http://www.trolltech.com. See the diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqdial.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqdial.3qt index 52f925216..3400b5df5 100644 --- a/doc/man/man3/tqdial.3qt +++ b/doc/man/man3/tqdial.3qt @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ '\" t -.TH QDial 3qt "2 February 2007" "Trolltech AS" \" -*- nroff -*- +.TH TQDial 3qt "2 February 2007" "Trolltech AS" \" -*- nroff -*- .\" Copyright 1992-2007 Trolltech ASA. All rights reserved. See the .\" license file included in the distribution for a complete license .\" statement. @@ -7,22 +7,22 @@ .ad l .nh .SH NAME -QDial \- Rounded range control (like a speedometer or potentiometer) +TQDial \- Rounded range control (like a speedometer or potentiometer) .SH SYNOPSIS -\fC#include <ntqdial.h>\fR +\fC#include <tqdial.h>\fR .PP Inherits TQWidget and QRangeControl. .PP .SS "Public Members" .in +1c .ti -1c -.BI "\fBQDial\fR ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )" +.BI "\fBTQDial\fR ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )" .br .ti -1c -.BI "\fBQDial\fR ( int minValue, int maxValue, int pageStep, int value, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )" +.BI "\fBTQDial\fR ( int minValue, int maxValue, int pageStep, int value, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )" .br .ti -1c -.BI "\fB~QDial\fR ()" +.BI "\fB~TQDial\fR ()" .br .ti -1c .BI "bool \fBtracking\fR () const" @@ -158,9 +158,9 @@ Inherits TQWidget and QRangeControl. .br .in -1c .SH DESCRIPTION -The QDial class provides a rounded range control (like a speedometer or potentiometer). +The TQDial class provides a rounded range control (like a speedometer or potentiometer). .PP -QDial is used when the user needs to control a value within a program-definable range, and the range either wraps around (typically, 0..359 degrees) or the dialog layout needs a square widget. +TQDial is used when the user needs to control a value within a program-definable range, and the range either wraps around (typically, 0..359 degrees) or the dialog layout needs a square widget. .PP Both API- and UI-wise, the dial is very similar to a slider. Indeed, when wrapping() is FALSE (the default) there is no real difference between a slider and a dial. They have the same signals, slots and member functions, all of which do the same things. Which one you use depends only on your taste and on the application. .PP @@ -168,7 +168,7 @@ The dial initially emits valueChanged() signals continuously while the slider is .PP The slider also emits dialPressed() and dialReleased() signals when the mouse button is pressed and released. But note that the dial's value can change without these signals being emitted; the keyboard and wheel can be used to change the value. .PP -Unlike the slider, QDial attempts to draw a "nice" number of notches rather than one per lineStep(). If possible, the number of notches drawn is one per lineStep(), but if there aren't enough pixels to draw every one, QDial will draw every second, third etc., notch. notchSize() returns the number of units per notch, hopefully a multiple of lineStep(); setNotchTarget() sets the target distance between neighbouring notches in pixels. The default is 3.75 pixels. +Unlike the slider, TQDial attempts to draw a "nice" number of notches rather than one per lineStep(). If possible, the number of notches drawn is one per lineStep(), but if there aren't enough pixels to draw every one, TQDial will draw every second, third etc., notch. notchSize() returns the number of units per notch, hopefully a multiple of lineStep(); setNotchTarget() sets the target distance between neighbouring notches in pixels. The default is 3.75 pixels. .PP Like the slider, the dial makes the QRangeControl functions setValue(), addLine(), subtractLine(), addPage() and subtractPage() available as slots. .PP @@ -181,85 +181,85 @@ The dial's keyboard interface is fairly simple: The left/up and right/down arrow .ce 1 .B "[Image Omitted]" .PP -See also QScrollBar, QSpinBox, GUI Design Handbook: Slider, and Basic Widgets. +See also TQScrollBar, TQSpinBox, GUI Design Handbook: Slider, and Basic Widgets. .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION -.SH "QDial::QDial ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )" +.SH "TQDial::TQDial ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )" Constructs a dial called \fIname\fR with parent \fIparent\fR. \fIf\fR is propagated to the TQWidget constructor. It has the default range of a QRangeControl. -.SH "QDial::QDial ( int minValue, int maxValue, int pageStep, int value, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )" +.SH "TQDial::TQDial ( int minValue, int maxValue, int pageStep, int value, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )" Constructs a dial called \fIname\fR with parent \fIparent\fR. The dial's value can never be smaller than \fIminValue\fR or greater than \fImaxValue\fR. Its page step size is \fIpageStep\fR, and its initial value is \fIvalue\fR. .PP \fIvalue\fR is forced to be within the legal range. -.SH "QDial::~QDial ()" +.SH "TQDial::~TQDial ()" Destroys the dial. -.SH "void QDial::addLine ()\fC [slot]\fR" +.SH "void TQDial::addLine ()\fC [slot]\fR" Increments the dial's value() by one lineStep(). -.SH "void QDial::addPage ()\fC [slot]\fR" +.SH "void TQDial::addPage ()\fC [slot]\fR" Increments the dial's value() by one pageStep() of steps. -.SH "void QDial::dialMoved ( int value )\fC [signal]\fR" +.SH "void TQDial::dialMoved ( int value )\fC [signal]\fR" This signal is emitted whenever the dial \fIvalue\fR changes. The frequency of this signal is \fInot\fR influenced by setTracking(). .PP See also valueChanged(). -.SH "void QDial::dialPressed ()\fC [signal]\fR" +.SH "void TQDial::dialPressed ()\fC [signal]\fR" This signal is emitted when the user begins mouse interaction with the dial. .PP See also dialReleased(). -.SH "void QDial::dialReleased ()\fC [signal]\fR" +.SH "void TQDial::dialReleased ()\fC [signal]\fR" This signal is emitted when the user ends mouse interaction with the dial. .PP See also dialPressed(). -.SH "int QDial::lineStep () const" +.SH "int TQDial::lineStep () const" Returns the current line step. See the "lineStep" property for details. -.SH "int QDial::maxValue () const" +.SH "int TQDial::maxValue () const" Returns the current maximum value. See the "maxValue" property for details. -.SH "int QDial::minValue () const" +.SH "int TQDial::minValue () const" Returns the current minimum value. See the "minValue" property for details. -.SH "int QDial::notchSize () const" +.SH "int TQDial::notchSize () const" Returns the current notch size. See the "notchSize" property for details. -.SH "double QDial::notchTarget () const" +.SH "double TQDial::notchTarget () const" Returns the target number of pixels between notches. See the "notchTarget" property for details. -.SH "bool QDial::notchesVisible () const" +.SH "bool TQDial::notchesVisible () const" Returns TRUE if the notches are shown; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "notchesVisible" property for details. -.SH "int QDial::pageStep () const" +.SH "int TQDial::pageStep () const" Returns the current page step. See the "pageStep" property for details. -.SH "void QDial::rangeChange ()\fC [virtual protected]\fR" +.SH "void TQDial::rangeChange ()\fC [virtual protected]\fR" Reimplemented to ensure tick-marks are consistent with the new range. .PP Reimplemented from QRangeControl. -.SH "void QDial::repaintScreen ( const TQRect * cr = 0 )\fC [virtual protected]\fR" +.SH "void TQDial::repaintScreen ( const TQRect * cr = 0 )\fC [virtual protected]\fR" Paints the dial using clip region \fIcr\fR. -.SH "void QDial::setLineStep ( int )" +.SH "void TQDial::setLineStep ( int )" Sets the current line step. See the "lineStep" property for details. -.SH "void QDial::setMaxValue ( int )" +.SH "void TQDial::setMaxValue ( int )" Sets the current maximum value. See the "maxValue" property for details. -.SH "void QDial::setMinValue ( int )" +.SH "void TQDial::setMinValue ( int )" Sets the current minimum value. See the "minValue" property for details. -.SH "void QDial::setNotchTarget ( double )\fC [virtual]\fR" +.SH "void TQDial::setNotchTarget ( double )\fC [virtual]\fR" Sets the target number of pixels between notches. See the "notchTarget" property for details. -.SH "void QDial::setNotchesVisible ( bool b )\fC [virtual slot]\fR" +.SH "void TQDial::setNotchesVisible ( bool b )\fC [virtual slot]\fR" Sets whether the notches are shown to \fIb\fR. See the "notchesVisible" property for details. -.SH "void QDial::setPageStep ( int )" +.SH "void TQDial::setPageStep ( int )" Sets the current page step. See the "pageStep" property for details. -.SH "void QDial::setTracking ( bool enable )\fC [virtual slot]\fR" +.SH "void TQDial::setTracking ( bool enable )\fC [virtual slot]\fR" Sets whether tracking is enabled to \fIenable\fR. See the "tracking" property for details. -.SH "void QDial::setValue ( int )\fC [virtual slot]\fR" +.SH "void TQDial::setValue ( int )\fC [virtual slot]\fR" Sets the current dial value. See the "value" property for details. -.SH "void QDial::setWrapping ( bool on )\fC [virtual slot]\fR" +.SH "void TQDial::setWrapping ( bool on )\fC [virtual slot]\fR" Sets whether wrapping is enabled to \fIon\fR. See the "wrapping" property for details. -.SH "void QDial::subtractLine ()\fC [slot]\fR" +.SH "void TQDial::subtractLine ()\fC [slot]\fR" Decrements the dial's value() by one lineStep(). -.SH "void QDial::subtractPage ()\fC [slot]\fR" +.SH "void TQDial::subtractPage ()\fC [slot]\fR" Decrements the dial's value() by one pageStep() of steps. -.SH "bool QDial::tracking () const" +.SH "bool TQDial::tracking () const" Returns TRUE if tracking is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "tracking" property for details. -.SH "int QDial::value () const" +.SH "int TQDial::value () const" Returns the current dial value. See the "value" property for details. -.SH "void QDial::valueChange ()\fC [virtual protected]\fR" +.SH "void TQDial::valueChange ()\fC [virtual protected]\fR" Reimplemented to ensure the display is correct and to emit the valueChanged(int) signal when appropriate. .PP Reimplemented from QRangeControl. -.SH "void QDial::valueChanged ( int value )\fC [signal]\fR" +.SH "void TQDial::valueChanged ( int value )\fC [signal]\fR" This signal is emitted whenever the dial's \fIvalue\fR changes. The frequency of this signal is influenced by setTracking(). -.SH "bool QDial::wrapping () const" +.SH "bool TQDial::wrapping () const" Returns TRUE if wrapping is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "wrapping" property for details. .SS "Property Documentation" .SH "int lineStep" @@ -273,7 +273,7 @@ Set this property's value with setLineStep() and get this property's value with .SH "int maxValue" This property holds the current maximum value. .PP -When setting this property, the QDial::minValue is adjusted if necessary to ensure that the range remains valid. +When setting this property, the TQDial::minValue is adjusted if necessary to ensure that the range remains valid. .PP See also setRange(). .PP @@ -281,7 +281,7 @@ Set this property's value with setMaxValue() and get this property's value with .SH "int minValue" This property holds the current minimum value. .PP -When setting this property, the QDial::maxValue is adjusted if necessary to ensure that the range remains valid. +When setting this property, the TQDial::maxValue is adjusted if necessary to ensure that the range remains valid. .PP See also setRange(). .PP @@ -297,7 +297,7 @@ Get this property's value with notchSize(). .SH "double notchTarget" This property holds the target number of pixels between notches. .PP -The notch target is the number of pixels QDial attempts to put between each notch. +The notch target is the number of pixels TQDial attempts to put between each notch. .PP The actual size may differ from the target size. .PP @@ -325,7 +325,7 @@ Set this property's value with setTracking() and get this property's value with .SH "int value" This property holds the current dial value. .PP -This is guaranteed to be within the range QDial::minValue..QDial::maxValue. +This is guaranteed to be within the range TQDial::minValue..TQDial::maxValue. .PP See also minValue and maxValue. .PP @@ -340,7 +340,7 @@ This property's default is FALSE. Set this property's value with setWrapping() and get this property's value with wrapping(). .SH "SEE ALSO" -.BR http://doc.trolltech.com/ntqdial.html +.BR http://doc.trolltech.com/tqdial.html .BR http://www.trolltech.com/faq/tech.html .SH COPYRIGHT Copyright 1992-2007 Trolltech ASA, http://www.trolltech.com. See the diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqdialog.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqdialog.3qt index fcef22e76..311cfbb59 100644 --- a/doc/man/man3/tqdialog.3qt +++ b/doc/man/man3/tqdialog.3qt @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ '\" t -.TH QDialog 3qt "2 February 2007" "Trolltech AS" \" -*- nroff -*- +.TH TQDialog 3qt "2 February 2007" "Trolltech AS" \" -*- nroff -*- .\" Copyright 1992-2007 Trolltech ASA. All rights reserved. See the .\" license file included in the distribution for a complete license .\" statement. @@ -7,9 +7,9 @@ .ad l .nh .SH NAME -QDialog \- The base class of dialog windows +TQDialog \- The base class of dialog windows .SH SYNOPSIS -\fC#include <ntqdialog.h>\fR +\fC#include <tqdialog.h>\fR .PP Inherits TQWidget. .PP @@ -18,10 +18,10 @@ Inherited by TQColorDialog, QErrorMessage, TQFileDialog, TQFontDialog, QInputDia .SS "Public Members" .in +1c .ti -1c -.BI "explicit \fBQDialog\fR ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = FALSE, WFlags f = 0 )" +.BI "explicit \fBTQDialog\fR ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = FALSE, WFlags f = 0 )" .br .ti -1c -.BI "\fB~QDialog\fR ()" +.BI "\fB~TQDialog\fR ()" .br .ti -1c .BI "enum \fBDialogCode\fR { Rejected, Accepted }" @@ -94,11 +94,11 @@ Inherited by TQColorDialog, QErrorMessage, TQFileDialog, TQFontDialog, QInputDia .br .in -1c .SH DESCRIPTION -The QDialog class is the base class of dialog windows. +The TQDialog class is the base class of dialog windows. .PP -A dialog window is a top-level window mostly used for short-term tasks and brief communications with the user. QDialogs may be modal or modeless. QDialogs support extensibility and can provide a return value. They can have default buttons. QDialogs can also have a TQSizeGrip in their lower-right corner, using setSizeGripEnabled(). +A dialog window is a top-level window mostly used for short-term tasks and brief communications with the user. TQDialogs may be modal or modeless. TQDialogs support extensibility and can provide a return value. They can have default buttons. TQDialogs can also have a TQSizeGrip in their lower-right corner, using setSizeGripEnabled(). .PP -Note that QDialog uses the parent widget slightly differently from other classes in Qt. A dialog is always a top-level widget, but if it has a parent, its default location is centered on top of the parent's top-level widget (if it is not top-level itself). It will also share the parent's taskbar entry. +Note that TQDialog uses the parent widget slightly differently from other classes in Qt. A dialog is always a top-level widget, but if it has a parent, its default location is centered on top of the parent's top-level widget (if it is not top-level itself). It will also share the parent's taskbar entry. .SH "Modal Dialogs" A \fBmodal\fR dialog is a dialog that blocks input to other visible windows in the same application. Users must finish interacting with the dialog and close it before they can access any other window in the application. Dialogs that are used to request a file name from the user or that are used to set application preferences are usually modal. .PP @@ -110,9 +110,9 @@ A \fBmodeless\fR dialog is a dialog that operates independently of other windows .PP Modeless dialogs are displayed using show(), which returns control to the caller immediately. .SH "Default button" -A dialog's \fIdefault\fR button is the button that's pressed when the user presses Enter (Return). This button is used to signify that the user accepts the dialog's settings and wants to close the dialog. Use QPushButton::setDefault(), QPushButton::isDefault() and QPushButton::autoDefault() to set and control the dialog's default button. +A dialog's \fIdefault\fR button is the button that's pressed when the user presses Enter (Return). This button is used to signify that the user accepts the dialog's settings and wants to close the dialog. Use TQPushButton::setDefault(), TQPushButton::isDefault() and TQPushButton::autoDefault() to set and control the dialog's default button. .SH "Escape Key" -If the user presses the Esc key in a dialog, QDialog::reject() will be called. This will cause the window to close: the closeEvent cannot be ignored. +If the user presses the Esc key in a dialog, TQDialog::reject() will be called. This will cause the window to close: the closeEvent cannot be ignored. .SH "Extensibility" Extensibility is the ability to show the dialog in two ways: a partial dialog that shows the most commonly used options, and a full dialog that shows all the options. Typically an extensible dialog will initially appear as a partial dialog, but with a" More" toggle button. If the user presses the "More" button down, the full dialog will appear. The extension widget will be resized to its sizeHint(). If orientation is Horizontal the extension widget's height() will be expanded to the height() of the dialog. If the orientation is Vertical the extension widget's width() will be expanded to the width() of the dialog. Extensibility is controlled with setExtension(), setOrientation() and showExtension(). .SH "Return value (modal dialogs)" @@ -132,7 +132,7 @@ A modal dialog. .br TQString result; .br - if ( dlg->exec() == QDialog::Accepted ) { + if ( dlg->exec() == TQDialog::Accepted ) { .br result = dlg->selectedFile(); .br @@ -181,15 +181,15 @@ A modeless dialog. After the show() call, control returns to the main event loop .PP See also QTabDialog, TQWidget, QProgressDialog, GUI Design Handbook: Dialogs, Standard, Abstract Widget Classes, and Dialog Classes. .SS "Member Type Documentation" -.SH "QDialog::DialogCode" +.SH "TQDialog::DialogCode" The value returned by a modal dialog. .TP -\fCQDialog::Accepted\fR +\fCTQDialog::Accepted\fR .TP -\fCQDialog::Rejected\fR +\fCTQDialog::Rejected\fR .PP .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION -.SH "explicit QDialog::QDialog ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = FALSE, WFlags f = 0 )" +.SH "explicit TQDialog::TQDialog ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = FALSE, WFlags f = 0 )" Constructs a dialog called \fIname\fR, with parent \fIparent\fR. .PP A dialog is always a top-level widget, but if it has a parent, its default location is centered on top of the parent. It will also share the parent's taskbar entry. @@ -199,22 +199,22 @@ The widget flags \fIf\fR are passed on to the TQWidget constructor. If, for exam \fBWarning:\fR In TQt 3.2, the \fImodal\fR flag is obsolete. There is now a setModal() function that can be used for obtaining a modal behavior when calling show(). This is rarely needed, because modal dialogs are usually invoked using exec(), which ignores the \fImodal\fR flag. .PP See also TQWidget::setWFlags() and TQt::WidgetFlags. -.SH "QDialog::~QDialog ()" -Destroys the QDialog, deleting all its children. -.SH "void QDialog::accept ()\fC [virtual protected slot]\fR" +.SH "TQDialog::~TQDialog ()" +Destroys the TQDialog, deleting all its children. +.SH "void TQDialog::accept ()\fC [virtual protected slot]\fR" Hides the modal dialog and sets the result code to Accepted. .PP See also reject() and done(). .PP Examples: .)l chart/setdataform.cpp and distributor/distributor.ui.h. -.SH "void QDialog::done ( int r )\fC [virtual protected slot]\fR" +.SH "void TQDialog::done ( int r )\fC [virtual protected slot]\fR" Closes the dialog and sets its result code to \fIr\fR. If this dialog is shown with exec(), done() causes the local event loop to finish, and exec() to return \fIr\fR. .PP As with TQWidget::close(), done() deletes the dialog if the WDestructiveClose flag is set. If the dialog is the application's main widget, the application terminates. If the dialog is the last window closed, the QApplication::lastWindowClosed() signal is emitted. .PP See also accept(), reject(), QApplication::mainWidget(), and QApplication::quit(). -.SH "int QDialog::exec ()\fC [slot]\fR" +.SH "int TQDialog::exec ()\fC [slot]\fR" Shows the dialog as a modal dialog, blocking until the user closes it. The function returns a DialogCode result. .PP Users cannot interact with any other window in the same application until they close the dialog. @@ -223,43 +223,43 @@ See also show() and result(). .PP Examples: .)l chart/chartform.cpp, dialog/mainwindow.cpp, i18n/main.cpp, network/ftpclient/ftpmainwindow.ui.h, network/networkprotocol/view.cpp, tqdir/tqdir.cpp, and wizard/main.cpp. -.SH "TQWidget * QDialog::extension () const" +.SH "TQWidget * TQDialog::extension () const" Returns the dialog's extension or 0 if no extension has been defined. .PP See also setExtension(). -.SH "bool QDialog::isModal () const" +.SH "bool TQDialog::isModal () const" Returns TRUE if show() should pop up the dialog as modal or modeless; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "modal" property for details. -.SH "bool QDialog::isSizeGripEnabled () const" +.SH "bool TQDialog::isSizeGripEnabled () const" Returns TRUE if the size grip is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "sizeGripEnabled" property for details. -.SH "Orientation QDialog::orientation () const" +.SH "Orientation TQDialog::orientation () const" Returns the dialog's extension orientation. .PP See also setOrientation(). -.SH "void QDialog::reject ()\fC [virtual protected slot]\fR" +.SH "void TQDialog::reject ()\fC [virtual protected slot]\fR" Hides the modal dialog and sets the result code to Rejected. .PP See also accept() and done(). -.SH "int QDialog::result () const" +.SH "int TQDialog::result () const" Returns the modal dialog's result code, Accepted or Rejected. .PP Do not call this function if the dialog was constructed with the WDestructiveClose flag. -.SH "void QDialog::setExtension ( TQWidget * extension )" +.SH "void TQDialog::setExtension ( TQWidget * extension )" Sets the widget, \fIextension\fR, to be the dialog's extension, deleting any previous extension. The dialog takes ownership of the extension. Note that if 0 is passed any existing extension will be deleted. .PP This function must only be called while the dialog is hidden. .PP See also showExtension(), setOrientation(), and extension(). -.SH "void QDialog::setModal ( bool modal )" +.SH "void TQDialog::setModal ( bool modal )" Sets whether show() should pop up the dialog as modal or modeless to \fImodal\fR. See the "modal" property for details. -.SH "void QDialog::setOrientation ( Orientation orientation )" +.SH "void TQDialog::setOrientation ( Orientation orientation )" If \fIorientation\fR is Horizontal, the extension will be displayed to the right of the dialog's main area. If \fIorientation\fR is Vertical, the extension will be displayed below the dialog's main area. .PP See also orientation() and setExtension(). -.SH "void QDialog::setResult ( int i )\fC [protected]\fR" +.SH "void TQDialog::setResult ( int i )\fC [protected]\fR" Sets the modal dialog's result code to \fIi\fR. -.SH "void QDialog::setSizeGripEnabled ( bool )" +.SH "void TQDialog::setSizeGripEnabled ( bool )" Sets whether the size grip is enabled. See the "sizeGripEnabled" property for details. -.SH "void QDialog::show ()\fC [virtual]\fR" +.SH "void TQDialog::show ()\fC [virtual]\fR" Shows the dialog as a modeless dialog. Control returns immediately to the calling code. .PP The dialog will be modal or modeless according to the value of the modal property. @@ -270,10 +270,10 @@ Examples: .)l movies/main.cpp, regexptester/main.cpp, showimg/showimg.cpp, and sql/overview/form1/main.cpp. .PP Reimplemented from TQWidget. -.SH "void QDialog::showExtension ( bool showIt )\fC [protected slot]\fR" +.SH "void TQDialog::showExtension ( bool showIt )\fC [protected slot]\fR" If \fIshowIt\fR is TRUE, the dialog's extension is shown; otherwise the extension is hidden. .PP -This slot is usually connected to the QButton::toggled() signal of a QPushButton. +This slot is usually connected to the QButton::toggled() signal of a TQPushButton. .PP A dialog with a visible extension is not resizeable. .PP @@ -297,7 +297,7 @@ A TQSizeGrip is placed in the bottom right corner of the dialog when this proper Set this property's value with setSizeGripEnabled() and get this property's value with isSizeGripEnabled(). .SH "SEE ALSO" -.BR http://doc.trolltech.com/ntqdialog.html +.BR http://doc.trolltech.com/tqdialog.html .BR http://www.trolltech.com/faq/tech.html .SH COPYRIGHT Copyright 1992-2007 Trolltech ASA, http://www.trolltech.com. See the diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqdict.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqdict.3qt index c34011b1e..a91eb4076 100644 --- a/doc/man/man3/tqdict.3qt +++ b/doc/man/man3/tqdict.3qt @@ -113,11 +113,11 @@ Example #1: .PP .nf .br - TQDict<QLineEdit> fields; // TQString keys, QLineEdit* values + TQDict<TQLineEdit> fields; // TQString keys, TQLineEdit* values .br - fields.insert( "forename", new QLineEdit( this ) ); + fields.insert( "forename", new TQLineEdit( this ) ); .br - fields.insert( "surname", new QLineEdit( this ) ); + fields.insert( "surname", new TQLineEdit( this ) ); .br .br fields["forename"]->setText( "Homer" ); @@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ Example #1: fields["surname"]->setText( "Simpson" ); .br .br - TQDictIterator<QLineEdit> it( fields ); // See TQDictIterator + TQDictIterator<TQLineEdit> it( fields ); // See TQDictIterator .br for( ; it.current(); ++it ) .br diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqdictiterator.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqdictiterator.3qt index e222a3a9d..495e01e41 100644 --- a/doc/man/man3/tqdictiterator.3qt +++ b/doc/man/man3/tqdictiterator.3qt @@ -57,13 +57,13 @@ Example: .PP .nf .br - TQDict<QLineEdit> fields; + TQDict<TQLineEdit> fields; .br - fields.insert( "forename", new QLineEdit( this ) ); + fields.insert( "forename", new TQLineEdit( this ) ); .br - fields.insert( "surname", new QLineEdit( this ) ); + fields.insert( "surname", new TQLineEdit( this ) ); .br - fields.insert( "age", new QLineEdit( this ) ); + fields.insert( "age", new TQLineEdit( this ) ); .br .br fields["forename"]->setText( "Homer" ); @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ Example: fields["age"]->setText( "45" ); .br .br - TQDictIterator<QLineEdit> it( fields ); + TQDictIterator<TQLineEdit> it( fields ); .br for( ; it.current(); ++it ) .br diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqeditorfactory.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqeditorfactory.3qt index 11d799df7..d12ea7334 100644 --- a/doc/man/man3/tqeditorfactory.3qt +++ b/doc/man/man3/tqeditorfactory.3qt @@ -39,7 +39,7 @@ Inherited by TQSqlEditorFactory. .SH DESCRIPTION The TQEditorFactory class is used to create editor widgets for QVariant data types. .PP -Each editor factory provides the createEditor() function which given a QVariant will create and return a TQWidget that can edit that QVariant. For example if you have a QVariant::String type, a QLineEdit would be the default editor returned, whereas a QVariant::Int's default editor would be a QSpinBox. +Each editor factory provides the createEditor() function which given a QVariant will create and return a TQWidget that can edit that QVariant. For example if you have a QVariant::String type, a TQLineEdit would be the default editor returned, whereas a QVariant::Int's default editor would be a TQSpinBox. .PP If you want to create different editors for fields with the same data type, subclass TQEditorFactory and reimplement the createEditor() function. .PP diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqerrormessage.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqerrormessage.3qt index 8effc51ff..87115f63e 100644 --- a/doc/man/man3/tqerrormessage.3qt +++ b/doc/man/man3/tqerrormessage.3qt @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ QErrorMessage \- Error message display dialog .SH SYNOPSIS \fC#include <ntqerrormessage.h>\fR .PP -Inherits QDialog. +Inherits TQDialog. .PP .SS "Public Members" .in +1c @@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ In both cases QErrorMessage will queue pending messages, and display them (or no See also QMessageBox, TQStatusBar::message(), Dialog Classes, and Miscellaneous Classes. .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION .SH "QErrorMessage::QErrorMessage ( TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )" -Constructs and installs an error handler window. The parent \fIparent\fR and name \fIname\fR are passed on to the QDialog constructor. +Constructs and installs an error handler window. The parent \fIparent\fR and name \fIname\fR are passed on to the TQDialog constructor. .SH "QErrorMessage::~QErrorMessage ()" Destroys the object and frees any allocated resources. Notably, the list of "do not show again" messages is deleted. .SH "void QErrorMessage::message ( const TQString & m )\fC [slot]\fR" diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqfiledialog.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqfiledialog.3qt index 4bdadcc70..0232858ab 100644 --- a/doc/man/man3/tqfiledialog.3qt +++ b/doc/man/man3/tqfiledialog.3qt @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ TQFileDialog \- Dialogs that allow users to select files or directories .SH SYNOPSIS \fC#include <tqfiledialog.h>\fR .PP -Inherits QDialog. +Inherits TQDialog. .PP .SS "Public Members" .in +1c @@ -214,7 +214,7 @@ Inherits QDialog. .SS "Protected Members" .in +1c .ti -1c -.BI "void \fBaddWidgets\fR ( TQLabel * l, TQWidget * w, QPushButton * b )" +.BI "void \fBaddWidgets\fR ( TQLabel * l, TQWidget * w, TQPushButton * b )" .br .ti -1c .BI "void \fBaddToolButton\fR ( QButton * b, bool separator = FALSE )" @@ -293,7 +293,7 @@ The last important function you will need to use when creating your own file dia .br TQString fileName; .br - if ( fd->exec() == QDialog::Accepted ) + if ( fd->exec() == TQDialog::Accepted ) .br fileName = fd->selectedFile(); .br @@ -447,7 +447,7 @@ See also addLeftWidget(), addWidgets(), and addToolButton(). Adds the tool button \fIb\fR to the row of tool buttons at the top of the file dialog. The button is appended to the right of this row. If \fIseparator\fR is TRUE, a small space is inserted between the last button of the row and the new button \fIb\fR. .PP See also addWidgets(), addLeftWidget(), and addRightWidget(). -.SH "void TQFileDialog::addWidgets ( TQLabel * l, TQWidget * w, QPushButton * b )\fC [protected]\fR" +.SH "void TQFileDialog::addWidgets ( TQLabel * l, TQWidget * w, TQPushButton * b )\fC [protected]\fR" Adds the specified widgets to the bottom of the file dialog. The label \fIl\fR is placed underneath the "file name" and the "file types" labels. The widget \fIw\fR is placed underneath the file types combobox. The button \fIb\fR is placed underneath the Cancel pushbutton. .PP .nf @@ -460,9 +460,9 @@ Adds the specified widgets to the bottom of the file dialog. The label \fIl\fR i .br TQLabel* label = new TQLabel( "Added widgets", this ); .br - QLineEdit* lineedit = new QLineEdit( this ); + TQLineEdit* lineedit = new TQLineEdit( this ); .br - QPushButton* pushbutton = new QPushButton( this ); + TQPushButton* pushbutton = new TQPushButton( this ); .br .br addWidgets( label, lineedit, pushbutton ); diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqfontdialog.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqfontdialog.3qt index 6f3fe18bf..546e9c340 100644 --- a/doc/man/man3/tqfontdialog.3qt +++ b/doc/man/man3/tqfontdialog.3qt @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ TQFontDialog \- Dialog widget for selecting a font .SH SYNOPSIS \fC#include <tqfontdialog.h>\fR .PP -Inherits QDialog. +Inherits TQDialog. .PP .SS "Static Public Members" <li class=fn>TQFont \fBgetFont\fR ( bool * ok, const TQFont & initial, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 ) <li class=fn>TQFont \fBgetFont\fR ( bool * ok, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 ) diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqframe.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqframe.3qt index 0d9fcaff7..f491c8be5 100644 --- a/doc/man/man3/tqframe.3qt +++ b/doc/man/man3/tqframe.3qt @@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ QFrame \- The base class of widgets that can have a frame .PP Inherits TQWidget. .PP -Inherited by QGroupBox, QScrollView, QDockWindow, QGrid, QHBox, TQLabel, QLCDNumber, QLineEdit, TQMenuBar, TQPopupMenu, QProgressBar, QSplitter, TQToolBox, and TQWidgetStack. +Inherited by QGroupBox, TQScrollView, QDockWindow, QGrid, QHBox, TQLabel, TQLCDNumber, TQLineEdit, TQMenuBar, TQPopupMenu, QProgressBar, QSplitter, TQToolBox, and TQWidgetStack. .PP .SS "Public Members" .in +1c @@ -228,7 +228,7 @@ This function is reimplemented by subclasses that draw something inside the fram .PP See also contentsRect and TQPainter::setClipRect(). .PP -Reimplemented in TQLabel, QLCDNumber, TQMenuBar, and TQPopupMenu. +Reimplemented in TQLabel, TQLCDNumber, TQMenuBar, and TQPopupMenu. .SH "void QFrame::drawFrame ( TQPainter * p )\fC [virtual protected]\fR" Draws the frame using the painter \fIp\fR and the current frame attributes and color group. The rectangle inside the frame is not affected. .PP diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqgridlayout.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqgridlayout.3qt index 2a2f1a250..21b99cf11 100644 --- a/doc/man/man3/tqgridlayout.3qt +++ b/doc/man/man3/tqgridlayout.3qt @@ -154,7 +154,7 @@ This illustration shows a fragment of a dialog with a five-column, three-row gri .PP </center> .PP -Columns 0, 2 and 4 in this dialog fragment are made up of a TQLabel, a QLineEdit, and a QListBox. Columns 1 and 3 are placeholders made with addColSpacing(). Row 0 consists of three TQLabel objects, row 1 of three QLineEdit objects and row 2 of three QListBox objects. We used placeholder columns (1 and 3) to get the right amount of space between the columns. +Columns 0, 2 and 4 in this dialog fragment are made up of a TQLabel, a TQLineEdit, and a QListBox. Columns 1 and 3 are placeholders made with addColSpacing(). Row 0 consists of three TQLabel objects, row 1 of three TQLineEdit objects and row 2 of three QListBox objects. We used placeholder columns (1 and 3) to get the right amount of space between the columns. .PP Note that the columns and rows are not equally wide or tall. If you want two columns to have the same width, you must set their minimum widths and stretch factors to be the same yourself. You do this using addColSpacing() and setColStretch(). .PP diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqgridview.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqgridview.3qt index 3cf6c8a63..39ec36985 100644 --- a/doc/man/man3/tqgridview.3qt +++ b/doc/man/man3/tqgridview.3qt @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ QGridView \- Abstract base for fixed-size grids .SH SYNOPSIS \fC#include <ntqgridview.h>\fR .PP -Inherits QScrollView. +Inherits TQScrollView. .PP .SS "Public Members" .in +1c @@ -110,14 +110,14 @@ If you need to monitor changes to the grid's dimensions (i.e. when numRows or nu .PP Note: the row and column indices are always given in the order, row (vertical offset) then column (horizontal offset). This order is the opposite of all pixel operations, which are given in the order x (horizontal offset), y (vertical offset). .PP -QGridView is a very simple abstract class based on QScrollView. It is designed to simplify the task of drawing many cells of the same size in a potentially scrollable canvas. If you need rows and columns with different sizes, use a QTable instead. If you need a simple list of items, use a QListBox. If you need to present hierachical data use a QListView, and if you need random objects at random positions, consider using either a TQIconView or a TQCanvas. +QGridView is a very simple abstract class based on TQScrollView. It is designed to simplify the task of drawing many cells of the same size in a potentially scrollable canvas. If you need rows and columns with different sizes, use a QTable instead. If you need a simple list of items, use a QListBox. If you need to present hierachical data use a QListView, and if you need random objects at random positions, consider using either a TQIconView or a TQCanvas. .PP See also Abstract Widget Classes. .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION .SH "QGridView::QGridView ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )" Constructs a grid view. .PP -The \fIparent\fR, \fIname\fR and widget flag, \fIf\fR, arguments are passed to the QScrollView constructor. +The \fIparent\fR, \fIname\fR and widget flag, \fIf\fR, arguments are passed to the TQScrollView constructor. .SH "QGridView::~QGridView ()" Destroys the grid view. .SH "TQRect QGridView::cellGeometry ( int row, int column )" diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqiconview.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqiconview.3qt index 0bad304d0..c084e5c13 100644 --- a/doc/man/man3/tqiconview.3qt +++ b/doc/man/man3/tqiconview.3qt @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ TQIconView \- Area with movable labelled icons .SH SYNOPSIS \fC#include <tqiconview.h>\fR .PP -Inherits QScrollView. +Inherits TQScrollView. .PP .SS "Public Members" .in +1c diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqinputdialog.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqinputdialog.3qt index 4ea3e4315..03b6e4f7f 100644 --- a/doc/man/man3/tqinputdialog.3qt +++ b/doc/man/man3/tqinputdialog.3qt @@ -11,10 +11,10 @@ QInputDialog \- Simple convenience dialog to get a single value from the user .SH SYNOPSIS \fC#include <ntqinputdialog.h>\fR .PP -Inherits QDialog. +Inherits TQDialog. .PP .SS "Static Public Members" -<li class=fn>TQString \fBgetText\fR ( const TQString & caption, const TQString & label, QLineEdit::EchoMode mode = QLineEdit::Normal, const TQString & text = TQString::null, bool * ok = 0, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 ) <li class=fn>int \fBgetInteger\fR ( const TQString & caption, const TQString & label, int value = 0, int minValue = -2147483647, int maxValue = 2147483647, int step = 1, bool * ok = 0, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 ) <li class=fn>double \fBgetDouble\fR ( const TQString & caption, const TQString & label, double value = 0, double minValue = -2147483647, double maxValue = 2147483647, int decimals = 1, bool * ok = 0, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 ) <li class=fn>TQString \fBgetItem\fR ( const TQString & caption, const TQString & label, const TQStringList & list, int current = 0, bool editable = TRUE, bool * ok = 0, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 ) +<li class=fn>TQString \fBgetText\fR ( const TQString & caption, const TQString & label, TQLineEdit::EchoMode mode = TQLineEdit::Normal, const TQString & text = TQString::null, bool * ok = 0, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 ) <li class=fn>int \fBgetInteger\fR ( const TQString & caption, const TQString & label, int value = 0, int minValue = -2147483647, int maxValue = 2147483647, int step = 1, bool * ok = 0, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 ) <li class=fn>double \fBgetDouble\fR ( const TQString & caption, const TQString & label, double value = 0, double minValue = -2147483647, double maxValue = 2147483647, int decimals = 1, bool * ok = 0, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 ) <li class=fn>TQString \fBgetItem\fR ( const TQString & caption, const TQString & label, const TQStringList & list, int current = 0, bool editable = TRUE, bool * ok = 0, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 ) .SH DESCRIPTION The QInputDialog class provides a simple convenience dialog to get a single value from the user. .PP @@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ Four static convenience functions are provided: getText(), getInteger(), getDoub .br TQString text = QInputDialog::getText( .br - "MyApp 3000", "Enter your name:", QLineEdit::Normal, + "MyApp 3000", "Enter your name:", TQLineEdit::Normal, .br TQString::null, &ok, this ); .br @@ -146,7 +146,7 @@ Use this static function like this: } .br .fi -.SH "TQString QInputDialog::getText ( const TQString & caption, const TQString & label, QLineEdit::EchoMode mode = QLineEdit::Normal, const TQString & text = TQString::null, bool * ok = 0, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )\fC [static]\fR" +.SH "TQString QInputDialog::getText ( const TQString & caption, const TQString & label, TQLineEdit::EchoMode mode = TQLineEdit::Normal, const TQString & text = TQString::null, bool * ok = 0, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )\fC [static]\fR" Static convenience function to get a string from the user. \fIcaption\fR is the text which is displayed in the title bar of the dialog. \fIlabel\fR is the text which is shown to the user (it should say what should be entered). \fItext\fR is the default text which is placed in the line edit. The \fImode\fR is the echo mode the line edit will use. If \fIok\fR is not-null \fI*\fR\fIok\fR will be set to TRUE if the user pressed OK and to FALSE if the user pressed Cancel. The dialog's parent is \fIparent\fR; the dialog is called \fIname\fR. The dialog will be modal. .PP This function returns the text which has been entered in the line edit. It will not return an empty string. @@ -159,7 +159,7 @@ Use this static function like this: .br TQString text = QInputDialog::getText( .br - "MyApp 3000", "Enter your name:", QLineEdit::Normal, + "MyApp 3000", "Enter your name:", TQLineEdit::Normal, .br TQString::null, &ok, this ); .br diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqintdict.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqintdict.3qt index 7e97f6d69..d38f85605 100644 --- a/doc/man/man3/tqintdict.3qt +++ b/doc/man/man3/tqintdict.3qt @@ -95,11 +95,11 @@ Example: .PP .nf .br - TQIntDict<QLineEdit> fields; // long int keys, QLineEdit* values + TQIntDict<TQLineEdit> fields; // long int keys, TQLineEdit* values .br for ( int i = 0; i < 3; i++ ) .br - fields.insert( i, new QLineEdit( this ) ); + fields.insert( i, new TQLineEdit( this ) ); .br .br fields[0]->setText( "Homer" ); @@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ Example: fields[2]->setText( "45" ); .br .br - TQIntDictIterator<QLineEdit> it( fields ); + TQIntDictIterator<TQLineEdit> it( fields ); .br for ( ; it.current(); ++it ) .br diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqintdictiterator.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqintdictiterator.3qt index 71211a65c..89720ceb7 100644 --- a/doc/man/man3/tqintdictiterator.3qt +++ b/doc/man/man3/tqintdictiterator.3qt @@ -56,11 +56,11 @@ Example: .PP .nf .br - TQIntDict<QLineEdit> fields; + TQIntDict<TQLineEdit> fields; .br for ( int i = 0; i < 3; i++ ) .br - fields.insert( i, new QLineEdit( this ) ); + fields.insert( i, new TQLineEdit( this ) ); .br .br fields[0]->setText( "Homer" ); @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ Example: fields[2]->setText( "45" ); .br .br - TQIntDictIterator<QLineEdit> it( fields ); + TQIntDictIterator<TQLineEdit> it( fields ); .br .br for ( ; it.current(); ++it ) diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqintvalidator.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqintvalidator.3qt index 7d1f527a4..31c868d97 100644 --- a/doc/man/man3/tqintvalidator.3qt +++ b/doc/man/man3/tqintvalidator.3qt @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ Example of use: .br QValidator* validator = new QIntValidator( 100, 999, this ); .br - QLineEdit* edit = new QLineEdit( this ); + TQLineEdit* edit = new TQLineEdit( this ); .br .br // the edit lineedit will only accept integers between 100 and 999 diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqlabel.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqlabel.3qt index c3e5cc25c..f0a10914a 100644 --- a/doc/man/man3/tqlabel.3qt +++ b/doc/man/man3/tqlabel.3qt @@ -165,13 +165,13 @@ A TQLabel is often used as a label for an interactive widget. For this use TQLab .PP .nf .br - QLineEdit* phoneEdit = new QLineEdit( this, "phoneEdit" ); + TQLineEdit* phoneEdit = new TQLineEdit( this, "phoneEdit" ); .br TQLabel* phoneLabel = new TQLabel( phoneEdit, "&Phone:", this, "phoneLabel" ); .br .fi .PP -In this example, keyboard focus is transferred to the label's buddy (the QLineEdit) when the user presses Alt+P. You can also use the setBuddy() function to accomplish the same thing. +In this example, keyboard focus is transferred to the label's buddy (the TQLineEdit) when the user presses Alt+P. You can also use the setBuddy() function to accomplish the same thing. .PP .ce 1 .B "[Image Omitted]" @@ -180,7 +180,7 @@ In this example, keyboard focus is transferred to the label's buddy (the QLineEd .ce 1 .B "[Image Omitted]" .PP -See also QLineEdit, TQTextEdit, TQPixmap, TQMovie, GUI Design Handbook: Label, Basic Widgets, and Text Related Classes. +See also TQLineEdit, TQTextEdit, TQPixmap, TQMovie, GUI Design Handbook: Label, Basic Widgets, and Text Related Classes. .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION .SH "TQLabel::TQLabel ( TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )" Constructs an empty label. @@ -259,13 +259,13 @@ In a dialog, you might create two data entry widgets and a label for each, and s .PP .nf .br - QLineEdit *nameEd = new QLineEdit( this ); + TQLineEdit *nameEd = new TQLineEdit( this ); .br TQLabel *nameLb = new TQLabel( "&Name:", this ); .br nameLb->setBuddy( nameEd ); .br - QLineEdit *phoneEd = new QLineEdit( this ); + TQLineEdit *phoneEd = new TQLineEdit( this ); .br TQLabel *phoneLb = new TQLabel( "&Phone:", this ); .br diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqlcdnumber.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqlcdnumber.3qt index e9b215ec1..4804a8dc1 100644 --- a/doc/man/man3/tqlcdnumber.3qt +++ b/doc/man/man3/tqlcdnumber.3qt @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ '\" t -.TH QLCDNumber 3qt "2 February 2007" "Trolltech AS" \" -*- nroff -*- +.TH TQLCDNumber 3qt "2 February 2007" "Trolltech AS" \" -*- nroff -*- .\" Copyright 1992-2007 Trolltech ASA. All rights reserved. See the .\" license file included in the distribution for a complete license .\" statement. @@ -7,22 +7,22 @@ .ad l .nh .SH NAME -QLCDNumber \- Displays a number with LCD-like digits +TQLCDNumber \- Displays a number with LCD-like digits .SH SYNOPSIS -\fC#include <ntqlcdnumber.h>\fR +\fC#include <tqlcdnumber.h>\fR .PP Inherits QFrame. .PP .SS "Public Members" .in +1c .ti -1c -.BI "\fBQLCDNumber\fR ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )" +.BI "\fBTQLCDNumber\fR ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )" .br .ti -1c -.BI "\fBQLCDNumber\fR ( uint numDigits, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )" +.BI "\fBTQLCDNumber\fR ( uint numDigits, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )" .br .ti -1c -.BI "\fB~QLCDNumber\fR ()" +.BI "\fB~TQLCDNumber\fR ()" .br .ti -1c .BI "enum \fBMode\fR { Hex, Dec, Oct, Bin, HEX = Hex, DEC = Dec, OCT = Oct, BIN = Bin }" @@ -125,19 +125,19 @@ Inherits QFrame. .br .in -1c .SH DESCRIPTION -The QLCDNumber widget displays a number with LCD-like digits. +The TQLCDNumber widget displays a number with LCD-like digits. .PP It can display a number in just about any size. It can display decimal, hexadecimal, octal or binary numbers. It is easy to connect to data sources using the display() slot, which is overloaded to take any of five argument types. .PP There are also slots to change the base with setMode() and the decimal point with setSmallDecimalPoint(). .PP -QLCDNumber emits the overflow() signal when it is asked to display something beyond its range. The range is set by setNumDigits(), but setSmallDecimalPoint() also influences it. If the display is set to hexadecimal, octal or binary, the integer equivalent of the value is displayed. +TQLCDNumber emits the overflow() signal when it is asked to display something beyond its range. The range is set by setNumDigits(), but setSmallDecimalPoint() also influences it. If the display is set to hexadecimal, octal or binary, the integer equivalent of the value is displayed. .PP -These digits and other symbols can be shown: 0/O, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5/S, 6, 7, 8, 9/g, minus, decimal point, A, B, C, D, E, F, h, H, L, o, P, r, u, U, Y, colon, degree sign (which is specified as single quote in the string) and space. QLCDNumber substitutes spaces for illegal characters. +These digits and other symbols can be shown: 0/O, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5/S, 6, 7, 8, 9/g, minus, decimal point, A, B, C, D, E, F, h, H, L, o, P, r, u, U, Y, colon, degree sign (which is specified as single quote in the string) and space. TQLCDNumber substitutes spaces for illegal characters. .PP -It is not possible to retrieve the contents of a QLCDNumber object, although you can retrieve the numeric value with value(). If you really need the text, we recommend that you connect the signals that feed the display() slot to another slot as well and store the value there. +It is not possible to retrieve the contents of a TQLCDNumber object, although you can retrieve the numeric value with value(). If you really need the text, we recommend that you connect the signals that feed the display() slot to another slot as well and store the value there. .PP -Incidentally, QLCDNumber is the very oldest part of Qt, tracing back to a BASIC program on the Sinclair Spectrum. +Incidentally, TQLCDNumber is the very oldest part of Qt, tracing back to a BASIC program on the Sinclair Spectrum. .PP .ce 1 .B "[Image Omitted]" @@ -148,109 +148,109 @@ Incidentally, QLCDNumber is the very oldest part of Qt, tracing back to a BASIC .PP See also TQLabel, QFrame, and Basic Widgets. .SS "Member Type Documentation" -.SH "QLCDNumber::Mode" +.SH "TQLCDNumber::Mode" This type determines how numbers are shown. .TP -\fCQLCDNumber::Hex\fR - Hexadecimal +\fCTQLCDNumber::Hex\fR - Hexadecimal .TP -\fCQLCDNumber::Dec\fR - Decimal +\fCTQLCDNumber::Dec\fR - Decimal .TP -\fCQLCDNumber::Oct\fR - Octal +\fCTQLCDNumber::Oct\fR - Octal .TP -\fCQLCDNumber::Bin\fR - Binary +\fCTQLCDNumber::Bin\fR - Binary .PP If the display is set to hexadecimal, octal or binary, the integer equivalent of the value is displayed. -.SH "QLCDNumber::SegmentStyle" -This type determines the visual appearance of the QLCDNumber widget. +.SH "TQLCDNumber::SegmentStyle" +This type determines the visual appearance of the TQLCDNumber widget. .TP -\fCQLCDNumber::Outline\fR - gives raised segments filled with the background brush. +\fCTQLCDNumber::Outline\fR - gives raised segments filled with the background brush. .TP -\fCQLCDNumber::Filled\fR - gives raised segments filled with the foreground brush. +\fCTQLCDNumber::Filled\fR - gives raised segments filled with the foreground brush. .TP -\fCQLCDNumber::Flat\fR - gives flat segments filled with the foreground brush. +\fCTQLCDNumber::Flat\fR - gives flat segments filled with the foreground brush. .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION -.SH "QLCDNumber::QLCDNumber ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )" +.SH "TQLCDNumber::TQLCDNumber ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )" Constructs an LCD number, sets the number of digits to 5, the base to decimal, the decimal point mode to 'small' and the frame style to a raised box. The segmentStyle() is set to Outline. .PP The \fIparent\fR and \fIname\fR arguments are passed to the QFrame constructor. .PP See also numDigits and smallDecimalPoint. -.SH "QLCDNumber::QLCDNumber ( uint numDigits, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )" +.SH "TQLCDNumber::TQLCDNumber ( uint numDigits, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )" Constructs an LCD number, sets the number of digits to \fInumDigits\fR, the base to decimal, the decimal point mode to 'small' and the frame style to a raised box. The segmentStyle() is set to Outline. .PP The \fIparent\fR and \fIname\fR arguments are passed to the QFrame constructor. .PP See also numDigits and smallDecimalPoint. -.SH "QLCDNumber::~QLCDNumber ()" +.SH "TQLCDNumber::~TQLCDNumber ()" Destroys the LCD number. -.SH "bool QLCDNumber::checkOverflow ( double num ) const" +.SH "bool TQLCDNumber::checkOverflow ( double num ) const" Returns TRUE if \fInum\fR is too big to be displayed in its entirety; otherwise returns FALSE. .PP See also display(), numDigits, and smallDecimalPoint. -.SH "bool QLCDNumber::checkOverflow ( int num ) const" +.SH "bool TQLCDNumber::checkOverflow ( int num ) const" This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. .PP Returns TRUE if \fInum\fR is too big to be displayed in its entirety; otherwise returns FALSE. .PP See also display(), numDigits, and smallDecimalPoint. -.SH "void QLCDNumber::display ( const TQString & s )\fC [slot]\fR" +.SH "void TQLCDNumber::display ( const TQString & s )\fC [slot]\fR" Displays the number represented by the string \fIs\fR. .PP This version of the function disregards mode() and smallDecimalPoint(). .PP -These digits and other symbols can be shown: 0/O, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5/S, 6, 7, 8, 9/g, minus, decimal point, A, B, C, D, E, F, h, H, L, o, P, r, u, U, Y, colon, degree sign (which is specified as single quote in the string) and space. QLCDNumber substitutes spaces for illegal characters. +These digits and other symbols can be shown: 0/O, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5/S, 6, 7, 8, 9/g, minus, decimal point, A, B, C, D, E, F, h, H, L, o, P, r, u, U, Y, colon, degree sign (which is specified as single quote in the string) and space. TQLCDNumber substitutes spaces for illegal characters. .PP Examples: .)l rangecontrols/rangecontrols.cpp, t12/lcdrange.cpp, t13/gamebrd.cpp, t5/main.cpp, t6/main.cpp, t7/lcdrange.cpp, and xform/xform.cpp. -.SH "void QLCDNumber::display ( int num )\fC [slot]\fR" +.SH "void TQLCDNumber::display ( int num )\fC [slot]\fR" Sets the displayed value rounded to the nearest integer to \fInum\fR. See the "intValue" property for details. -.SH "void QLCDNumber::display ( double num )\fC [slot]\fR" +.SH "void TQLCDNumber::display ( double num )\fC [slot]\fR" This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. .PP Displays the number \fInum\fR. -.SH "void QLCDNumber::drawContents ( TQPainter * p )\fC [virtual protected]\fR" +.SH "void TQLCDNumber::drawContents ( TQPainter * p )\fC [virtual protected]\fR" Draws the LCD number using painter \fIp\fR. This function is called from QFrame::paintEvent(). .PP Reimplemented from QFrame. -.SH "int QLCDNumber::intValue () const" +.SH "int TQLCDNumber::intValue () const" Returns the displayed value rounded to the nearest integer. See the "intValue" property for details. -.SH "Mode QLCDNumber::mode () const" +.SH "Mode TQLCDNumber::mode () const" Returns the current display mode (number base). See the "mode" property for details. -.SH "int QLCDNumber::numDigits () const" +.SH "int TQLCDNumber::numDigits () const" Returns the current number of digits displayed. See the "numDigits" property for details. -.SH "void QLCDNumber::overflow ()\fC [signal]\fR" -This signal is emitted whenever the QLCDNumber is asked to display a too-large number or a too-long string. +.SH "void TQLCDNumber::overflow ()\fC [signal]\fR" +This signal is emitted whenever the TQLCDNumber is asked to display a too-large number or a too-long string. .PP It is never emitted by setNumDigits(). -.SH "SegmentStyle QLCDNumber::segmentStyle () const" +.SH "SegmentStyle TQLCDNumber::segmentStyle () const" Returns the style of the LCDNumber. See the "segmentStyle" property for details. -.SH "void QLCDNumber::setBinMode ()\fC [virtual slot]\fR" +.SH "void TQLCDNumber::setBinMode ()\fC [virtual slot]\fR" Calls setMode( BIN ). Provided for convenience (e.g. for connecting buttons to it). .PP See also mode, setHexMode(), setDecMode(), setOctMode(), and mode. -.SH "void QLCDNumber::setDecMode ()\fC [virtual slot]\fR" +.SH "void TQLCDNumber::setDecMode ()\fC [virtual slot]\fR" Calls setMode( DEC ). Provided for convenience (e.g. for connecting buttons to it). .PP See also mode, setHexMode(), setOctMode(), setBinMode(), and mode. -.SH "void QLCDNumber::setHexMode ()\fC [virtual slot]\fR" +.SH "void TQLCDNumber::setHexMode ()\fC [virtual slot]\fR" Calls setMode( HEX ). Provided for convenience (e.g. for connecting buttons to it). .PP See also mode, setDecMode(), setOctMode(), setBinMode(), and mode. -.SH "void QLCDNumber::setMode ( Mode )\fC [virtual]\fR" +.SH "void TQLCDNumber::setMode ( Mode )\fC [virtual]\fR" Sets the current display mode (number base). See the "mode" property for details. -.SH "void QLCDNumber::setNumDigits ( int nDigits )\fC [virtual]\fR" +.SH "void TQLCDNumber::setNumDigits ( int nDigits )\fC [virtual]\fR" Sets the current number of digits displayed to \fInDigits\fR. See the "numDigits" property for details. -.SH "void QLCDNumber::setOctMode ()\fC [virtual slot]\fR" +.SH "void TQLCDNumber::setOctMode ()\fC [virtual slot]\fR" Calls setMode( OCT ). Provided for convenience (e.g. for connecting buttons to it). .PP See also mode, setHexMode(), setDecMode(), setBinMode(), and mode. -.SH "void QLCDNumber::setSegmentStyle ( SegmentStyle )\fC [virtual]\fR" +.SH "void TQLCDNumber::setSegmentStyle ( SegmentStyle )\fC [virtual]\fR" Sets the style of the LCDNumber. See the "segmentStyle" property for details. -.SH "void QLCDNumber::setSmallDecimalPoint ( bool )\fC [virtual slot]\fR" +.SH "void TQLCDNumber::setSmallDecimalPoint ( bool )\fC [virtual slot]\fR" Sets the style of the decimal point. See the "smallDecimalPoint" property for details. -.SH "bool QLCDNumber::smallDecimalPoint () const" +.SH "bool TQLCDNumber::smallDecimalPoint () const" Returns the style of the decimal point. See the "smallDecimalPoint" property for details. -.SH "double QLCDNumber::value () const" +.SH "double TQLCDNumber::value () const" Returns the displayed value. See the "value" property for details. .SS "Property Documentation" .SH "int intValue" @@ -272,7 +272,7 @@ Set this property's value with setMode() and get this property's value with mode .SH "int numDigits" This property holds the current number of digits displayed. .PP -Corresponds to the current number of digits. If QLCDNumber::smallDecimalPoint is FALSE, the decimal point occupies one digit position. +Corresponds to the current number of digits. If TQLCDNumber::smallDecimalPoint is FALSE, the decimal point occupies one digit position. .PP See also smallDecimalPoint. .PP @@ -310,7 +310,7 @@ If the displayed value is not a number, the property has a value of 0. Set this property's value with display() and get this property's value with value(). .SH "SEE ALSO" -.BR http://doc.trolltech.com/ntqlcdnumber.html +.BR http://doc.trolltech.com/tqlcdnumber.html .BR http://www.trolltech.com/faq/tech.html .SH COPYRIGHT Copyright 1992-2007 Trolltech ASA, http://www.trolltech.com. See the diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqlineedit.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqlineedit.3qt index a0fd587a4..7c4d19367 100644 --- a/doc/man/man3/tqlineedit.3qt +++ b/doc/man/man3/tqlineedit.3qt @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ '\" t -.TH QLineEdit 3qt "2 February 2007" "Trolltech AS" \" -*- nroff -*- +.TH TQLineEdit 3qt "2 February 2007" "Trolltech AS" \" -*- nroff -*- .\" Copyright 1992-2007 Trolltech ASA. All rights reserved. See the .\" license file included in the distribution for a complete license .\" statement. @@ -7,25 +7,25 @@ .ad l .nh .SH NAME -QLineEdit \- One-line text editor +TQLineEdit \- One-line text editor .SH SYNOPSIS -\fC#include <ntqlineedit.h>\fR +\fC#include <tqlineedit.h>\fR .PP Inherits QFrame. .PP .SS "Public Members" .in +1c .ti -1c -.BI "\fBQLineEdit\fR ( TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )" +.BI "\fBTQLineEdit\fR ( TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )" .br .ti -1c -.BI "\fBQLineEdit\fR ( const TQString & contents, TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )" +.BI "\fBTQLineEdit\fR ( const TQString & contents, TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )" .br .ti -1c -.BI "\fBQLineEdit\fR ( const TQString & contents, const TQString & inputMask, TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )" +.BI "\fBTQLineEdit\fR ( const TQString & contents, const TQString & inputMask, TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )" .br .ti -1c -.BI "\fB~QLineEdit\fR ()" +.BI "\fB~TQLineEdit\fR ()" .br .ti -1c .BI "TQString \fBtext\fR () const" @@ -278,7 +278,7 @@ Inherits QFrame. .br .in -1c .SH DESCRIPTION -The QLineEdit widget is a one-line text editor. +The TQLineEdit widget is a one-line text editor. .PP A line edit allows the user to enter and edit a single line of plain text with a useful collection of editing functions, including undo and redo, cut and paste, and drag and drop. .PP @@ -292,7 +292,7 @@ You can change the text with setText() or insert(). The text is retrieved with t .PP When the text changes the textChanged() signal is emitted; when the Return or Enter key is pressed the returnPressed() signal is emitted. Note that if there is a validator set on the line edit, the returnPressed() signal will only be emitted if the validator returns \fCAcceptable\fR. .PP -By default, QLineEdits have a frame as specified by the Windows and Motif style guides; you can turn it off by calling setFrame(FALSE). +By default, TQLineEdits have a frame as specified by the Windows and Motif style guides; you can turn it off by calling setFrame(FALSE). .PP The default key bindings are described below. The line edit also provides a context menu (usually invoked by a right mouse click) that presents some of these editing options. <center>.nf .TS @@ -310,20 +310,20 @@ Any other key sequence that represents a valid character, will cause the charact .ce 1 .B "[Image Omitted]" .PP -See also TQTextEdit, TQLabel, QComboBox, GUI Design Handbook: Field, Entry, and Basic Widgets. +See also TQTextEdit, TQLabel, TQComboBox, GUI Design Handbook: Field, Entry, and Basic Widgets. .SS "Member Type Documentation" -.SH "QLineEdit::EchoMode" +.SH "TQLineEdit::EchoMode" This enum type describes how a line edit should display its contents. .TP -\fCQLineEdit::Normal\fR - Display characters as they are entered. This is the default. +\fCTQLineEdit::Normal\fR - Display characters as they are entered. This is the default. .TP -\fCQLineEdit::NoEcho\fR - Do not display anything. This may be appropriate for passwords where even the length of the password should be kept secret. +\fCTQLineEdit::NoEcho\fR - Do not display anything. This may be appropriate for passwords where even the length of the password should be kept secret. .TP -\fCQLineEdit::Password\fR - Display asterisks instead of the characters actually entered. +\fCTQLineEdit::Password\fR - Display asterisks instead of the characters actually entered. .PP See also echoMode and echoMode. .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION -.SH "QLineEdit::QLineEdit ( TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )" +.SH "TQLineEdit::TQLineEdit ( TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )" Constructs a line edit with no text. .PP The maximum text length is set to 32767 characters. @@ -331,7 +331,7 @@ The maximum text length is set to 32767 characters. The \fIparent\fR and \fIname\fR arguments are sent to the TQWidget constructor. .PP See also text and maxLength. -.SH "QLineEdit::QLineEdit ( const TQString & contents, TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )" +.SH "TQLineEdit::TQLineEdit ( const TQString & contents, TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )" Constructs a line edit containing the text \fIcontents\fR. .PP The cursor position is set to the end of the line and the maximum text length to 32767 characters. @@ -339,7 +339,7 @@ The cursor position is set to the end of the line and the maximum text length to The \fIparent\fR and \fIname\fR arguments are sent to the TQWidget constructor. .PP See also text and maxLength. -.SH "QLineEdit::QLineEdit ( const TQString & contents, const TQString & inputMask, TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )" +.SH "TQLineEdit::TQLineEdit ( const TQString & contents, const TQString & inputMask, TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )" Constructs a line edit with an input \fIinputMask\fR and the text \fIcontents\fR. .PP The cursor position is set to the end of the line and the maximum text length is set to the length of the mask (the number of mask characters and separators). @@ -347,99 +347,99 @@ The cursor position is set to the end of the line and the maximum text length is The \fIparent\fR and \fIname\fR arguments are sent to the TQWidget constructor. .PP See also setMask() and text. -.SH "QLineEdit::~QLineEdit ()" +.SH "TQLineEdit::~TQLineEdit ()" Destroys the line edit. -.SH "int QLineEdit::alignment () const" +.SH "int TQLineEdit::alignment () const" Returns the alignment of the line edit. See the "alignment" property for details. -.SH "void QLineEdit::backspace ()" +.SH "void TQLineEdit::backspace ()" If no text is selected, deletes the character to the left of the text cursor and moves the cursor one position to the left. If any text is selected, the cursor is moved to the beginning of the selected text and the selected text is deleted. .PP See also del(). -.SH "int QLineEdit::characterAt ( int xpos, TQChar * chr ) const" +.SH "int TQLineEdit::characterAt ( int xpos, TQChar * chr ) const" \fBThis function is obsolete.\fR It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code. -.SH "void QLineEdit::clear ()\fC [virtual slot]\fR" +.SH "void TQLineEdit::clear ()\fC [virtual slot]\fR" Clears the contents of the line edit. -.SH "void QLineEdit::clearModified ()" +.SH "void TQLineEdit::clearModified ()" Resets the modified flag to FALSE. .PP See also modified. -.SH "void QLineEdit::clearValidator ()\fC [virtual slot]\fR" +.SH "void TQLineEdit::clearValidator ()\fC [virtual slot]\fR" This slot is equivalent to setValidator(0). -.SH "void QLineEdit::copy () const\fC [virtual slot]\fR" +.SH "void TQLineEdit::copy () const\fC [virtual slot]\fR" Copies the selected text to the clipboard, if there is any, and if echoMode() is Normal. .PP See also cut() and paste(). -.SH "TQPopupMenu * QLineEdit::createPopupMenu ()\fC [virtual protected]\fR" +.SH "TQPopupMenu * TQLineEdit::createPopupMenu ()\fC [virtual protected]\fR" This function is called to create the popup menu which is shown when the user clicks on the line edit with the right mouse button. If you want to create a custom popup menu, reimplement this function and return the popup menu you create. The popup menu's ownership is transferred to the caller. -.SH "void QLineEdit::cursorBackward ( bool mark, int steps = 1 )" +.SH "void TQLineEdit::cursorBackward ( bool mark, int steps = 1 )" Moves the cursor back \fIsteps\fR characters. If \fImark\fR is TRUE each character moved over is added to the selection; if \fImark\fR is FALSE the selection is cleared. .PP See also cursorForward(). -.SH "void QLineEdit::cursorForward ( bool mark, int steps = 1 )" +.SH "void TQLineEdit::cursorForward ( bool mark, int steps = 1 )" Moves the cursor forward \fIsteps\fR characters. If \fImark\fR is TRUE each character moved over is added to the selection; if \fImark\fR is FALSE the selection is cleared. .PP See also cursorBackward(). -.SH "int QLineEdit::cursorPosition () const" +.SH "int TQLineEdit::cursorPosition () const" Returns the current cursor position for this line edit. See the "cursorPosition" property for details. -.SH "void QLineEdit::cursorWordBackward ( bool mark )" +.SH "void TQLineEdit::cursorWordBackward ( bool mark )" Moves the cursor one word backward. If \fImark\fR is TRUE, the word is also selected. .PP See also cursorWordForward(). -.SH "void QLineEdit::cursorWordForward ( bool mark )" +.SH "void TQLineEdit::cursorWordForward ( bool mark )" Moves the cursor one word forward. If \fImark\fR is TRUE, the word is also selected. .PP See also cursorWordBackward(). -.SH "void QLineEdit::cut ()\fC [virtual slot]\fR" +.SH "void TQLineEdit::cut ()\fC [virtual slot]\fR" Copies the selected text to the clipboard and deletes it, if there is any, and if echoMode() is Normal. .PP If the current validator disallows deleting the selected text, cut() will copy without deleting. .PP See also copy(), paste(), and setValidator(). -.SH "void QLineEdit::del ()" +.SH "void TQLineEdit::del ()" If no text is selected, deletes the character to the right of the text cursor. If any text is selected, the cursor is moved to the beginning of the selected text and the selected text is deleted. .PP See also backspace(). -.SH "void QLineEdit::deselect ()\fC [virtual slot]\fR" +.SH "void TQLineEdit::deselect ()\fC [virtual slot]\fR" Deselects any selected text. .PP See also setSelection() and selectAll(). -.SH "TQString QLineEdit::displayText () const" +.SH "TQString TQLineEdit::displayText () const" Returns the displayed text. See the "displayText" property for details. -.SH "bool QLineEdit::dragEnabled () const" +.SH "bool TQLineEdit::dragEnabled () const" Returns TRUE if the lineedit starts a drag if the user presses and moves the mouse on some selected text; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "dragEnabled" property for details. -.SH "EchoMode QLineEdit::echoMode () const" +.SH "EchoMode TQLineEdit::echoMode () const" Returns the line edit's echo mode. See the "echoMode" property for details. -.SH "bool QLineEdit::edited () const" +.SH "bool TQLineEdit::edited () const" Returns TRUE if the line edit has been edited. Use modified instead; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "edited" property for details. -.SH "void QLineEdit::end ( bool mark )" +.SH "void TQLineEdit::end ( bool mark )" Moves the text cursor to the end of the line unless it is already there. If \fImark\fR is TRUE, text is selected towards the last position; otherwise, any selected text is unselected if the cursor is moved. .PP See also home(). -.SH "bool QLineEdit::frame () const" +.SH "bool TQLineEdit::frame () const" Returns TRUE if the line edit draws itself with a frame; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "frame" property for details. -.SH "bool QLineEdit::getSelection ( int * start, int * end )" +.SH "bool TQLineEdit::getSelection ( int * start, int * end )" \fBThis function is obsolete.\fR It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code. use selectedText(), selectionStart() -.SH "bool QLineEdit::hasAcceptableInput () const" +.SH "bool TQLineEdit::hasAcceptableInput () const" Returns TRUE if the input satisfies the inputMask and the validator; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "acceptableInput" property for details. -.SH "bool QLineEdit::hasSelectedText () const" +.SH "bool TQLineEdit::hasSelectedText () const" Returns TRUE if there is any text selected; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "hasSelectedText" property for details. -.SH "void QLineEdit::home ( bool mark )" +.SH "void TQLineEdit::home ( bool mark )" Moves the text cursor to the beginning of the line unless it is already there. If \fImark\fR is TRUE, text is selected towards the first position; otherwise, any selected text is unselected if the cursor is moved. .PP See also end(). -.SH "TQString QLineEdit::inputMask () const" +.SH "TQString TQLineEdit::inputMask () const" Returns the validation input mask. See the "inputMask" property for details. -.SH "void QLineEdit::insert ( const TQString & newText )\fC [virtual slot]\fR" +.SH "void TQLineEdit::insert ( const TQString & newText )\fC [virtual slot]\fR" Deletes any selected text, inserts \fInewText\fR, and validates the result. If it is valid, it sets it as the new contents of the line edit. -.SH "bool QLineEdit::isModified () const" +.SH "bool TQLineEdit::isModified () const" Returns TRUE if the line edit's contents has been modified by the user; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "modified" property for details. -.SH "bool QLineEdit::isReadOnly () const" +.SH "bool TQLineEdit::isReadOnly () const" Returns TRUE if the line edit is read only; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "readOnly" property for details. -.SH "bool QLineEdit::isRedoAvailable () const" +.SH "bool TQLineEdit::isRedoAvailable () const" Returns TRUE if redo is available; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "redoAvailable" property for details. -.SH "bool QLineEdit::isUndoAvailable () const" +.SH "bool TQLineEdit::isUndoAvailable () const" Returns TRUE if undo is available; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "undoAvailable" property for details. -.SH "void QLineEdit::keyPressEvent ( QKeyEvent * e )\fC [virtual protected]\fR" +.SH "void TQLineEdit::keyPressEvent ( QKeyEvent * e )\fC [virtual protected]\fR" Converts key press event \fIe\fR into a line edit action. .PP If Return or Enter is pressed and the current text is valid (or can be made valid by the validator), the signal returnPressed() is emitted. @@ -447,71 +447,71 @@ If Return or Enter is pressed and the current text is valid (or can be made vali The default key bindings are listed in the detailed description. .PP Reimplemented from TQWidget. -.SH "void QLineEdit::lostFocus ()\fC [signal]\fR" +.SH "void TQLineEdit::lostFocus ()\fC [signal]\fR" This signal is emitted when the line edit has lost focus. .PP See also focus, TQWidget::focusInEvent(), and TQWidget::focusOutEvent(). -.SH "int QLineEdit::maxLength () const" +.SH "int TQLineEdit::maxLength () const" Returns the maximum permitted length of the text. See the "maxLength" property for details. -.SH "TQSize QLineEdit::minimumSizeHint () const\fC [virtual]\fR" +.SH "TQSize TQLineEdit::minimumSizeHint () const\fC [virtual]\fR" Returns a minimum size for the line edit. .PP The width returned is enough for at least one character. .PP Reimplemented from TQWidget. -.SH "void QLineEdit::paste ()\fC [virtual slot]\fR" +.SH "void TQLineEdit::paste ()\fC [virtual slot]\fR" Inserts the clipboard's text at the cursor position, deleting any selected text, providing the line edit is not read-only. .PP If the end result would not be acceptable to the current validator, nothing happens. .PP See also copy() and cut(). -.SH "void QLineEdit::redo ()\fC [virtual slot]\fR" +.SH "void TQLineEdit::redo ()\fC [virtual slot]\fR" Redoes the last operation if redo is available. -.SH "void QLineEdit::returnPressed ()\fC [signal]\fR" +.SH "void TQLineEdit::returnPressed ()\fC [signal]\fR" This signal is emitted when the Return or Enter key is pressed. Note that if there is a validator() or inputMask() set on the line edit, the returnPressed() signal will only be emitted if the input follows the inputMask() and the validator() returns \fCAcceptable\fR. .PP Example: popup/popup.cpp. -.SH "void QLineEdit::selectAll ()\fC [virtual slot]\fR" +.SH "void TQLineEdit::selectAll ()\fC [virtual slot]\fR" Selects all the text (i.e. highlights it) and moves the cursor to the end. This is useful when a default value has been inserted because if the user types before clicking on the widget, the selected text will be deleted. .PP See also setSelection() and deselect(). -.SH "TQString QLineEdit::selectedText () const" +.SH "TQString TQLineEdit::selectedText () const" Returns the selected text. See the "selectedText" property for details. -.SH "void QLineEdit::selectionChanged ()\fC [signal]\fR" +.SH "void TQLineEdit::selectionChanged ()\fC [signal]\fR" This signal is emitted whenever the selection changes. .PP See also hasSelectedText and selectedText. -.SH "int QLineEdit::selectionStart () const" +.SH "int TQLineEdit::selectionStart () const" selectionStart() returns the index of the first selected character in the line edit or -1 if no text is selected. .PP See also selectedText. -.SH "void QLineEdit::setAlignment ( int flag )\fC [virtual slot]\fR" +.SH "void TQLineEdit::setAlignment ( int flag )\fC [virtual slot]\fR" Sets the alignment of the line edit to \fIflag\fR. See the "alignment" property for details. -.SH "void QLineEdit::setCursorPosition ( int )\fC [virtual slot]\fR" +.SH "void TQLineEdit::setCursorPosition ( int )\fC [virtual slot]\fR" Sets the current cursor position for this line edit. See the "cursorPosition" property for details. -.SH "void QLineEdit::setDragEnabled ( bool b )\fC [virtual slot]\fR" +.SH "void TQLineEdit::setDragEnabled ( bool b )\fC [virtual slot]\fR" Sets whether the lineedit starts a drag if the user presses and moves the mouse on some selected text to \fIb\fR. See the "dragEnabled" property for details. -.SH "void QLineEdit::setEchoMode ( EchoMode )\fC [virtual slot]\fR" +.SH "void TQLineEdit::setEchoMode ( EchoMode )\fC [virtual slot]\fR" Sets the line edit's echo mode. See the "echoMode" property for details. -.SH "void QLineEdit::setEdited ( bool )" +.SH "void TQLineEdit::setEdited ( bool )" Sets whether the line edit has been edited. Use modified instead. See the "edited" property for details. -.SH "void QLineEdit::setFrame ( bool )\fC [virtual slot]\fR" +.SH "void TQLineEdit::setFrame ( bool )\fC [virtual slot]\fR" Sets whether the line edit draws itself with a frame. See the "frame" property for details. -.SH "void QLineEdit::setInputMask ( const TQString & inputMask )" +.SH "void TQLineEdit::setInputMask ( const TQString & inputMask )" Sets the validation input mask to \fIinputMask\fR. See the "inputMask" property for details. -.SH "void QLineEdit::setMaxLength ( int )\fC [virtual slot]\fR" +.SH "void TQLineEdit::setMaxLength ( int )\fC [virtual slot]\fR" Sets the maximum permitted length of the text. See the "maxLength" property for details. -.SH "void QLineEdit::setReadOnly ( bool )\fC [virtual slot]\fR" +.SH "void TQLineEdit::setReadOnly ( bool )\fC [virtual slot]\fR" Sets whether the line edit is read only. See the "readOnly" property for details. -.SH "void QLineEdit::setSelection ( int start, int length )\fC [virtual slot]\fR" +.SH "void TQLineEdit::setSelection ( int start, int length )\fC [virtual slot]\fR" Selects text from position \fIstart\fR and for \fIlength\fR characters. .PP Note that this function sets the cursor's position to the end of the selection regardless of its current position. .PP See also deselect(), selectAll(), getSelection(), cursorForward(), and cursorBackward(). -.SH "void QLineEdit::setText ( const TQString & )\fC [virtual slot]\fR" +.SH "void TQLineEdit::setText ( const TQString & )\fC [virtual slot]\fR" Sets the line edit's text. See the "text" property for details. -.SH "void QLineEdit::setValidator ( const QValidator * v )\fC [virtual slot]\fR" +.SH "void TQLineEdit::setValidator ( const QValidator * v )\fC [virtual slot]\fR" Sets this line edit to only accept input that the validator, \fIv\fR, will accept. This allows you to place any arbitrary constraints on the text which may be entered. .PP If \fIv\fR == 0, setValidator() removes the current input validator. The initial setting is to have no input validator (i.e. any input is accepted up to maxLength()). @@ -520,24 +520,24 @@ See also validator(), QIntValidator, QDoubleValidator, and TQRegExpValidator. .PP Examples: .)l lineedits/lineedits.cpp and wizard/wizard.cpp. -.SH "TQSize QLineEdit::sizeHint () const\fC [virtual]\fR" +.SH "TQSize TQLineEdit::sizeHint () const\fC [virtual]\fR" Returns a recommended size for the widget. .PP The width returned, in pixels, is usually enough for about 15 to 20 characters. .PP Example: addressbook/centralwidget.cpp. -.SH "TQString QLineEdit::text () const" +.SH "TQString TQLineEdit::text () const" Returns the line edit's text. See the "text" property for details. -.SH "void QLineEdit::textChanged ( const TQString & )\fC [signal]\fR" +.SH "void TQLineEdit::textChanged ( const TQString & )\fC [signal]\fR" This signal is emitted whenever the text changes. The argument is the new text. .PP Examples: .)l simple/main.cpp, wizard/wizard.cpp, and xform/xform.cpp. -.SH "void QLineEdit::undo ()\fC [virtual slot]\fR" +.SH "void TQLineEdit::undo ()\fC [virtual slot]\fR" Undoes the last operation if undo is available. Deselects any current selection, and updates the selection start to the current cursor position. -.SH "bool QLineEdit::validateAndSet ( const TQString & newText, int newPos, int newMarkAnchor, int newMarkDrag )" +.SH "bool TQLineEdit::validateAndSet ( const TQString & newText, int newPos, int newMarkAnchor, int newMarkDrag )" \fBThis function is obsolete.\fR It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code. Use setText(), setCursorPosition() and setSelection() instead. -.SH "const QValidator * QLineEdit::validator () const" +.SH "const QValidator * TQLineEdit::validator () const" Returns a pointer to the current input validator, or 0 if no validator has been set. .PP See also setValidator(). @@ -581,7 +581,7 @@ Set this property's value with setDragEnabled() and get this property's value wi .SH "EchoMode echoMode" This property holds the line edit's echo mode. .PP -The initial setting is Normal, but QLineEdit also supports NoEcho and Password modes. +The initial setting is Normal, but TQLineEdit also supports NoEcho and Password modes. .PP The widget's display and the ability to copy or drag the text is affected by this setting. .PP @@ -613,9 +613,9 @@ This property holds the validation input mask. .PP If no mask is set, inputMask() returns TQString::null. .PP -Sets the QLineEdit's validation mask. Validators can be used instead of, or in conjunction with masks; see setValidator(). +Sets the TQLineEdit's validation mask. Validators can be used instead of, or in conjunction with masks; see setValidator(). .PP -Unset the mask and return to normal QLineEdit operation by passing an empty string ("") or just calling setInputMask() with no arguments. +Unset the mask and return to normal TQLineEdit operation by passing an empty string ("") or just calling setInputMask() with no arguments. .PP The mask format understands these mask characters: <center>.nf .TS @@ -655,7 +655,7 @@ Set this property's value with setMaxLength() and get this property's value with .SH "bool modified" This property holds whether the line edit's contents has been modified by the user. .PP -The modified flag is never read by QLineEdit; it has a default value of FALSE and is changed to TRUE whenever the user changes the line edit's contents. +The modified flag is never read by TQLineEdit; it has a default value of FALSE and is changed to TRUE whenever the user changes the line edit's contents. .PP This is useful for things that need to provide a default value but do not start out knowing what the default should be (perhaps it depends on other fields on the form). Start the line edit without the best default, and when the default is known, if modified() returns FALSE (the user hasn't entered any text), insert the default value. .PP @@ -667,7 +667,7 @@ This property holds whether the line edit is read only. .PP In read-only mode, the user can still copy the text to the clipboard or drag-and-drop the text (if echoMode() is Normal), but cannot edit it. .PP -QLineEdit does not show a cursor in read-only mode. +TQLineEdit does not show a cursor in read-only mode. .PP See also enabled. .PP @@ -700,7 +700,7 @@ This property holds whether undo is available. Get this property's value with isUndoAvailable(). .SH "SEE ALSO" -.BR http://doc.trolltech.com/ntqlineedit.html +.BR http://doc.trolltech.com/tqlineedit.html .BR http://www.trolltech.com/faq/tech.html .SH COPYRIGHT Copyright 1992-2007 Trolltech ASA, http://www.trolltech.com. See the diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqlistbox.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqlistbox.3qt index 6935b4a3b..0e1188008 100644 --- a/doc/man/man3/tqlistbox.3qt +++ b/doc/man/man3/tqlistbox.3qt @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ QListBox \- List of selectable, read-only items .SH SYNOPSIS \fC#include <ntqlistbox.h>\fR .PP -Inherits QScrollView. +Inherits TQScrollView. .PP .SS "Public Members" .in +1c @@ -456,7 +456,7 @@ If you need to insert types other than strings and pixmaps, you must define new .ce 1 .B "[Image Omitted]" .PP -See also QListView, QComboBox, QButtonGroup, GUI Design Handbook: List Box (two sections), and Advanced Widgets. +See also QListView, TQComboBox, QButtonGroup, GUI Design Handbook: List Box (two sections), and Advanced Widgets. .SS "Member Type Documentation" .SH "QListBox::LayoutMode" This enum type is used to specify how QListBox lays out its rows and columns. diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqlistview.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqlistview.3qt index 75d4154cf..bf273525f 100644 --- a/doc/man/man3/tqlistview.3qt +++ b/doc/man/man3/tqlistview.3qt @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ QListView \- Implements a list/tree view .SH SYNOPSIS \fC#include <ntqlistview.h>\fR .PP -Inherits QScrollView. +Inherits TQScrollView. .PP .SS "Public Members" .in +1c @@ -399,7 +399,7 @@ The QListView class implements a list/tree view. .PP It can display and control a hierarchy of multi-column items, and provides the ability to add new items at any time. The user may select one or many items (depending on the SelectionMode) and sort the list in increasing or decreasing order by any column. .PP -The simplest pattern of use is to create a QListView, add some column headers using addColumn() and create one or more QListViewItem or QCheckListItem objects with the QListView as parent: +The simplest pattern of use is to create a QListView, add some column headers using addColumn() and create one or more QListViewItem or TQCheckListItem objects with the QListView as parent: .PP .nf .br @@ -438,7 +438,7 @@ l - l. Function Action addColumn() Adds a column with a text label and perhaps w .fi </center> .PP -To handle events such as mouse presses on the list view, derived classes can reimplement the QScrollView functions: contentsMousePressEvent, contentsMouseReleaseEvent, contentsMouseDoubleClickEvent, contentsMouseMoveEvent, contentsDragEnterEvent, contentsDragMoveEvent, contentsDragLeaveEvent, contentsDropEvent, and contentsWheelEvent. +To handle events such as mouse presses on the list view, derived classes can reimplement the TQScrollView functions: contentsMousePressEvent, contentsMouseReleaseEvent, contentsMouseDoubleClickEvent, contentsMouseMoveEvent, contentsDragEnterEvent, contentsDragMoveEvent, contentsDragLeaveEvent, contentsDropEvent, and contentsWheelEvent. .PP There are also several functions for mapping between items and coordinates. itemAt() returns the item at a position on-screen, itemRect() returns the rectangle an item occupies on the screen, and itemPos() returns the position of any item (whether it is on-screen or not). firstChild() returns the list view's first item (not necessarily visible on-screen). .PP @@ -476,7 +476,7 @@ If the user starts typing letters with the focus in the list view an incremental .ce 1 .B "[Image Omitted]" .PP -See also QListViewItem, QCheckListItem, and Advanced Widgets. +See also QListViewItem, TQCheckListItem, and Advanced Widgets. .SS "Member Type Documentation" .SH "QListView::RenameAction" This enum describes whether a rename operation is accepted if the rename editor loses focus without the user pressing Enter. @@ -598,25 +598,25 @@ Returns the number of columns in this list view. See the "columns" property for .SH "void QListView::contentsMouseDoubleClickEvent ( QMouseEvent * e )\fC [virtual protected]\fR" Processes the mouse double-click event \fIe\fR on behalf of the viewed widget. .PP -Reimplemented from QScrollView. +Reimplemented from TQScrollView. .SH "void QListView::contentsMouseMoveEvent ( QMouseEvent * e )\fC [virtual protected]\fR" Processes the mouse move event \fIe\fR on behalf of the viewed widget. .PP Example: dirview/dirview.cpp. .PP -Reimplemented from QScrollView. +Reimplemented from TQScrollView. .SH "void QListView::contentsMousePressEvent ( QMouseEvent * e )\fC [virtual protected]\fR" Processes the mouse press event \fIe\fR on behalf of the viewed widget. .PP Example: dirview/dirview.cpp. .PP -Reimplemented from QScrollView. +Reimplemented from TQScrollView. .SH "void QListView::contentsMouseReleaseEvent ( QMouseEvent * e )\fC [virtual protected]\fR" Processes the mouse release event \fIe\fR on behalf of the viewed widget. .PP Example: dirview/dirview.cpp. .PP -Reimplemented from QScrollView. +Reimplemented from TQScrollView. .SH "void QListView::contextMenuRequested ( QListViewItem * item, const TQPoint & pos, int col )\fC [signal]\fR" This signal is emitted when the user invokes a context menu with the right mouse button or with special system keys. If the keyboard was used \fIitem\fR is the current item; if the mouse was used, \fIitem\fR is the item under the mouse pointer or 0 if there is no item under the mouse pointer. If no item is clicked, the column index emitted is -1. .PP @@ -661,7 +661,7 @@ By default this function returns 0. You should reimplement it and create a TQDra .SH "void QListView::drawContentsOffset ( TQPainter * p, int ox, int oy, int cx, int cy, int cw, int ch )\fC [virtual protected]\fR" Calls QListViewItem::paintCell() and QListViewItem::paintBranches() as necessary for all list view items that require repainting in the \fIcw\fR pixels wide and \fIch\fR pixels high bounding rectangle starting at position \fIcx\fR, \fIcy\fR with offset \fIox\fR, \fIoy\fR. Uses the painter \fIp\fR. .PP -Reimplemented from QScrollView. +Reimplemented from TQScrollView. .SH "void QListView::dropped ( TQDropEvent * e )\fC [signal]\fR" This signal is emitted, when a drop event occurred on the viewport (not onto an item). .PP @@ -669,11 +669,11 @@ This signal is emitted, when a drop event occurred on the viewport (not onto an .SH "void QListView::ensureItemVisible ( const QListViewItem * i )" Ensures that item \fIi\fR is visible, scrolling the list view vertically if necessary and opening (expanding) any parent items if this is required to show the item. .PP -See also itemRect() and QScrollView::ensureVisible(). +See also itemRect() and TQScrollView::ensureVisible(). .SH "bool QListView::eventFilter ( TQObject * o, TQEvent * e )\fC [virtual]\fR" Redirects the event \fIe\fR relating to object \fIo\fR, for the viewport to mousePressEvent(), keyPressEvent() and friends. .PP -Reimplemented from QScrollView. +Reimplemented from TQScrollView. .SH "void QListView::expanded ( QListViewItem * item )\fC [signal]\fR" This signal is emitted when \fIitem\fR has been expanded, i.e. when the children of \fIitem\fR are shown. .PP diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqlistviewitem.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqlistviewitem.3qt index a432851df..00b38945f 100644 --- a/doc/man/man3/tqlistviewitem.3qt +++ b/doc/man/man3/tqlistviewitem.3qt @@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ QListViewItem \- Implements a list view item .PP Inherits Qt. .PP -Inherited by QCheckListItem. +Inherited by TQCheckListItem. .PP .SS "Public Members" .in +1c @@ -259,7 +259,7 @@ If you keep the pointer, you can set or change the texts using setText(), add pi .PP If you call \fCdelete\fR on a list view item, it will be deleted as expected, and as usual for TQObjects, if it has any child items (to any depth), all these will be deleted too. .PP -QCheckListItems are list view items that have a checkbox or radio button and can be used in place of plain QListViewItems. +TQCheckListItems are list view items that have a checkbox or radio button and can be used in place of plain QListViewItems. .PP You can traverse the tree as if it were a doubly-linked list using itemAbove() and itemBelow(); they return pointers to the items directly above and below this item on the screen (even if none of them are actually visible at the moment). .PP @@ -314,7 +314,7 @@ Some subclasses call setExpandable(TRUE) even when they have no children, and po .PP </center> .PP -See also QCheckListItem, QListView, and Advanced Widgets. +See also TQCheckListItem, QListView, and Advanced Widgets. .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION .SH "QListViewItem::QListViewItem ( QListView * parent )" Constructs a new top-level list view item in the QListView \fIparent\fR. @@ -355,7 +355,7 @@ This virtual function is called whenever the user presses the mouse on this item .PP See also activatedPos(). .PP -Reimplemented in QCheckListItem. +Reimplemented in TQCheckListItem. .SH "bool QListViewItem::activatedPos ( TQPoint & pos )\fC [protected]\fR" When called from a reimplementation of activate(), this function gives information on how the item was activated. Otherwise the behavior is undefined. .PP @@ -538,7 +538,7 @@ See also paintBranches() and QListView::drawContentsOffset(). .PP Example: listviews/listviews.cpp. .PP -Reimplemented in QCheckListItem. +Reimplemented in TQCheckListItem. .SH "void QListViewItem::paintFocus ( TQPainter * p, const TQColorGroup & cg, const TQRect & r )\fC [virtual]\fR" Paints a focus indicator on the rectangle \fIr\fR using painter \fIp\fR and colors \fIcg\fR. .PP @@ -546,7 +546,7 @@ Paints a focus indicator on the rectangle \fIr\fR using painter \fIp\fR and colo .PP See also paintCell(), paintBranches(), and QListView::allColumnsShowFocus. .PP -Reimplemented in QCheckListItem. +Reimplemented in TQCheckListItem. .SH "QListViewItem * QListViewItem::parent () const" Returns the parent of this item, or 0 if this item has no parent. .PP @@ -575,7 +575,7 @@ Returns 0. .PP Make your derived classes return their own values for rtti(), so that you can distinguish between different kinds of list view items. You should use values greater than 1000 to allow for extensions to this class. .PP -Reimplemented in QCheckListItem. +Reimplemented in TQCheckListItem. .SH "void QListViewItem::setDragEnabled ( bool allow )\fC [virtual]\fR" If \fIallow\fR is TRUE, the list view starts a drag (see QListView::dragObject()) when the user presses and moves the mouse on this item. .SH "void QListViewItem::setDropEnabled ( bool allow )\fC [virtual]\fR" diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqmacstyle.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqmacstyle.3qt index 93b4a71c1..f3886234a 100644 --- a/doc/man/man3/tqmacstyle.3qt +++ b/doc/man/man3/tqmacstyle.3qt @@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ Layout - The restrictions on window layout are such that some aspects of layout Widget size - Aqua allows widgets to have specific fixed sizes. TQt does not fully implement this behaviour so as to maintain multiplatform compatibility. As a result some widgets sizes may be inappropriate (and subsequently not rendered correctly by the Appearance Manager).The TQWidget::sizeHint() will return the appropriate size for many managed widgets (widgets enumerated in TQStyle::ContentsType). .IP .TP -Effects - QMacStyle (in contrast to QAquaStyle) is not emulating (except where Appearance Manager does not provide certain capabilities), for example QPushButton pulsing effects. In this case a near matching emulation has been implemented, but naturally this will not be identical to the similar functionality built into the Appearance Manager. Please report any issues you see in effects or non-standard widgets. +Effects - QMacStyle (in contrast to QAquaStyle) is not emulating (except where Appearance Manager does not provide certain capabilities), for example TQPushButton pulsing effects. In this case a near matching emulation has been implemented, but naturally this will not be identical to the similar functionality built into the Appearance Manager. Please report any issues you see in effects or non-standard widgets. .IP .PP There are other issues that need to be considered in the feel of your application (including the general color scheme to match the Aqua colors). The Guidelines mentioned above will remain current with new advances and design suggestions for Mac OS X. @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ This type is used to signify a widget's focus rectangle policy. .TP \fCQMacStyle::FocusDisabled\fR - never show a focus rectangle for the widget. .TP -\fCQMacStyle::FocusDefault\fR - show a focus rectangle when the widget has focus and the widget is a QSpinWidget, TQDateTimeEdit, QLineEdit, QListBox, QListView, editable TQTextEdit, or one of their subclasses. +\fCQMacStyle::FocusDefault\fR - show a focus rectangle when the widget has focus and the widget is a TQSpinWidget, TQDateTimeEdit, TQLineEdit, QListBox, QListView, editable TQTextEdit, or one of their subclasses. .SH "QMacStyle::WidgetSizePolicy" .TP \fCQMacStyle::SizeSmall\fR diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqmainwindow.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqmainwindow.3qt index d09ffec84..87b715d82 100644 --- a/doc/man/man3/tqmainwindow.3qt +++ b/doc/man/man3/tqmainwindow.3qt @@ -465,7 +465,7 @@ Adding dock windows, e.g. toolbars, to TQMainWindow's dock areas is straightforw .ce 1 .B "[Image Omitted]" .PP -See also TQToolBar, QDockWindow, TQStatusBar, TQAction, TQMenuBar, TQPopupMenu, TQToolTipGroup, QDialog, and Main Window and Related Classes. +See also TQToolBar, QDockWindow, TQStatusBar, TQAction, TQMenuBar, TQPopupMenu, TQToolTipGroup, TQDialog, and Main Window and Related Classes. .SS "Member Type Documentation" .SH "TQMainWindow::DockWindows" Right-clicking a dock area will pop-up the dock window menu (createDockWindowMenu() is called automatically). When called in code you can specify what items should appear on the menu with this enum. diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqmenubar.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqmenubar.3qt index 50e597908..394dad78e 100644 --- a/doc/man/man3/tqmenubar.3qt +++ b/doc/man/man3/tqmenubar.3qt @@ -447,7 +447,7 @@ Theoretically, any widget can be inserted into a popup menu. In practice, this o .PP If a widget is not focus-enabled (see TQWidget::isFocusEnabled()), the menu treats it as a separator; this means that the item is not selectable and will never get focus. In this way you can, for example, simply insert a TQLabel if you need a popup menu with a title. .PP -If the widget is focus-enabled it will get focus when the user traverses the popup menu with the arrow keys. If the widget does not accept \fCArrowUp\fR and \fCArrowDown\fR in its key event handler, the focus will move back to the menu when the respective arrow key is hit one more time. This works with a QLineEdit, for example. If the widget accepts the arrow key itself, it must also provide the possibility to put the focus back on the menu again by calling TQWidget::focusNextPrevChild(). Futhermore, if the embedded widget closes the menu when the user made a selection, this can be done safely by calling: +If the widget is focus-enabled it will get focus when the user traverses the popup menu with the arrow keys. If the widget does not accept \fCArrowUp\fR and \fCArrowDown\fR in its key event handler, the focus will move back to the menu when the respective arrow key is hit one more time. This works with a TQLineEdit, for example. If the widget accepts the arrow key itself, it must also provide the possibility to put the focus back on the menu again by calling TQWidget::focusNextPrevChild(). Futhermore, if the embedded widget closes the menu when the user made a selection, this can be done safely by calling: .PP .nf .br diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqmenudata.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqmenudata.3qt index 6a0d238f3..6966df77e 100644 --- a/doc/man/man3/tqmenudata.3qt +++ b/doc/man/man3/tqmenudata.3qt @@ -487,7 +487,7 @@ Theoretically, any widget can be inserted into a popup menu. In practice, this o .PP If a widget is not focus-enabled (see TQWidget::isFocusEnabled()), the menu treats it as a separator; this means that the item is not selectable and will never get focus. In this way you can, for example, simply insert a TQLabel if you need a popup menu with a title. .PP -If the widget is focus-enabled it will get focus when the user traverses the popup menu with the arrow keys. If the widget does not accept \fCArrowUp\fR and \fCArrowDown\fR in its key event handler, the focus will move back to the menu when the respective arrow key is hit one more time. This works with a QLineEdit, for example. If the widget accepts the arrow key itself, it must also provide the possibility to put the focus back on the menu again by calling TQWidget::focusNextPrevChild(). Futhermore, if the embedded widget closes the menu when the user made a selection, this can be done safely by calling: +If the widget is focus-enabled it will get focus when the user traverses the popup menu with the arrow keys. If the widget does not accept \fCArrowUp\fR and \fCArrowDown\fR in its key event handler, the focus will move back to the menu when the respective arrow key is hit one more time. This works with a TQLineEdit, for example. If the widget accepts the arrow key itself, it must also provide the possibility to put the focus back on the menu again by calling TQWidget::focusNextPrevChild(). Futhermore, if the embedded widget closes the menu when the user made a selection, this can be done safely by calling: .PP .nf .br diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqmessagebox.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqmessagebox.3qt index 0349f029d..903aa367c 100644 --- a/doc/man/man3/tqmessagebox.3qt +++ b/doc/man/man3/tqmessagebox.3qt @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ QMessageBox \- Modal dialog with a short message, an icon, and some buttons .SH SYNOPSIS \fC#include <ntqmessagebox.h>\fR .PP -Inherits QDialog. +Inherits TQDialog. .PP .SS "Public Members" .in +1c @@ -421,7 +421,7 @@ QMessageBox has no signals or slots. .ce 1 .B "[Image Omitted]" .PP -See also QDialog, Isys on error messages, GUI Design Handbook: Message Box, and Dialog Classes. +See also TQDialog, Isys on error messages, GUI Design Handbook: Message Box, and Dialog Classes. .SS "Member Type Documentation" .SH "QMessageBox::Icon" This enum has the following values: @@ -442,7 +442,7 @@ Constructs a message box with no text and a button with the label" OK". .PP If \fIparent\fR is 0, the message box becomes an application-global modal dialog box. If \fIparent\fR is a widget, the message box becomes modal relative to \fIparent\fR. .PP -The \fIparent\fR and \fIname\fR arguments are passed to the QDialog constructor. +The \fIparent\fR and \fIname\fR arguments are passed to the TQDialog constructor. .SH "QMessageBox::QMessageBox ( const TQString & caption, const TQString & text, Icon icon, int button0, int button1, int button2, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = TRUE, WFlags f = WStyle_DialogBorder )" Constructs a message box with a \fIcaption\fR, a \fItext\fR, an \fIicon\fR, and up to three buttons. .PP @@ -512,7 +512,7 @@ If \fIparent\fR is 0, the message box becomes an application-global modal dialog .PP If \fImodal\fR is TRUE the message box is modal; otherwise it is modeless. .PP -The \fIparent\fR, \fIname\fR, \fImodal\fR, and \fIf\fR arguments are passed to the QDialog constructor. +The \fIparent\fR, \fIname\fR, \fImodal\fR, and \fIf\fR arguments are passed to the TQDialog constructor. .PP See also caption, text, and icon. .SH "QMessageBox::~QMessageBox ()" @@ -548,7 +548,7 @@ See also QApplication::aboutTQt(). Examples: .)l action/application.cpp, application/application.cpp, chart/chartform.cpp, helpviewer/helpwindow.cpp, menu/menu.cpp, themes/themes.cpp, and trivial/trivial.cpp. .SH "void QMessageBox::adjustSize ()\fC [virtual]\fR" -Adjusts the size of the message box to fit the contents just before QDialog::exec() or QDialog::show() is called. +Adjusts the size of the message box to fit the contents just before TQDialog::exec() or TQDialog::show() is called. .PP This function will not be called if the message box has been explicitly resized before showing it. .PP diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqmotifdialog.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqmotifdialog.3qt index a8f99940c..cb2ad0816 100644 --- a/doc/man/man3/tqmotifdialog.3qt +++ b/doc/man/man3/tqmotifdialog.3qt @@ -7,13 +7,13 @@ .ad l .nh .SH NAME -QMotifDialog \- The QDialog API for Motif-based dialogs +QMotifDialog \- The TQDialog API for Motif-based dialogs .SH SYNOPSIS This class is part of the \fBQt Motif Extension\fR. .PP \fC#include <qmotifdialog.h>\fR .PP -Inherits QDialog. +Inherits TQDialog. .PP .SS "Public Members" .in +1c @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ Inherits QDialog. .SH DESCRIPTION This class is defined in the \fBQt Motif Extension\fR, which can be found in the \fCqt/extensions\fR directory. It is not included in the main TQt API. .PP -The QMotifDialog class provides the QDialog API for Motif-based dialogs. +The QMotifDialog class provides the TQDialog API for Motif-based dialogs. .PP QMotifDialog provides two separate modes of operation. The application programmer can use QMotifDialog with an existing Motif-based dialog and a TQWidget parent, or the application programmer can use QMotifDialog with a custom Qt-based dialog and a Motif-based parent. Modality continues to work as expected. .PP @@ -62,9 +62,9 @@ Motif-based dialogs must have a \fCShell\fR widget parent with a single child, d .PP The single child of the \fCShell\fR can be accessed using the dialog() member function \fIafter\fR it has been created. .PP -The acceptCallback() and rejectCallback() functions provide a convenient way to call QDialog::accept() and QDialog::reject() through callbacks. A pointer to the QMotifDialog should be passed as the \fCclient_data\fR argument to the callback. +The acceptCallback() and rejectCallback() functions provide a convenient way to call TQDialog::accept() and TQDialog::reject() through callbacks. A pointer to the QMotifDialog should be passed as the \fCclient_data\fR argument to the callback. .PP -The API and behavior QMotifDialog is identical to that of QDialog when using a custom Qt-based dialog with a Motif-based parent. The only difference is that a Motif-based \fIparent\fR argument is passed to the constructor, instead of a TQWidget parent. +The API and behavior QMotifDialog is identical to that of TQDialog when using a custom Qt-based dialog with a Motif-based parent. The only difference is that a Motif-based \fIparent\fR argument is passed to the constructor, instead of a TQWidget parent. .SS "Member Type Documentation" .SH "QMotifDialog::DialogType" \fBThis function is obsolete.\fR It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code. @@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ This enum lists the predefined Motif dialog types. .SH "QMotifDialog::QMotifDialog ( DialogType dialogtype, Widget parent, ArgList args = NULL, Cardinal argcount = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = FALSE, WFlags flags = 0 )" \fBThis function is obsolete.\fR It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code. .PP -Creates a QMotifDialog using one of the predefined Motif dialog types. The \fIname\fR, \fImodal\fR and \fIflags\fR arguments are passed to the QDialog constructor. +Creates a QMotifDialog using one of the predefined Motif dialog types. The \fIname\fR, \fImodal\fR and \fIflags\fR arguments are passed to the TQDialog constructor. .PP This constructor creates a Shell widget, which is a special subclass of XmDialogShell. The \fIparent\fR, \fIargs\fR and \fIargcount\fR arguments are passed to XtCreatePopupShell() when creating the subclass. You can access the Shell widget with the shell() member function. .PP @@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ See also DialogType, shell(), and dialog(). .SH "QMotifDialog::QMotifDialog ( Widget parent, ArgList args = NULL, Cardinal argcount = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = FALSE, WFlags flags = 0 )" \fBThis function is obsolete.\fR It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code. .PP -Creates a QMotifDialog which allows the application programmer to use the Motif-based \fIparent\fR for a custom QDialog. The \fIname\fR, \fImodal\fR and \fIflags\fR arguments are passed to the QDialog constructor. +Creates a QMotifDialog which allows the application programmer to use the Motif-based \fIparent\fR for a custom TQDialog. The \fIname\fR, \fImodal\fR and \fIflags\fR arguments are passed to the TQDialog constructor. .PP This constructor creates a Shell widget, which is a special subclass of XmDialogShell. The \fIargs\fR and \fIargcount\fR arguments are passed to XtCreatePopupShell() when creating the subclass. You can access the Shell widget with the shell() member function. .PP @@ -120,13 +120,13 @@ A dialog widget is not created by this constructor. Instead, you should create t .PP See also shell() and dialog(). .SH "QMotifDialog::QMotifDialog ( Widget parent, const char * name = 0, bool modal = FALSE, WFlags flags = 0 )" -Creates a QMotifDialog which allows the application programmer to use the Motif-based \fIparent\fR for a custom QDialog. The \fIname\fR, \fImodal\fR and \fIflags\fR arguments are passed to the QDialog constructor. +Creates a QMotifDialog which allows the application programmer to use the Motif-based \fIparent\fR for a custom TQDialog. The \fIname\fR, \fImodal\fR and \fIflags\fR arguments are passed to the TQDialog constructor. .PP This constructor creates a \fCShell\fR widget, which is a special subclass of \fCXmDialogShell\fR. You can access the \fCShell\fR widget with the shell() member function. .PP See also shell(). .SH "QMotifDialog::QMotifDialog ( TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0, bool modal = FALSE, WFlags flags = 0 )" -Creates a QMotifDialog which allows the application programmer to use a TQWidget parent for an existing Motif-based dialog. The \fIparent\fR, \fIname\fR, \fImodal\fR and \fIflags\fR arguments are passed to the QDialog constructor. +Creates a QMotifDialog which allows the application programmer to use a TQWidget parent for an existing Motif-based dialog. The \fIparent\fR, \fIname\fR, \fImodal\fR and \fIflags\fR arguments are passed to the TQDialog constructor. .PP This constructor creates a \fCShell\fR widget, which is a special subclass of \fCXmDialogShell\fR. You can access the \fCShell\fR widget with the shell() member functon. .PP @@ -136,7 +136,7 @@ A dialog widget is not created by this constructor. Instead, you should create t .PP See also shell() and dialog(). .SH "QMotifDialog::~QMotifDialog ()\fC [virtual]\fR" -Destroys the QDialog, dialog widget and \fCShell\fR widget. +Destroys the TQDialog, dialog widget and \fCShell\fR widget. .SH "void QMotifDialog::acceptCallback ( Widget, XtPointer client_data, XtPointer )\fC [static]\fR" Convenient Xt/Motif callback to accept the QMotifDialog. .PP diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqmotifwidget.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqmotifwidget.3qt index 0f3c0c076..623544351 100644 --- a/doc/man/man3/tqmotifwidget.3qt +++ b/doc/man/man3/tqmotifwidget.3qt @@ -40,7 +40,7 @@ The QMotifWidget class provides the TQWidget API for Xt/Motif widgets. .PP QMotifWidget exists to provide a TQWidget that can act as a parent for any Xt/Motif widget. Since the QMotifWidget is a proper TQWidget, it can be used as a top-level widget (e.g. 0 parent) or as a child of any other TQWidget. Note: Since QMotifWidget acts as a parent for Xt/Motif widgets, you should not create TQWidgets with a QMotifWidget parent. .PP -An Xt/Motif widget with a top-level QMotifWidget parent can begin using the standard TQt dialogs and custom QDialogs while keeping the main Xt/Motif interface of the application. Using a QMotifWidget as the parent for the various QDialogs will ensure that modality and stacking works properly throughout the entire application. +An Xt/Motif widget with a top-level QMotifWidget parent can begin using the standard TQt dialogs and custom TQDialogs while keeping the main Xt/Motif interface of the application. Using a QMotifWidget as the parent for the various TQDialogs will ensure that modality and stacking works properly throughout the entire application. .PP Applications moving to TQt may have custom Xt/Motif widgets that will take time to rewrite with Qt. Such applications can use these custom widgets as QMotifWidget with TQWidget parents. This allows the application's interface to be replaced gradually. .PP diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqobject.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqobject.3qt index 64367ea3a..81f079cf3 100644 --- a/doc/man/man3/tqobject.3qt +++ b/doc/man/man3/tqobject.3qt @@ -304,7 +304,7 @@ You must use the TQ_SIGNAL() and TQ_SLOT() macros when specifying the \fIsignal\ .br TQLabel *label = new TQLabel; .br - QScrollBar *scroll = new QScrollBar; + TQScrollBar *scroll = new TQScrollBar; .br TQObject::connect( scroll, TQ_SIGNAL(valueChanged(int)), .br @@ -336,7 +336,7 @@ A signal can also be connected to another signal: .br private: .br - QPushButton *aButton; + TQPushButton *aButton; .br }; .br @@ -345,7 +345,7 @@ A signal can also be connected to another signal: .br { .br - aButton = new QPushButton( this ); + aButton = new TQPushButton( this ); .br connect( aButton, TQ_SIGNAL(clicked()), TQ_SIGNAL(myUsefulSignal()) ); .br @@ -583,7 +583,7 @@ Notice in the example above that unhandled events are passed to the base class's .PP See also installEventFilter(). .PP -Reimplemented in QAccel, QScrollView, and QSpinBox. +Reimplemented in QAccel, TQScrollView, and TQSpinBox. .SH "bool TQObject::highPriority () const" Returns TRUE if the object is a high-priority object, or FALSE if it is a standard-priority object. .PP @@ -606,9 +606,9 @@ Example: t->inherits( "QButton" ); // returns FALSE .br .br - // QScrollBar inherits TQWidget and QRangeControl + // TQScrollBar inherits TQWidget and QRangeControl .br - QScrollBar *s = new QScrollBar( 0 ); + TQScrollBar *s = new TQScrollBar( 0 ); .br s->inherits( "TQWidget" ); // returns TRUE .br @@ -690,7 +690,7 @@ And here's how to install it on two widgets: .br KeyPressEater *keyPressEater = new KeyPressEater( this ); .br - QPushButton *pushButton = new QPushButton( this ); + TQPushButton *pushButton = new TQPushButton( this ); .br QListView *listView = new QListView( this ); .br diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqpixmapcache.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqpixmapcache.3qt index df41068cc..7054206ec 100644 --- a/doc/man/man3/tqpixmapcache.3qt +++ b/doc/man/man3/tqpixmapcache.3qt @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ The TQPixmapCache class provides an application-global cache for pixmaps. .PP This class is a tool for optimized drawing with TQPixmap. You can use it to store temporary pixmaps that are expensive to generate without using more storage space than cacheLimit(). Use insert() to insert pixmaps, find() to find them and clear() to empty the cache. .PP -For example, QRadioButton has a non-trivial visual representation so we don't want to regenerate a pixmap whenever a radio button is displayed or changes state. In the function QRadioButton::drawButton(), we do not draw the radio button directly. Instead, we first check the global pixmap cache for a pixmap with the key "$qt_radio_nnn_", where \fCnnn\fR is a numerical value that specifies the the radio button state. If a pixmap is found, we bitBlt() it onto the widget and return. Otherwise, we create a new pixmap, draw the radio button in the pixmap, and finally insert the pixmap in the global pixmap cache, using the key above. The bitBlt() is ten times faster than drawing the radio button. All radio buttons in the program share the cached pixmap since TQPixmapCache is application-global. +For example, TQRadioButton has a non-trivial visual representation so we don't want to regenerate a pixmap whenever a radio button is displayed or changes state. In the function TQRadioButton::drawButton(), we do not draw the radio button directly. Instead, we first check the global pixmap cache for a pixmap with the key "$qt_radio_nnn_", where \fCnnn\fR is a numerical value that specifies the the radio button state. If a pixmap is found, we bitBlt() it onto the widget and return. Otherwise, we create a new pixmap, draw the radio button in the pixmap, and finally insert the pixmap in the global pixmap cache, using the key above. The bitBlt() is ten times faster than drawing the radio button. All radio buttons in the program share the cached pixmap since TQPixmapCache is application-global. .PP TQPixmapCache contains no member data, only static functions to access the global pixmap cache. It creates an internal TQCache for caching the pixmaps. .PP diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqpopupmenu.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqpopupmenu.3qt index d17106a5e..f0dd47470 100644 --- a/doc/man/man3/tqpopupmenu.3qt +++ b/doc/man/man3/tqpopupmenu.3qt @@ -575,7 +575,7 @@ Theoretically, any widget can be inserted into a popup menu. In practice, this o .PP If a widget is not focus-enabled (see TQWidget::isFocusEnabled()), the menu treats it as a separator; this means that the item is not selectable and will never get focus. In this way you can, for example, simply insert a TQLabel if you need a popup menu with a title. .PP -If the widget is focus-enabled it will get focus when the user traverses the popup menu with the arrow keys. If the widget does not accept \fCArrowUp\fR and \fCArrowDown\fR in its key event handler, the focus will move back to the menu when the respective arrow key is hit one more time. This works with a QLineEdit, for example. If the widget accepts the arrow key itself, it must also provide the possibility to put the focus back on the menu again by calling TQWidget::focusNextPrevChild(). Futhermore, if the embedded widget closes the menu when the user made a selection, this can be done safely by calling: +If the widget is focus-enabled it will get focus when the user traverses the popup menu with the arrow keys. If the widget does not accept \fCArrowUp\fR and \fCArrowDown\fR in its key event handler, the focus will move back to the menu when the respective arrow key is hit one more time. This works with a TQLineEdit, for example. If the widget accepts the arrow key itself, it must also provide the possibility to put the focus back on the menu again by calling TQWidget::focusNextPrevChild(). Futhermore, if the embedded widget closes the menu when the user made a selection, this can be done safely by calling: .PP .nf .br diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqprogressdialog.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqprogressdialog.3qt index fb458da73..5d261d81b 100644 --- a/doc/man/man3/tqprogressdialog.3qt +++ b/doc/man/man3/tqprogressdialog.3qt @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ QProgressDialog \- Feedback on the progress of a slow operation .SH SYNOPSIS \fC#include <ntqprogressdialog.h>\fR .PP -Inherits QDialog. +Inherits TQDialog. .PP .SS "Public Members" .in +1c @@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ Inherits QDialog. .BI "void \fBsetLabel\fR ( TQLabel * label )" .br .ti -1c -.BI "void \fBsetCancelButton\fR ( QPushButton * cancelButton )" +.BI "void \fBsetCancelButton\fR ( TQPushButton * cancelButton )" .br .ti -1c .BI "void \fBsetBar\fR ( QProgressBar * bar )" @@ -237,7 +237,7 @@ In both modes the progress dialog may be customized by replacing the child widge .ce 1 .B "[Image Omitted]" .PP -See also QDialog, QProgressBar, GUI Design Handbook: Progress Indicator, and Dialog Classes. +See also TQDialog, QProgressBar, GUI Design Handbook: Progress Indicator, and Dialog Classes. .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION .SH "QProgressDialog::QProgressDialog ( TQWidget * creator = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = FALSE, WFlags f = 0 )" Constructs a progress dialog. @@ -250,7 +250,7 @@ The cancel button text is (translated) "Cancel". .TP The total number of steps is 100. .PP -The \fIcreator\fR argument is the widget to use as the dialog's parent. The \fIname\fR, \fImodal\fR, and the widget flags, \fIf\fR, are passed to the QDialog::QDialog() constructor. If \fImodal\fR is FALSE (the default), you must have an event loop proceeding for any redrawing of the dialog to occur. If \fImodal\fR is TRUE, the dialog ensures that events are processed when needed. +The \fIcreator\fR argument is the widget to use as the dialog's parent. The \fIname\fR, \fImodal\fR, and the widget flags, \fIf\fR, are passed to the TQDialog::TQDialog() constructor. If \fImodal\fR is FALSE (the default), you must have an event loop proceeding for any redrawing of the dialog to occur. If \fImodal\fR is TRUE, the dialog ensures that events are processed when needed. .PP See also labelText, setLabel(), setCancelButtonText(), setCancelButton(), and totalSteps. .SH "QProgressDialog::QProgressDialog ( const TQString & labelText, const TQString & cancelButtonText, int totalSteps, TQWidget * creator = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = FALSE, WFlags f = 0 )" @@ -262,7 +262,7 @@ The \fIcancelButtonText\fR is the text to display on the cancel button, or 0 if .PP The \fItotalSteps\fR is the total number of steps in the operation for which this progress dialog shows progress. For example, if the operation is to examine 50 files, this value would be 50. Before examining the first file, call setProgress(0). As each file is processed call setProgress(1), setProgress(2), etc., finally calling setProgress(50) after examining the last file. .PP -The \fIcreator\fR argument is the widget to use as the dialog's parent. The \fIname\fR, \fImodal\fR, and widget flags, \fIf\fR, are passed to the QDialog::QDialog() constructor. If \fImodal\fR is FALSE (the default), you will must have an event loop proceeding for any redrawing of the dialog to occur. If \fImodal\fR is TRUE, the dialog ensures that events are processed when needed. +The \fIcreator\fR argument is the widget to use as the dialog's parent. The \fIname\fR, \fImodal\fR, and widget flags, \fIf\fR, are passed to the TQDialog::TQDialog() constructor. If \fImodal\fR is FALSE (the default), you will must have an event loop proceeding for any redrawing of the dialog to occur. If \fImodal\fR is TRUE, the dialog ensures that events are processed when needed. .PP See also labelText, setLabel(), setCancelButtonText(), setCancelButton(), and totalSteps. .SH "QProgressDialog::~QProgressDialog ()" @@ -306,7 +306,7 @@ Sets whether the dialog gets hidden by reset() to \fIb\fR. See the "autoClose" p Sets whether the progress dialog calls reset() as soon as progress() equals totalSteps() to \fIb\fR. See the "autoReset" property for details. .SH "void QProgressDialog::setBar ( QProgressBar * bar )" Sets the progress bar widget to \fIbar\fR. The progress dialog resizes to fit. The progress dialog takes ownership of the progress \fIbar\fR which will be deleted when necessary, so do not use a progress bar allocated on the stack. -.SH "void QProgressDialog::setCancelButton ( QPushButton * cancelButton )" +.SH "void QProgressDialog::setCancelButton ( TQPushButton * cancelButton )" Sets the cancel button to the push button, \fIcancelButton\fR. The progress dialog takes ownership of this button which will be deleted when necessary, so do not pass the address of an object that is on the stack, i.e. use new() to create the button. .PP See also setCancelButtonText(). diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqptrdict.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqptrdict.3qt index ec5fb95c5..20b47f229 100644 --- a/doc/man/man3/tqptrdict.3qt +++ b/doc/man/man3/tqptrdict.3qt @@ -96,15 +96,15 @@ Example: TQPtrDict<char> fields; // void* keys, char* values .br .br - QLineEdit *le1 = new QLineEdit( this ); + TQLineEdit *le1 = new TQLineEdit( this ); .br le1->setText( "Simpson" ); .br - QLineEdit *le2 = new QLineEdit( this ); + TQLineEdit *le2 = new TQLineEdit( this ); .br le2->setText( "Homer" ); .br - QLineEdit *le3 = new QLineEdit( this ); + TQLineEdit *le3 = new TQLineEdit( this ); .br le3->setText( "45" ); .br diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqptrdictiterator.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqptrdictiterator.3qt index e5a8e7448..253395f8d 100644 --- a/doc/man/man3/tqptrdictiterator.3qt +++ b/doc/man/man3/tqptrdictiterator.3qt @@ -59,15 +59,15 @@ Example: TQPtrDict<char> fields; .br .br - QLineEdit *le1 = new QLineEdit( this ); + TQLineEdit *le1 = new TQLineEdit( this ); .br le1->setText( "Simpson" ); .br - QLineEdit *le2 = new QLineEdit( this ); + TQLineEdit *le2 = new TQLineEdit( this ); .br le2->setText( "Homer" ); .br - QLineEdit *le3 = new QLineEdit( this ); + TQLineEdit *le3 = new TQLineEdit( this ); .br le3->setText( "45" ); .br @@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ Example: .br for( ; it.current(); ++it ) { .br - QLineEdit *le = (QLineEdit)it.currentKey(); + TQLineEdit *le = (TQLineEdit)it.currentKey(); .br cout << it.current() << ": " << le->text() << endl; .br diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqpushbutton.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqpushbutton.3qt index 7ac93748c..082e51d84 100644 --- a/doc/man/man3/tqpushbutton.3qt +++ b/doc/man/man3/tqpushbutton.3qt @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ '\" t -.TH QPushButton 3qt "2 February 2007" "Trolltech AS" \" -*- nroff -*- +.TH TQPushButton 3qt "2 February 2007" "Trolltech AS" \" -*- nroff -*- .\" Copyright 1992-2007 Trolltech ASA. All rights reserved. See the .\" license file included in the distribution for a complete license .\" statement. @@ -7,25 +7,25 @@ .ad l .nh .SH NAME -QPushButton \- Command button +TQPushButton \- Command button .SH SYNOPSIS -\fC#include <ntqpushbutton.h>\fR +\fC#include <tqpushbutton.h>\fR .PP Inherits QButton. .PP .SS "Public Members" .in +1c .ti -1c -.BI "\fBQPushButton\fR ( TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )" +.BI "\fBTQPushButton\fR ( TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )" .br .ti -1c -.BI "\fBQPushButton\fR ( const TQString & text, TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )" +.BI "\fBTQPushButton\fR ( const TQString & text, TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )" .br .ti -1c -.BI "\fBQPushButton\fR ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & text, TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )" +.BI "\fBTQPushButton\fR ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & text, TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )" .br .ti -1c -.BI "\fB~QPushButton\fR ()" +.BI "\fB~TQPushButton\fR ()" .br .ti -1c .BI "void \fBsetToggleButton\fR ( bool )" @@ -167,7 +167,7 @@ Inherits QButton. .br .in -1c .SH DESCRIPTION -The QPushButton widget provides a command button. +The TQPushButton widget provides a command button. .PP The push button, or command button, is perhaps the most commonly used widget in any graphical user interface. Push (click) a button to command the computer to perform some action, or to answer a question. Typical buttons are OK, Apply, Cancel, Close, Yes, No and Help. .PP @@ -175,7 +175,7 @@ A command button is rectangular and typically displays a text label describing i .PP .nf .br - QPushButton *pb = new QPushButton( "&Download", this ); + TQPushButton *pb = new TQPushButton( "&Download", this ); .br .fi In this example the accelerator is \fIAlt+D\fR, and the label text will be displayed as \fB<u>D</u>ownload\fR. @@ -208,7 +208,7 @@ If you need toggle behavior (see setToggleButton()) or a button that auto-repeat .PP A variation of a command button is a menu button. These provide not just one command, but several, since when they are clicked they pop up a menu of options. Use the method setPopup() to associate a popup menu with a push button. .PP -Other classes of buttons are option buttons (see QRadioButton) and check boxes (see QCheckBox). +Other classes of buttons are option buttons (see TQRadioButton) and check boxes (see TQCheckBox). .PP .ce 1 .B "[Image Omitted]" @@ -217,27 +217,27 @@ Other classes of buttons are option buttons (see QRadioButton) and check boxes ( .ce 1 .B "[Image Omitted]" .PP -In Qt, the QButton abstract base class provides most of the modes and other API, and QPushButton provides GUI logic. See QButton for more information about the API. +In Qt, the QButton abstract base class provides most of the modes and other API, and TQPushButton provides GUI logic. See QButton for more information about the API. .PP -See also TQToolButton, QRadioButton, QCheckBox, GUI Design Handbook: Push Button, and Basic Widgets. +See also TQToolButton, TQRadioButton, TQCheckBox, GUI Design Handbook: Push Button, and Basic Widgets. .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION -.SH "QPushButton::QPushButton ( TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )" +.SH "TQPushButton::TQPushButton ( TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )" Constructs a push button with no text. .PP The \fIparent\fR and \fIname\fR arguments are sent on to the TQWidget constructor. -.SH "QPushButton::QPushButton ( const TQString & text, TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )" +.SH "TQPushButton::TQPushButton ( const TQString & text, TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )" Constructs a push button called \fIname\fR with the parent \fIparent\fR and the text \fItext\fR. -.SH "QPushButton::QPushButton ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & text, TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )" +.SH "TQPushButton::TQPushButton ( const TQIconSet & icon, const TQString & text, TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )" Constructs a push button with an \fIicon\fR and a \fItext\fR. .PP Note that you can also pass a TQPixmap object as an icon (thanks to the implicit type conversion provided by C++). .PP The \fIparent\fR and \fIname\fR arguments are sent to the TQWidget constructor. -.SH "QPushButton::~QPushButton ()" +.SH "TQPushButton::~TQPushButton ()" Destroys the push button. .SH "QKeySequence QButton::accel () const" Returns the accelerator associated with the button. See the "accel" property for details. -.SH "bool QPushButton::autoDefault () const" +.SH "bool TQPushButton::autoDefault () const" Returns TRUE if the push button is the auto default button; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "autoDefault" property for details. .SH "bool QButton::autoRepeat () const" Returns TRUE if autoRepeat is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "autoRepeat" property for details. @@ -258,17 +258,17 @@ Returns the group that this button belongs to. If the button is not a member of any QButtonGroup, this function returns 0. .PP See also QButtonGroup. -.SH "TQIconSet * QPushButton::iconSet () const" +.SH "TQIconSet * TQPushButton::iconSet () const" Returns the icon set on the push button. See the "iconSet" property for details. -.SH "bool QPushButton::isDefault () const" +.SH "bool TQPushButton::isDefault () const" Returns TRUE if the push button is the default button; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "default" property for details. .SH "bool QButton::isDown () const" Returns TRUE if the button is pressed; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "down" property for details. .SH "bool QButton::isExclusiveToggle () const" Returns TRUE if the button is an exclusive toggle; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "exclusiveToggle" property for details. -.SH "bool QPushButton::isFlat () const" +.SH "bool TQPushButton::isFlat () const" Returns TRUE if the border is disabled; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "flat" property for details. -.SH "bool QPushButton::isMenuButton () const" +.SH "bool TQPushButton::isMenuButton () const" Returns TRUE if the push button has a menu button on it; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "menuButton" property for details. .SH "bool QButton::isOn () const" Returns TRUE if the button is toggled; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "on" property for details. @@ -276,7 +276,7 @@ Returns TRUE if the button is toggled; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "on" pro Returns TRUE if the button is a toggle button; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "toggleButton" property for details. .SH "const TQPixmap * QButton::pixmap () const" Returns the pixmap shown on the button. See the "pixmap" property for details. -.SH "TQPopupMenu * QPushButton::popup () const" +.SH "TQPopupMenu * TQPushButton::popup () const" Returns the button's associated popup menu or 0 if no popup menu has been set. .PP See also setPopup(). @@ -293,25 +293,25 @@ This signal is emitted when the button is released. See also pressed(), clicked(), and toggled(). .SH "void QButton::setAccel ( const QKeySequence & )\fC [virtual]\fR" Sets the accelerator associated with the button. See the "accel" property for details. -.SH "void QPushButton::setAutoDefault ( bool autoDef )\fC [virtual]\fR" +.SH "void TQPushButton::setAutoDefault ( bool autoDef )\fC [virtual]\fR" Sets whether the push button is the auto default button to \fIautoDef\fR. See the "autoDefault" property for details. .SH "void QButton::setAutoRepeat ( bool )\fC [virtual]\fR" Sets whether autoRepeat is enabled. See the "autoRepeat" property for details. -.SH "void QPushButton::setDefault ( bool def )\fC [virtual]\fR" +.SH "void TQPushButton::setDefault ( bool def )\fC [virtual]\fR" Sets whether the push button is the default button to \fIdef\fR. See the "default" property for details. .SH "void QButton::setDown ( bool )\fC [virtual]\fR" Sets whether the button is pressed. See the "down" property for details. -.SH "void QPushButton::setFlat ( bool )" +.SH "void TQPushButton::setFlat ( bool )" Sets whether the border is disabled. See the "flat" property for details. -.SH "void QPushButton::setIconSet ( const TQIconSet & )" +.SH "void TQPushButton::setIconSet ( const TQIconSet & )" Sets the icon set on the push button. See the "iconSet" property for details. -.SH "void QPushButton::setIsMenuButton ( bool enable )\fC [virtual]\fR" +.SH "void TQPushButton::setIsMenuButton ( bool enable )\fC [virtual]\fR" \fBThis function is obsolete.\fR It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code. -.SH "void QPushButton::setOn ( bool )\fC [virtual slot]\fR" +.SH "void TQPushButton::setOn ( bool )\fC [virtual slot]\fR" Sets whether the push button is toggled. See the "on" property for details. .SH "void QButton::setPixmap ( const TQPixmap & )\fC [virtual]\fR" Sets the pixmap shown on the button. See the "pixmap" property for details. -.SH "void QPushButton::setPopup ( TQPopupMenu * popup )" +.SH "void TQPushButton::setPopup ( TQPopupMenu * popup )" Associates the popup menu \fIpopup\fR with this push button. This turns the button into a menu button. .PP Ownership of the popup menu is \fInot\fR transferred to the push button. @@ -322,7 +322,7 @@ Examples: .)l buttongroups/buttongroups.cpp and tqdir/tqdir.cpp. .SH "void QButton::setText ( const TQString & )\fC [virtual]\fR" Sets the text shown on the button. See the "text" property for details. -.SH "void QPushButton::setToggleButton ( bool )" +.SH "void TQPushButton::setToggleButton ( bool )" Sets whether the button is a toggle button. See the "toggleButton" property for details. .SH "ToggleState QButton::state () const" Returns the state of the toggle button. See the "toggleState" property for details. @@ -360,7 +360,7 @@ If this property is set to TRUE then the push button is the auto default button .PP In some GUI styles a default button is drawn with an extra frame around it, up to 3 pixels or more. TQt automatically keeps this space free around auto-default buttons, i.e. auto-default buttons may have a slightly larger size hint. .PP -This property's default is TRUE for buttons that have a QDialog parent; otherwise it defaults to FALSE. +This property's default is TRUE for buttons that have a TQDialog parent; otherwise it defaults to FALSE. .PP See the default property for details of how default and auto-default interact. .PP @@ -443,7 +443,7 @@ See also on, toggle(), toggleButton, and toggled(). Set this property's value with setToggleButton(). .SH "SEE ALSO" -.BR http://doc.trolltech.com/ntqpushbutton.html +.BR http://doc.trolltech.com/tqpushbutton.html .BR http://www.trolltech.com/faq/tech.html .SH COPYRIGHT Copyright 1992-2007 Trolltech ASA, http://www.trolltech.com. See the diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqradiobutton.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqradiobutton.3qt index 3bd8f0833..e7d50575d 100644 --- a/doc/man/man3/tqradiobutton.3qt +++ b/doc/man/man3/tqradiobutton.3qt @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ '\" t -.TH QRadioButton 3qt "2 February 2007" "Trolltech AS" \" -*- nroff -*- +.TH TQRadioButton 3qt "2 February 2007" "Trolltech AS" \" -*- nroff -*- .\" Copyright 1992-2007 Trolltech ASA. All rights reserved. See the .\" license file included in the distribution for a complete license .\" statement. @@ -7,19 +7,19 @@ .ad l .nh .SH NAME -QRadioButton \- Radio button with a text or pixmap label +TQRadioButton \- Radio button with a text or pixmap label .SH SYNOPSIS -\fC#include <ntqradiobutton.h>\fR +\fC#include <tqradiobutton.h>\fR .PP Inherits QButton. .PP .SS "Public Members" .in +1c .ti -1c -.BI "\fBQRadioButton\fR ( TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )" +.BI "\fBTQRadioButton\fR ( TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )" .br .ti -1c -.BI "\fBQRadioButton\fR ( const TQString & text, TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )" +.BI "\fBTQRadioButton\fR ( const TQString & text, TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )" .br .ti -1c .BI "bool \fBisChecked\fR () const" @@ -107,15 +107,15 @@ Inherits QButton. .br .in -1c .SH DESCRIPTION -The QRadioButton widget provides a radio button with a text or pixmap label. +The TQRadioButton widget provides a radio button with a text or pixmap label. .PP -QRadioButton and QCheckBox are both option buttons. That is, they can be switched on (checked) or off (unchecked). The classes differ in how the choices for the user are restricted. Check boxes define "many of many" choices, whereas radio buttons provide a" one of many" choice. In a group of radio buttons only one radio button at a time can be checked; if the user selects another button, the previously selected button is switched off. +TQRadioButton and TQCheckBox are both option buttons. That is, they can be switched on (checked) or off (unchecked). The classes differ in how the choices for the user are restricted. Check boxes define "many of many" choices, whereas radio buttons provide a" one of many" choice. In a group of radio buttons only one radio button at a time can be checked; if the user selects another button, the previously selected button is switched off. .PP The easiest way to implement a "one of many" choice is simply to put the radio buttons into QButtonGroup. .PP Whenever a button is switched on or off it emits the signal toggled(). Connect to this signal if you want to trigger an action each time the button changes state. Otherwise, use isChecked() to see if a particular button is selected. .PP -Just like QPushButton, a radio button can display text or a pixmap. The text can be set in the constructor or with setText(); the pixmap is set with setPixmap(). +Just like TQPushButton, a radio button can display text or a pixmap. The text can be set in the constructor or with setText(); the pixmap is set with setPixmap(). .PP .ce 1 .B "[Image Omitted]" @@ -124,13 +124,13 @@ Just like QPushButton, a radio button can display text or a pixmap. The text can .ce 1 .B "[Image Omitted]" .PP -See also QPushButton, TQToolButton, GUI Design Handbook: Radio Button, and Basic Widgets. +See also TQPushButton, TQToolButton, GUI Design Handbook: Radio Button, and Basic Widgets. .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION -.SH "QRadioButton::QRadioButton ( TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )" +.SH "TQRadioButton::TQRadioButton ( TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )" Constructs a radio button with no text. .PP The \fIparent\fR and \fIname\fR arguments are sent on to the TQWidget constructor. -.SH "QRadioButton::QRadioButton ( const TQString & text, TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )" +.SH "TQRadioButton::TQRadioButton ( const TQString & text, TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )" Constructs a radio button with the text \fItext\fR. .PP The \fIparent\fR and \fIname\fR arguments are sent on to the TQWidget constructor. @@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ Returns the group that this button belongs to. If the button is not a member of any QButtonGroup, this function returns 0. .PP See also QButtonGroup. -.SH "bool QRadioButton::isChecked () const" +.SH "bool TQRadioButton::isChecked () const" Returns TRUE if the radio button is checked; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "checked" property for details. .SH "bool QButton::isDown () const" Returns TRUE if the button is pressed; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "down" property for details. @@ -182,7 +182,7 @@ See also pressed(), clicked(), and toggled(). Sets the accelerator associated with the button. See the "accel" property for details. .SH "void QButton::setAutoRepeat ( bool )\fC [virtual]\fR" Sets whether autoRepeat is enabled. See the "autoRepeat" property for details. -.SH "void QRadioButton::setChecked ( bool check )\fC [virtual slot]\fR" +.SH "void TQRadioButton::setChecked ( bool check )\fC [virtual slot]\fR" Sets whether the radio button is checked to \fIcheck\fR. See the "checked" property for details. .SH "void QButton::setDown ( bool )\fC [virtual]\fR" Sets whether the button is pressed. See the "down" property for details. @@ -253,7 +253,7 @@ There is no default text. Set this property's value with setText() and get this property's value with text(). .SH "SEE ALSO" -.BR http://doc.trolltech.com/ntqradiobutton.html +.BR http://doc.trolltech.com/tqradiobutton.html .BR http://www.trolltech.com/faq/tech.html .SH COPYRIGHT Copyright 1992-2007 Trolltech ASA, http://www.trolltech.com. See the diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqrangecontrol.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqrangecontrol.3qt index 317ffb139..681b8f1ce 100644 --- a/doc/man/man3/tqrangecontrol.3qt +++ b/doc/man/man3/tqrangecontrol.3qt @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ QRangeControl \- Integer value within a range .SH SYNOPSIS \fC#include <ntqrangecontrol.h>\fR .PP -Inherited by QDial, QScrollBar, QSlider, and QSpinBox. +Inherited by TQDial, TQScrollBar, TQSlider, and TQSpinBox. .PP .SS "Public Members" .in +1c @@ -97,7 +97,7 @@ Inherited by QDial, QScrollBar, QSlider, and QSpinBox. .SH DESCRIPTION The QRangeControl class provides an integer value within a range. .PP -Although originally designed for the QScrollBar widget, the QRangeControl can also be used in conjunction with other widgets such as QSlider and QSpinBox. Here are the five main concepts in the class: +Although originally designed for the TQScrollBar widget, the QRangeControl can also be used in conjunction with other widgets such as TQSlider and TQSpinBox. Here are the five main concepts in the class: .PP <ol type=1> .IP 1 @@ -177,7 +177,7 @@ Converts \fIlogical_val\fR to a pixel position. minValue() maps to 0, maxValue() .PP This function can handle the entire integer range without overflow, providing \fIspan\fR is <= 4096. .PP -Calling this method is useful when actually drawing a range control such as a QScrollBar on-screen. +Calling this method is useful when actually drawing a range control such as a TQScrollBar on-screen. .PP See also valueFromPosition(). .SH "int QRangeControl::prevValue () const\fC [protected]\fR" @@ -193,7 +193,7 @@ Note that this method is called after the range has changed. .PP See also setRange(), valueChange(), and stepChange(). .PP -Reimplemented in QDial, QSlider, and QSpinBox. +Reimplemented in TQDial, TQSlider, and TQSpinBox. .SH "void QRangeControl::setMaxValue ( int maxVal )" Sets the minimum value of the range to \fImaxVal\fR. .PP @@ -258,13 +258,13 @@ Note that this method is called after the value has changed. The previous value .PP See also setValue(), addPage(), subtractPage(), addLine(), subtractLine(), rangeChange(), and stepChange(). .PP -Reimplemented in QDial, QSlider, and QSpinBox. +Reimplemented in TQDial, TQSlider, and TQSpinBox. .SH "int QRangeControl::valueFromPosition ( int pos, int span ) const\fC [protected]\fR" Converts the pixel position \fIpos\fR to a value. 0 maps to minValue(), \fIspan\fR maps to maxValue() and other values are distributed evenly in-between. .PP This function can handle the entire integer range without overflow. .PP -Calling this method is useful if you actually implemented a range control widget such as QScrollBar and want to handle mouse press events. This function then maps screen coordinates to the logical values. +Calling this method is useful if you actually implemented a range control widget such as TQScrollBar and want to handle mouse press events. This function then maps screen coordinates to the logical values. .PP See also positionFromValue(). diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqregexpvalidator.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqregexpvalidator.3qt index ceac7a236..a567f4952 100644 --- a/doc/man/man3/tqregexpvalidator.3qt +++ b/doc/man/man3/tqregexpvalidator.3qt @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ Example of use: QValidator* validator = new TQRegExpValidator( rx, this ); .br .br - QLineEdit* edit = new QLineEdit( this ); + TQLineEdit* edit = new TQLineEdit( this ); .br edit->setValidator( validator ); .br diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqscrollbar.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqscrollbar.3qt index ab64ac032..c8d0dc37d 100644 --- a/doc/man/man3/tqscrollbar.3qt +++ b/doc/man/man3/tqscrollbar.3qt @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ '\" t -.TH QScrollBar 3qt "2 February 2007" "Trolltech AS" \" -*- nroff -*- +.TH TQScrollBar 3qt "2 February 2007" "Trolltech AS" \" -*- nroff -*- .\" Copyright 1992-2007 Trolltech ASA. All rights reserved. See the .\" license file included in the distribution for a complete license .\" statement. @@ -7,25 +7,25 @@ .ad l .nh .SH NAME -QScrollBar \- Vertical or horizontal scroll bar +TQScrollBar \- Vertical or horizontal scroll bar .SH SYNOPSIS -\fC#include <ntqscrollbar.h>\fR +\fC#include <tqscrollbar.h>\fR .PP Inherits TQWidget and QRangeControl. .PP .SS "Public Members" .in +1c .ti -1c -.BI "\fBQScrollBar\fR ( TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )" +.BI "\fBTQScrollBar\fR ( TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )" .br .ti -1c -.BI "\fBQScrollBar\fR ( Orientation orientation, TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )" +.BI "\fBTQScrollBar\fR ( Orientation orientation, TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )" .br .ti -1c -.BI "\fBQScrollBar\fR ( int minValue, int maxValue, int lineStep, int pageStep, int value, Orientation orientation, TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )" +.BI "\fBTQScrollBar\fR ( int minValue, int maxValue, int lineStep, int pageStep, int value, Orientation orientation, TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )" .br .ti -1c -.BI "\fB~QScrollBar\fR ()" +.BI "\fB~TQScrollBar\fR ()" .br .ti -1c .BI "virtual void \fBsetOrientation\fR ( Orientation )" @@ -146,7 +146,7 @@ Inherits TQWidget and QRangeControl. .br .in -1c .SH DESCRIPTION -The QScrollBar widget provides a vertical or horizontal scroll bar. +The TQScrollBar widget provides a vertical or horizontal scroll bar. .PP A scroll bar allows the user to control a value within a program-definable range and gives users a visible indication of the current value of a range control. .PP @@ -162,22 +162,22 @@ The \fIslider\fR is the handle that indicates the current value of the scroll ba The \fIpage-up/page-down\fR control is the area on which the slider slides (the scroll bar's background). Clicking here moves the scroll bar towards the click. The meaning of "page" is also configurable: in editors and list boxes it means as many lines as there is space for in the widget. .IP .PP -QScrollBar has very few of its own functions; it mostly relies on QRangeControl. The most useful functions are setValue() to set the scroll bar directly to some value; addPage(), addLine(), subtractPage(), and subtractLine() to simulate the effects of clicking (useful for accelerator keys); setSteps() to define the values of pageStep() and lineStep(); and setRange() to set the minValue() and maxValue() of the scroll bar. QScrollBar has a convenience constructor with which you can set most of these properties. +TQScrollBar has very few of its own functions; it mostly relies on QRangeControl. The most useful functions are setValue() to set the scroll bar directly to some value; addPage(), addLine(), subtractPage(), and subtractLine() to simulate the effects of clicking (useful for accelerator keys); setSteps() to define the values of pageStep() and lineStep(); and setRange() to set the minValue() and maxValue() of the scroll bar. TQScrollBar has a convenience constructor with which you can set most of these properties. .PP Some GUI styles (for example, the Windows and Motif styles provided with Qt), also use the pageStep() value to calculate the size of the slider. .PP -In addition to the access functions from QRangeControl, QScrollBar provides a comprehensive set of signals: <center>.nf +In addition to the access functions from QRangeControl, TQScrollBar provides a comprehensive set of signals: <center>.nf .TS l - l. Signal Emitted when valueChanged() the scroll bar's value has changed. The tracking() determines whether this signal is emitted during user interaction. sliderPressed() the user starts to drag the slider. sliderMoved() the user drags the slider. sliderReleased() the user releases the slider. nextLine() the scroll bar has moved one line down or right. Line is defined in QRangeControl. prevLine() the scroll bar has moved one line up or left. nextPage() the scroll bar has moved one page down or right. prevPage() .TE .fi </center> .PP -QScrollBar only provides integer ranges. Note that although QScrollBar handles very large numbers, scroll bars on current screens cannot usefully control ranges above about 100,000 pixels. Beyond that, it becomes difficult for the user to control the scroll bar using either the keyboard or the mouse. +TQScrollBar only provides integer ranges. Note that although TQScrollBar handles very large numbers, scroll bars on current screens cannot usefully control ranges above about 100,000 pixels. Beyond that, it becomes difficult for the user to control the scroll bar using either the keyboard or the mouse. .PP A scroll bar can be controlled by the keyboard, but it has a default focusPolicy() of NoFocus. Use setFocusPolicy() to enable keyboard focus. See keyPressEvent() for a list of key bindings. .PP -If you need to add scroll bars to an interface, consider using the QScrollView class, which encapsulates the common uses for scroll bars. +If you need to add scroll bars to an interface, consider using the TQScrollView class, which encapsulates the common uses for scroll bars. .PP .ce 1 .B "[Image Omitted]" @@ -186,15 +186,15 @@ If you need to add scroll bars to an interface, consider using the QScrollView c .ce 1 .B "[Image Omitted]" .PP -See also QSlider, QSpinBox, QScrollView, GUI Design Handbook: Scroll Bar, and Basic Widgets. +See also TQSlider, TQSpinBox, TQScrollView, GUI Design Handbook: Scroll Bar, and Basic Widgets. .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION -.SH "QScrollBar::QScrollBar ( TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )" +.SH "TQScrollBar::TQScrollBar ( TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )" Constructs a vertical scroll bar. .PP The \fIparent\fR and \fIname\fR arguments are sent on to the TQWidget constructor. .PP The minValue defaults to 0, the maxValue to 99, with a lineStep size of 1 and a pageStep size of 10, and an initial value of 0. -.SH "QScrollBar::QScrollBar ( Orientation orientation, TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )" +.SH "TQScrollBar::TQScrollBar ( Orientation orientation, TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )" Constructs a scroll bar. .PP The \fIorientation\fR must be TQt::Vertical or TQt::Horizontal. @@ -202,81 +202,81 @@ The \fIorientation\fR must be TQt::Vertical or TQt::Horizontal. The \fIparent\fR and \fIname\fR arguments are sent on to the TQWidget constructor. .PP The minValue defaults to 0, the maxValue to 99, with a lineStep size of 1 and a pageStep size of 10, and an initial value of 0. -.SH "QScrollBar::QScrollBar ( int minValue, int maxValue, int lineStep, int pageStep, int value, Orientation orientation, TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )" +.SH "TQScrollBar::TQScrollBar ( int minValue, int maxValue, int lineStep, int pageStep, int value, Orientation orientation, TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )" Constructs a scroll bar whose value can never be smaller than \fIminValue\fR or greater than \fImaxValue\fR, whose line step size is \fIlineStep\fR and page step size is \fIpageStep\fR and whose value is initially \fIvalue\fR (which is guaranteed to be in range using bound()). .PP If \fIorientation\fR is Vertical the scroll bar is vertical and if it is Horizontal the scroll bar is horizontal. .PP The \fIparent\fR and \fIname\fR arguments are sent on to the TQWidget constructor. -.SH "QScrollBar::~QScrollBar ()" +.SH "TQScrollBar::~TQScrollBar ()" Destructor. -.SH "bool QScrollBar::draggingSlider () const" +.SH "bool TQScrollBar::draggingSlider () const" Returns TRUE if the user has clicked the mouse on the slider and is currently dragging it; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "draggingSlider" property for details. -.SH "void QScrollBar::hideEvent ( QHideEvent * )\fC [virtual protected]\fR" +.SH "void TQScrollBar::hideEvent ( QHideEvent * )\fC [virtual protected]\fR" This function is called when the scrollbar is hidden. .PP Reimplemented from TQWidget. -.SH "int QScrollBar::lineStep () const" +.SH "int TQScrollBar::lineStep () const" Returns the line step. See the "lineStep" property for details. -.SH "int QScrollBar::maxValue () const" +.SH "int TQScrollBar::maxValue () const" Returns the scroll bar's maximum value. See the "maxValue" property for details. -.SH "int QScrollBar::minValue () const" +.SH "int TQScrollBar::minValue () const" Returns the scroll bar's minimum value. See the "minValue" property for details. -.SH "void QScrollBar::nextLine ()\fC [signal]\fR" +.SH "void TQScrollBar::nextLine ()\fC [signal]\fR" This signal is emitted when the scroll bar scrolls one line down or right. -.SH "void QScrollBar::nextPage ()\fC [signal]\fR" +.SH "void TQScrollBar::nextPage ()\fC [signal]\fR" This signal is emitted when the scroll bar scrolls one page down or right. -.SH "Orientation QScrollBar::orientation () const" +.SH "Orientation TQScrollBar::orientation () const" Returns the orientation of the scroll bar. See the "orientation" property for details. -.SH "int QScrollBar::pageStep () const" +.SH "int TQScrollBar::pageStep () const" Returns the page step. See the "pageStep" property for details. -.SH "void QScrollBar::prevLine ()\fC [signal]\fR" +.SH "void TQScrollBar::prevLine ()\fC [signal]\fR" This signal is emitted when the scroll bar scrolls one line up or left. -.SH "void QScrollBar::prevPage ()\fC [signal]\fR" +.SH "void TQScrollBar::prevPage ()\fC [signal]\fR" This signal is emitted when the scroll bar scrolls one page up or left. -.SH "void QScrollBar::setLineStep ( int )" +.SH "void TQScrollBar::setLineStep ( int )" Sets the line step. See the "lineStep" property for details. -.SH "void QScrollBar::setMaxValue ( int )" +.SH "void TQScrollBar::setMaxValue ( int )" Sets the scroll bar's maximum value. See the "maxValue" property for details. -.SH "void QScrollBar::setMinValue ( int )" +.SH "void TQScrollBar::setMinValue ( int )" Sets the scroll bar's minimum value. See the "minValue" property for details. -.SH "void QScrollBar::setOrientation ( Orientation )\fC [virtual]\fR" +.SH "void TQScrollBar::setOrientation ( Orientation )\fC [virtual]\fR" Sets the orientation of the scroll bar. See the "orientation" property for details. -.SH "void QScrollBar::setPageStep ( int )" +.SH "void TQScrollBar::setPageStep ( int )" Sets the page step. See the "pageStep" property for details. -.SH "void QScrollBar::setPalette ( const TQPalette & p )\fC [virtual]\fR" +.SH "void TQScrollBar::setPalette ( const TQPalette & p )\fC [virtual]\fR" Reimplements the virtual function TQWidget::setPalette(). .PP Sets the background color to the mid color for Motif style scroll bars using palette \fIp\fR. .PP Reimplemented from TQWidget. -.SH "void QScrollBar::setTracking ( bool enable )\fC [virtual]\fR" +.SH "void TQScrollBar::setTracking ( bool enable )\fC [virtual]\fR" Sets whether scroll bar tracking is enabled to \fIenable\fR. See the "tracking" property for details. -.SH "void QScrollBar::setValue ( int )\fC [slot]\fR" +.SH "void TQScrollBar::setValue ( int )\fC [slot]\fR" Sets the scroll bar's value. See the "value" property for details. -.SH "void QScrollBar::sliderMoved ( int value )\fC [signal]\fR" +.SH "void TQScrollBar::sliderMoved ( int value )\fC [signal]\fR" This signal is emitted when the slider is dragged by the user, with the new scroll bar \fIvalue\fR as an argument. .PP This signal is emitted even when tracking is turned off. .PP See also tracking, valueChanged(), nextLine(), prevLine(), nextPage(), and prevPage(). -.SH "void QScrollBar::sliderPressed ()\fC [signal]\fR" +.SH "void TQScrollBar::sliderPressed ()\fC [signal]\fR" This signal is emitted when the user presses the slider with the mouse. -.SH "TQRect QScrollBar::sliderRect () const" +.SH "TQRect TQScrollBar::sliderRect () const" Returns the scroll bar slider rectangle. .PP See also sliderStart(). -.SH "void QScrollBar::sliderReleased ()\fC [signal]\fR" +.SH "void TQScrollBar::sliderReleased ()\fC [signal]\fR" This signal is emitted when the user releases the slider with the mouse. -.SH "int QScrollBar::sliderStart () const" +.SH "int TQScrollBar::sliderStart () const" Returns the pixel position where the scroll bar slider starts. .PP This is equivalent to sliderRect().y() for vertical scroll bars or sliderRect().x() for horizontal scroll bars. -.SH "bool QScrollBar::tracking () const" +.SH "bool TQScrollBar::tracking () const" Returns TRUE if scroll bar tracking is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "tracking" property for details. -.SH "int QScrollBar::value () const" +.SH "int TQScrollBar::value () const" Returns the scroll bar's value. See the "value" property for details. -.SH "void QScrollBar::valueChanged ( int value )\fC [signal]\fR" +.SH "void TQScrollBar::valueChanged ( int value )\fC [signal]\fR" This signal is emitted when the scroll bar value has changed, with the new scroll bar \fIvalue\fR as an argument. .SS "Property Documentation" .SH "bool draggingSlider" @@ -294,7 +294,7 @@ Set this property's value with setLineStep() and get this property's value with .SH "int maxValue" This property holds the scroll bar's maximum value. .PP -When setting this property, the QScrollBar::minValue is adjusted if necessary to ensure that the range remains valid. +When setting this property, the TQScrollBar::minValue is adjusted if necessary to ensure that the range remains valid. .PP See also setRange(). .PP @@ -302,7 +302,7 @@ Set this property's value with setMaxValue() and get this property's value with .SH "int minValue" This property holds the scroll bar's minimum value. .PP -When setting this property, the QScrollBar::maxValue is adjusted if necessary to ensure that the range remains valid. +When setting this property, the TQScrollBar::maxValue is adjusted if necessary to ensure that the range remains valid. .PP See also setRange(). .PP @@ -335,7 +335,7 @@ Set this property's value with setValue() and get this property's value with val See also QRangeControl::value() and prevValue(). .SH "SEE ALSO" -.BR http://doc.trolltech.com/ntqscrollbar.html +.BR http://doc.trolltech.com/tqscrollbar.html .BR http://www.trolltech.com/faq/tech.html .SH COPYRIGHT Copyright 1992-2007 Trolltech ASA, http://www.trolltech.com. See the diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqscrollview.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqscrollview.3qt index 9841ac033..b1f1f07e1 100644 --- a/doc/man/man3/tqscrollview.3qt +++ b/doc/man/man3/tqscrollview.3qt @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ '\" t -.TH QScrollView 3qt "2 February 2007" "Trolltech AS" \" -*- nroff -*- +.TH TQScrollView 3qt "2 February 2007" "Trolltech AS" \" -*- nroff -*- .\" Copyright 1992-2007 Trolltech ASA. All rights reserved. See the .\" license file included in the distribution for a complete license .\" statement. @@ -7,9 +7,9 @@ .ad l .nh .SH NAME -QScrollView \- Scrolling area with on-demand scroll bars +TQScrollView \- Scrolling area with on-demand scroll bars .SH SYNOPSIS -\fC#include <ntqscrollview.h>\fR +\fC#include <tqscrollview.h>\fR .PP Inherits QFrame. .PP @@ -18,10 +18,10 @@ Inherited by TQCanvasView, QTable, QGridView, TQIconView, QListBox, QListView, a .SS "Public Members" .in +1c .ti -1c -.BI "\fBQScrollView\fR ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )" +.BI "\fBTQScrollView\fR ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )" .br .ti -1c -.BI "\fB~QScrollView\fR ()" +.BI "\fB~TQScrollView\fR ()" .br .ti -1c .BI "enum \fBResizePolicy\fR { Default, Manual, AutoOne, AutoOneFit }" @@ -75,10 +75,10 @@ Inherited by TQCanvasView, QTable, QGridView, TQIconView, QListBox, QListView, a .BI "virtual void \fBsetCornerWidget\fR ( TQWidget * corner )" .br .ti -1c -.BI "QScrollBar * \fBhorizontalScrollBar\fR () const" +.BI "TQScrollBar * \fBhorizontalScrollBar\fR () const" .br .ti -1c -.BI "QScrollBar * \fBverticalScrollBar\fR () const" +.BI "TQScrollBar * \fBverticalScrollBar\fR () const" .br .ti -1c .BI "TQWidget * \fBviewport\fR () const" @@ -297,23 +297,23 @@ Inherited by TQCanvasView, QTable, QGridView, TQIconView, QListBox, QListView, a .BI "int \fBbottomMargin\fR () const" .br .ti -1c -.BI "virtual void \fBsetHBarGeometry\fR ( QScrollBar & hbar, int x, int y, int w, int h )" +.BI "virtual void \fBsetHBarGeometry\fR ( TQScrollBar & hbar, int x, int y, int w, int h )" .br .ti -1c -.BI "virtual void \fBsetVBarGeometry\fR ( QScrollBar & vbar, int x, int y, int w, int h )" +.BI "virtual void \fBsetVBarGeometry\fR ( TQScrollBar & vbar, int x, int y, int w, int h )" .br .ti -1c .BI "virtual bool \fBeventFilter\fR ( TQObject * obj, TQEvent * e )" .br .in -1c .SH DESCRIPTION -The QScrollView widget provides a scrolling area with on-demand scroll bars. +The TQScrollView widget provides a scrolling area with on-demand scroll bars. .PP -The QScrollView is a large canvas - potentially larger than the coordinate system normally supported by the underlying window system. This is important because it is quite easy to go beyond these limitations (e.g. many web pages are more than 32000 pixels high). Additionally, the QScrollView can have TQWidgets positioned on it that scroll around with the drawn content. These sub-widgets can also have positions outside the normal coordinate range (but they are still limited in size). +The TQScrollView is a large canvas - potentially larger than the coordinate system normally supported by the underlying window system. This is important because it is quite easy to go beyond these limitations (e.g. many web pages are more than 32000 pixels high). Additionally, the TQScrollView can have TQWidgets positioned on it that scroll around with the drawn content. These sub-widgets can also have positions outside the normal coordinate range (but they are still limited in size). .PP -To provide content for the widget, inherit from QScrollView, reimplement drawContents() and use resizeContents() to set the size of the viewed area. Use addChild() and moveChild() to position widgets on the view. +To provide content for the widget, inherit from TQScrollView, reimplement drawContents() and use resizeContents() to set the size of the viewed area. Use addChild() and moveChild() to position widgets on the view. .PP -To use QScrollView effectively it is important to understand its widget structure in the three styles of use: a single large child widget, a large panning area with some widgets and a large panning area with many widgets. +To use TQScrollView effectively it is important to understand its widget structure in the three styles of use: a single large child widget, a large panning area with some widgets and a large panning area with many widgets. .SH "Using One Big Widget" <center> .ce 1 @@ -321,11 +321,11 @@ To use QScrollView effectively it is important to understand its widget structur .PP </center> .PP -The first, simplest usage of QScrollView (depicted above), is appropriate for scrolling areas that are never more than about 4000 pixels in either dimension (this is about the maximum reliable size on X11 servers). In this usage, you just make one large child in the QScrollView. The child should be a child of the viewport() of the scrollview and be added with addChild(): +The first, simplest usage of TQScrollView (depicted above), is appropriate for scrolling areas that are never more than about 4000 pixels in either dimension (this is about the maximum reliable size on X11 servers). In this usage, you just make one large child in the TQScrollView. The child should be a child of the viewport() of the scrollview and be added with addChild(): .PP .nf .br - QScrollView* sv = new QScrollView(...); + TQScrollView* sv = new TQScrollView(...); .br QVBox* big_box = new QVBox(sv->viewport()); .br @@ -346,7 +346,7 @@ You can go on to add arbitrary child widgets to the single child in the scrollvi .br .fi .PP -Here the QScrollView has four children: the viewport(), the verticalScrollBar(), the horizontalScrollBar() and a small cornerWidget(). The viewport() has one child: the big QVBox. The QVBox has the three TQLabel objects as child widgets. When the view is scrolled, the QVBox is moved; its children move with it as child widgets normally do. +Here the TQScrollView has four children: the viewport(), the verticalScrollBar(), the horizontalScrollBar() and a small cornerWidget(). The viewport() has one child: the big QVBox. The QVBox has the three TQLabel objects as child widgets. When the view is scrolled, the QVBox is moved; its children move with it as child widgets normally do. .SH "Using a Very Big View with Some Widgets" <center> .ce 1 @@ -354,11 +354,11 @@ Here the QScrollView has four children: the viewport(), the verticalScrollBar(), .PP </center> .PP -The second usage of QScrollView (depicted above) is appropriate when few, if any, widgets are on a very large scrolling area that is potentially larger than 4000 pixels in either dimension. In this usage you call resizeContents() to set the size of the area and reimplement drawContents() to paint the contents. You may also add some widgets by making them children of the viewport() and adding them with addChild() (this is the same as the process for the single large widget in the previous example): +The second usage of TQScrollView (depicted above) is appropriate when few, if any, widgets are on a very large scrolling area that is potentially larger than 4000 pixels in either dimension. In this usage you call resizeContents() to set the size of the area and reimplement drawContents() to paint the contents. You may also add some widgets by making them children of the viewport() and adding them with addChild() (this is the same as the process for the single large widget in the previous example): .PP .nf .br - QScrollView* sv = new QScrollView(...); + TQScrollView* sv = new TQScrollView(...); .br TQLabel* child1 = new TQLabel("CHILD", sv->viewport()); .br @@ -373,7 +373,7 @@ The second usage of QScrollView (depicted above) is appropriate when few, if any sv->addChild(child3); .br .fi -Here, the QScrollView has the same four children: the viewport(), the verticalScrollBar(), the horizontalScrollBar() and a small cornerWidget(). The viewport() has the three TQLabel objects as child widgets. When the view is scrolled, the scrollview moves the child widgets individually. +Here, the TQScrollView has the same four children: the viewport(), the verticalScrollBar(), the horizontalScrollBar() and a small cornerWidget(). The viewport() has the three TQLabel objects as child widgets. When the view is scrolled, the scrollview moves the child widgets individually. .SH "Using a Very Big View with Many Widgets" <center> .ce 1 @@ -381,11 +381,11 @@ Here, the QScrollView has the same four children: the viewport(), the verticalSc .PP </center> .PP -The final usage of QScrollView (depicted above) is appropriate when many widgets are on a very large scrolling area that is potentially larger than 4000 pixels in either dimension. In this usage you call resizeContents() to set the size of the area and reimplement drawContents() to paint the contents. You then call enableClipper(TRUE) and add widgets, again by making them children of the viewport(), and adding them with addChild(): +The final usage of TQScrollView (depicted above) is appropriate when many widgets are on a very large scrolling area that is potentially larger than 4000 pixels in either dimension. In this usage you call resizeContents() to set the size of the area and reimplement drawContents() to paint the contents. You then call enableClipper(TRUE) and add widgets, again by making them children of the viewport(), and adding them with addChild(): .PP .nf .br - QScrollView* sv = new QScrollView(...); + TQScrollView* sv = new TQScrollView(...); .br sv->enableClipper(TRUE); .br @@ -403,17 +403,17 @@ The final usage of QScrollView (depicted above) is appropriate when many widgets .br .fi .PP -Here, the QScrollView has four children: the clipper() (not the viewport() this time), the verticalScrollBar(), the horizontalScrollBar() and a small cornerWidget(). The clipper() has one child: the viewport(). The viewport() has the same three labels as child widgets. When the view is scrolled the viewport() is moved; its children move with it as child widgets normally do. +Here, the TQScrollView has four children: the clipper() (not the viewport() this time), the verticalScrollBar(), the horizontalScrollBar() and a small cornerWidget(). The clipper() has one child: the viewport(). The viewport() has the same three labels as child widgets. When the view is scrolled the viewport() is moved; its children move with it as child widgets normally do. .SH "Details Relevant for All Views" Normally you will use the first or third method if you want any child widgets in the view. .PP -Note that the widget you see in the scrolled area is the viewport() widget, not the QScrollView itself. So to turn mouse tracking on, for example, use viewport()->setMouseTracking(TRUE). +Note that the widget you see in the scrolled area is the viewport() widget, not the TQScrollView itself. So to turn mouse tracking on, for example, use viewport()->setMouseTracking(TRUE). .PP -To enable drag-and-drop, you would setAcceptDrops(TRUE) on the QScrollView (because drag-and-drop events propagate to the parent). But to work out the logical position in the view, you would need to map the drop co-ordinate from being relative to the QScrollView to being relative to the contents; use the function viewportToContents() for this. +To enable drag-and-drop, you would setAcceptDrops(TRUE) on the TQScrollView (because drag-and-drop events propagate to the parent). But to work out the logical position in the view, you would need to map the drop co-ordinate from being relative to the TQScrollView to being relative to the contents; use the function viewportToContents() for this. .PP -To handle mouse events on the scrolling area, subclass scrollview as you would subclass other widgets, but rather than reimplementing mousePressEvent(), reimplement contentsMousePressEvent() instead. The contents specific event handlers provide translated events in the coordinate system of the scrollview. If you reimplement mousePressEvent(), you'll get called only when part of the QScrollView is clicked: and the only such part is the "corner" (if you don't set a cornerWidget()) and the frame; everything else is covered up by the viewport, clipper or scroll bars. +To handle mouse events on the scrolling area, subclass scrollview as you would subclass other widgets, but rather than reimplementing mousePressEvent(), reimplement contentsMousePressEvent() instead. The contents specific event handlers provide translated events in the coordinate system of the scrollview. If you reimplement mousePressEvent(), you'll get called only when part of the TQScrollView is clicked: and the only such part is the "corner" (if you don't set a cornerWidget()) and the frame; everything else is covered up by the viewport, clipper or scroll bars. .PP -When you construct a QScrollView, some of the widget flags apply to the viewport() instead of being sent to the TQWidget constructor for the QScrollView. This applies to WNoAutoErase, WStaticContents, and WPaintClever. See TQt::WidgetFlags for documentation about these flags. Here are some examples: +When you construct a TQScrollView, some of the widget flags apply to the viewport() instead of being sent to the TQWidget constructor for the TQScrollView. This applies to WNoAutoErase, WStaticContents, and WPaintClever. See TQt::WidgetFlags for documentation about these flags. Here are some examples: .IP .TP An image-manipulation widget would use \fCWNoAutoErase|WStaticContents\fR because the widget draws all pixels itself, and when its size increases, it only needs a paint event for the new part because the old part remains unchanged. @@ -435,7 +435,7 @@ Coordinate conversion is provided by contentsToViewport() and viewportToContents .PP The contentsMoving() signal is emitted just before the contents are moved to a new position. .PP -\fBWarning:\fR QScrollView currently does not erase the background when resized, i.e. you must always clear the background manually in scrollview subclasses. This will change in a future version of TQt and we recommend specifying the WNoAutoErase flag explicitly. +\fBWarning:\fR TQScrollView currently does not erase the background when resized, i.e. you must always clear the background manually in scrollview subclasses. This will change in a future version of TQt and we recommend specifying the WNoAutoErase flag explicitly. .PP .ce 1 .B "[Image Omitted]" @@ -446,48 +446,48 @@ The contentsMoving() signal is emitted just before the contents are moved to a n .PP See also Abstract Widget Classes. .SS "Member Type Documentation" -.SH "QScrollView::ResizePolicy" -This enum type is used to control a QScrollView's reaction to resize events. +.SH "TQScrollView::ResizePolicy" +This enum type is used to control a TQScrollView's reaction to resize events. .TP -\fCQScrollView::Default\fR - the QScrollView selects one of the other settings automatically when it has to. In this version of Qt, QScrollView changes to Manual if you resize the contents with resizeContents() and to AutoOne if a child is added. +\fCTQScrollView::Default\fR - the TQScrollView selects one of the other settings automatically when it has to. In this version of TQt, TQScrollView changes to Manual if you resize the contents with resizeContents() and to AutoOne if a child is added. .TP -\fCQScrollView::Manual\fR - the contents stays the size set by resizeContents(). +\fCTQScrollView::Manual\fR - the contents stays the size set by resizeContents(). .TP -\fCQScrollView::AutoOne\fR - if there is only one child widget the contents stays the size of that widget. Otherwise the behavior is undefined. +\fCTQScrollView::AutoOne\fR - if there is only one child widget the contents stays the size of that widget. Otherwise the behavior is undefined. .TP -\fCQScrollView::AutoOneFit\fR - if there is only one child widget the contents stays the size of that widget's sizeHint(). If the scrollview is resized larger than the child's sizeHint(), the child will be resized to fit. If there is more than one child, the behavior is undefined. -.SH "QScrollView::ScrollBarMode" -This enum type describes the various modes of QScrollView's scroll bars. +\fCTQScrollView::AutoOneFit\fR - if there is only one child widget the contents stays the size of that widget's sizeHint(). If the scrollview is resized larger than the child's sizeHint(), the child will be resized to fit. If there is more than one child, the behavior is undefined. +.SH "TQScrollView::ScrollBarMode" +This enum type describes the various modes of TQScrollView's scroll bars. .TP -\fCQScrollView::Auto\fR - QScrollView shows a scroll bar when the content is too large to fit and not otherwise. This is the default. +\fCTQScrollView::Auto\fR - TQScrollView shows a scroll bar when the content is too large to fit and not otherwise. This is the default. .TP -\fCQScrollView::AlwaysOff\fR - QScrollView never shows a scroll bar. +\fCTQScrollView::AlwaysOff\fR - TQScrollView never shows a scroll bar. .TP -\fCQScrollView::AlwaysOn\fR - QScrollView always shows a scroll bar. +\fCTQScrollView::AlwaysOn\fR - TQScrollView always shows a scroll bar. .PP (The modes for the horizontal and vertical scroll bars are independent.) .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION -.SH "QScrollView::QScrollView ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )" -Constructs a QScrollView called \fIname\fR with parent \fIparent\fR and widget flags \fIf\fR. +.SH "TQScrollView::TQScrollView ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, WFlags f = 0 )" +Constructs a TQScrollView called \fIname\fR with parent \fIparent\fR and widget flags \fIf\fR. .PP The widget flags WStaticContents, WNoAutoErase and WPaintClever are propagated to the viewport() widget. The other widget flags are propagated to the parent constructor as usual. -.SH "QScrollView::~QScrollView ()" -Destroys the QScrollView. Any children added with addChild() will be deleted. -.SH "void QScrollView::addChild ( TQWidget * child, int x = 0, int y = 0 )\fC [virtual]\fR" +.SH "TQScrollView::~TQScrollView ()" +Destroys the TQScrollView. Any children added with addChild() will be deleted. +.SH "void TQScrollView::addChild ( TQWidget * child, int x = 0, int y = 0 )\fC [virtual]\fR" Inserts the widget, \fIchild\fR, into the scrolled area positioned at (\fIx\fR, \fIy\fR). The position defaults to (0, 0). If the child is already in the view, it is just moved. .PP You may want to call enableClipper(TRUE) if you add a large number of widgets. .PP Example: scrollview/scrollview.cpp. -.SH "int QScrollView::bottomMargin () const\fC [protected]\fR" +.SH "int TQScrollView::bottomMargin () const\fC [protected]\fR" Returns the bottom margin. .PP See also setMargins(). -.SH "void QScrollView::center ( int x, int y )\fC [slot]\fR" +.SH "void TQScrollView::center ( int x, int y )\fC [slot]\fR" Scrolls the content so that the point \fI(x, y)\fR is in the center of visible area. .PP Example: scrollview/scrollview.cpp. -.SH "void QScrollView::center ( int x, int y, float xmargin, float ymargin )\fC [slot]\fR" +.SH "void TQScrollView::center ( int x, int y, float xmargin, float ymargin )\fC [slot]\fR" This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. .PP Scrolls the content so that the point \fI(x, y)\fR is visible with the \fIxmargin\fR and \fIymargin\fR margins (as fractions of visible the area). @@ -499,97 +499,97 @@ Margin 0.0 allows (x, y) to be on the edge of the visible area. Margin 0.5 ensures that (x, y) is in middle 50% of the visible area. .TP Margin 1.0 ensures that (x, y) is in the center of the the visible area. -.SH "bool QScrollView::childIsVisible ( TQWidget * child )" +.SH "bool TQScrollView::childIsVisible ( TQWidget * child )" \fBThis function is obsolete.\fR It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code. .PP Returns TRUE if \fIchild\fR is visible. This is equivalent to child->isVisible(). -.SH "int QScrollView::childX ( TQWidget * child )" +.SH "int TQScrollView::childX ( TQWidget * child )" Returns the X position of the given \fIchild\fR widget. Use this rather than TQWidget::x() for widgets added to the view. .PP This function returns 0 if \fIchild\fR has not been added to the view. -.SH "int QScrollView::childY ( TQWidget * child )" +.SH "int TQScrollView::childY ( TQWidget * child )" Returns the Y position of the given \fIchild\fR widget. Use this rather than TQWidget::y() for widgets added to the view. .PP This function returns 0 if \fIchild\fR has not been added to the view. -.SH "TQWidget * QScrollView::clipper () const" +.SH "TQWidget * TQScrollView::clipper () const" Returns the clipper widget. Contents in the scrollview are ultimately clipped to be inside the clipper widget. .PP You should not need to use this function. .PP See also visibleWidth and visibleHeight. -.SH "void QScrollView::contentsContextMenuEvent ( QContextMenuEvent * e )\fC [virtual protected]\fR" -This event handler is called whenever the QScrollView receives a contextMenuEvent() in \fIe\fR: the mouse position is translated to be a point on the contents. +.SH "void TQScrollView::contentsContextMenuEvent ( QContextMenuEvent * e )\fC [virtual protected]\fR" +This event handler is called whenever the TQScrollView receives a contextMenuEvent() in \fIe\fR: the mouse position is translated to be a point on the contents. .PP Example: chart/canvasview.cpp. -.SH "void QScrollView::contentsDragEnterEvent ( TQDragEnterEvent * )\fC [virtual protected]\fR" -This event handler is called whenever the QScrollView receives a dragEnterEvent(): the drag position is translated to be a point on the contents. +.SH "void TQScrollView::contentsDragEnterEvent ( TQDragEnterEvent * )\fC [virtual protected]\fR" +This event handler is called whenever the TQScrollView receives a dragEnterEvent(): the drag position is translated to be a point on the contents. .PP Reimplemented in QTable. -.SH "void QScrollView::contentsDragLeaveEvent ( TQDragLeaveEvent * )\fC [virtual protected]\fR" -This event handler is called whenever the QScrollView receives a dragLeaveEvent(): the drag position is translated to be a point on the contents. +.SH "void TQScrollView::contentsDragLeaveEvent ( TQDragLeaveEvent * )\fC [virtual protected]\fR" +This event handler is called whenever the TQScrollView receives a dragLeaveEvent(): the drag position is translated to be a point on the contents. .PP Reimplemented in QTable. -.SH "void QScrollView::contentsDragMoveEvent ( TQDragMoveEvent * )\fC [virtual protected]\fR" -This event handler is called whenever the QScrollView receives a dragMoveEvent(): the drag position is translated to be a point on the contents. +.SH "void TQScrollView::contentsDragMoveEvent ( TQDragMoveEvent * )\fC [virtual protected]\fR" +This event handler is called whenever the TQScrollView receives a dragMoveEvent(): the drag position is translated to be a point on the contents. .PP Reimplemented in QTable. -.SH "void QScrollView::contentsDropEvent ( TQDropEvent * )\fC [virtual protected]\fR" -This event handler is called whenever the QScrollView receives a dropEvent(): the drop position is translated to be a point on the contents. +.SH "void TQScrollView::contentsDropEvent ( TQDropEvent * )\fC [virtual protected]\fR" +This event handler is called whenever the TQScrollView receives a dropEvent(): the drop position is translated to be a point on the contents. .PP Reimplemented in QTable. -.SH "int QScrollView::contentsHeight () const" +.SH "int TQScrollView::contentsHeight () const" Returns the height of the contents area. See the "contentsHeight" property for details. -.SH "void QScrollView::contentsMouseDoubleClickEvent ( QMouseEvent * e )\fC [virtual protected]\fR" -This event handler is called whenever the QScrollView receives a mouseDoubleClickEvent(): the click position in \fIe\fR is translated to be a point on the contents. +.SH "void TQScrollView::contentsMouseDoubleClickEvent ( QMouseEvent * e )\fC [virtual protected]\fR" +This event handler is called whenever the TQScrollView receives a mouseDoubleClickEvent(): the click position in \fIe\fR is translated to be a point on the contents. .PP The default implementation generates a normal mouse press event. .PP Reimplemented in QListView. -.SH "void QScrollView::contentsMouseMoveEvent ( QMouseEvent * e )\fC [virtual protected]\fR" -This event handler is called whenever the QScrollView receives a mouseMoveEvent(): the mouse position in \fIe\fR is translated to be a point on the contents. +.SH "void TQScrollView::contentsMouseMoveEvent ( QMouseEvent * e )\fC [virtual protected]\fR" +This event handler is called whenever the TQScrollView receives a mouseMoveEvent(): the mouse position in \fIe\fR is translated to be a point on the contents. .PP Examples: .)l canvas/canvas.cpp and chart/canvasview.cpp. .PP Reimplemented in QListView. -.SH "void QScrollView::contentsMousePressEvent ( QMouseEvent * e )\fC [virtual protected]\fR" -This event handler is called whenever the QScrollView receives a mousePressEvent(): the press position in \fIe\fR is translated to be a point on the contents. +.SH "void TQScrollView::contentsMousePressEvent ( QMouseEvent * e )\fC [virtual protected]\fR" +This event handler is called whenever the TQScrollView receives a mousePressEvent(): the press position in \fIe\fR is translated to be a point on the contents. .PP Examples: .)l canvas/canvas.cpp and chart/canvasview.cpp. .PP Reimplemented in QListView. -.SH "void QScrollView::contentsMouseReleaseEvent ( QMouseEvent * e )\fC [virtual protected]\fR" -This event handler is called whenever the QScrollView receives a mouseReleaseEvent(): the release position in \fIe\fR is translated to be a point on the contents. +.SH "void TQScrollView::contentsMouseReleaseEvent ( QMouseEvent * e )\fC [virtual protected]\fR" +This event handler is called whenever the TQScrollView receives a mouseReleaseEvent(): the release position in \fIe\fR is translated to be a point on the contents. .PP Reimplemented in QListView. -.SH "void QScrollView::contentsMoving ( int x, int y )\fC [signal]\fR" +.SH "void TQScrollView::contentsMoving ( int x, int y )\fC [signal]\fR" This signal is emitted just before the contents are moved to position \fI(x, y)\fR. .PP See also contentsX and contentsY. -.SH "void QScrollView::contentsToViewport ( int x, int y, int & vx, int & vy ) const" +.SH "void TQScrollView::contentsToViewport ( int x, int y, int & vx, int & vy ) const" Translates a point (\fIx\fR, \fIy\fR) in the contents to a point (\fIvx\fR, \fIvy\fR) on the viewport() widget. -.SH "TQPoint QScrollView::contentsToViewport ( const TQPoint & p ) const" +.SH "TQPoint TQScrollView::contentsToViewport ( const TQPoint & p ) const" This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. .PP Returns the point \fIp\fR translated to a point on the viewport() widget. -.SH "void QScrollView::contentsWheelEvent ( QWheelEvent * e )\fC [virtual protected]\fR" -This event handler is called whenever the QScrollView receives a wheelEvent() in \fIe\fR: the mouse position is translated to be a point on the contents. -.SH "int QScrollView::contentsWidth () const" +.SH "void TQScrollView::contentsWheelEvent ( QWheelEvent * e )\fC [virtual protected]\fR" +This event handler is called whenever the TQScrollView receives a wheelEvent() in \fIe\fR: the mouse position is translated to be a point on the contents. +.SH "int TQScrollView::contentsWidth () const" Returns the width of the contents area. See the "contentsWidth" property for details. -.SH "int QScrollView::contentsX () const" +.SH "int TQScrollView::contentsX () const" Returns the X coordinate of the contents that are at the left edge of the viewport. See the "contentsX" property for details. -.SH "int QScrollView::contentsY () const" +.SH "int TQScrollView::contentsY () const" Returns the Y coordinate of the contents that are at the top edge of the viewport. See the "contentsY" property for details. -.SH "TQWidget * QScrollView::cornerWidget () const" +.SH "TQWidget * TQScrollView::cornerWidget () const" Returns the widget in the corner between the two scroll bars. .PP By default, no corner widget is present. .PP Example: scrollview/scrollview.cpp. -.SH "bool QScrollView::dragAutoScroll () const" +.SH "bool TQScrollView::dragAutoScroll () const" Returns TRUE if autoscrolling in drag move events is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "dragAutoScroll" property for details. -.SH "void QScrollView::drawContents ( TQPainter * p, int clipx, int clipy, int clipw, int cliph )\fC [virtual protected]\fR" +.SH "void TQScrollView::drawContents ( TQPainter * p, int clipx, int clipy, int clipw, int cliph )\fC [virtual protected]\fR" Reimplement this function if you are viewing a drawing area rather than a widget. .PP The function should draw the rectangle (\fIclipx\fR, \fIclipy\fR, \fIclipw\fR, \fIcliph\fR) of the contents using painter \fIp\fR. The clip rectangle is in the scrollview's coordinates. @@ -636,13 +636,13 @@ The clip rectangle and translation of the painter \fIp\fR is already set appropr Example: tqdir/tqdir.cpp. .PP Reimplemented in TQCanvasView and QTable. -.SH "void QScrollView::drawContentsOffset ( TQPainter * p, int offsetx, int offsety, int clipx, int clipy, int clipw, int cliph )\fC [virtual protected]\fR" +.SH "void TQScrollView::drawContentsOffset ( TQPainter * p, int offsetx, int offsety, int clipx, int clipy, int clipw, int cliph )\fC [virtual protected]\fR" For backward-compatibility only. It is easier to use drawContents(TQPainter*,int,int,int,int). .PP The default implementation translates the painter appropriately and calls drawContents(TQPainter*,int,int,int,int). See drawContents() for an explanation of the parameters \fIp\fR, \fIoffsetx\fR, \fIoffsety\fR, \fIclipx\fR, \fIclipy\fR, \fIclipw\fR and \fIcliph\fR. .PP Reimplemented in QListView. -.SH "void QScrollView::enableClipper ( bool y )" +.SH "void TQScrollView::enableClipper ( bool y )" When a large numbers of child widgets are in a scrollview, especially if they are close together, the scrolling performance can suffer greatly. If \fIy\fR is TRUE the scrollview will use an extra widget to group child widgets. .PP Note that you may only call enableClipper() prior to adding widgets. @@ -650,73 +650,73 @@ Note that you may only call enableClipper() prior to adding widgets. For a full discussion, see this class's detailed description. .PP Example: scrollview/scrollview.cpp. -.SH "void QScrollView::ensureVisible ( int x, int y )\fC [slot]\fR" +.SH "void TQScrollView::ensureVisible ( int x, int y )\fC [slot]\fR" Scrolls the content so that the point \fI(x, y)\fR is visible with at least 50-pixel margins (if possible, otherwise centered). -.SH "void QScrollView::ensureVisible ( int x, int y, int xmargin, int ymargin )\fC [slot]\fR" +.SH "void TQScrollView::ensureVisible ( int x, int y, int xmargin, int ymargin )\fC [slot]\fR" This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. .PP Scrolls the content so that the point \fI(x, y)\fR is visible with at least the \fIxmargin\fR and \fIymargin\fR margins (if possible, otherwise centered). -.SH "bool QScrollView::eventFilter ( TQObject * obj, TQEvent * e )\fC [virtual protected]\fR" -This event filter ensures the scroll bars are updated when a single contents widget is resized, shown, hidden or destroyed; it passes mouse events to the QScrollView. The event is in \fIe\fR and the object is in \fIobj\fR. +.SH "bool TQScrollView::eventFilter ( TQObject * obj, TQEvent * e )\fC [virtual protected]\fR" +This event filter ensures the scroll bars are updated when a single contents widget is resized, shown, hidden or destroyed; it passes mouse events to the TQScrollView. The event is in \fIe\fR and the object is in \fIobj\fR. .PP Reimplemented from TQObject. .PP Reimplemented in QListView. -.SH "ScrollBarMode QScrollView::hScrollBarMode () const" +.SH "ScrollBarMode TQScrollView::hScrollBarMode () const" Returns the mode for the horizontal scroll bar. See the "hScrollBarMode" property for details. -.SH "bool QScrollView::hasStaticBackground () const" -Returns TRUE if QScrollView uses a static background; otherwise returns FALSE. +.SH "bool TQScrollView::hasStaticBackground () const" +Returns TRUE if TQScrollView uses a static background; otherwise returns FALSE. .PP See also setStaticBackground(). -.SH "QScrollBar * QScrollView::horizontalScrollBar () const" +.SH "TQScrollBar * TQScrollView::horizontalScrollBar () const" Returns the component horizontal scroll bar. It is made available to allow accelerators, autoscrolling, etc. .PP It should not be used for other purposes. .PP This function never returns 0. -.SH "void QScrollView::horizontalSliderPressed ()\fC [signal]\fR" +.SH "void TQScrollView::horizontalSliderPressed ()\fC [signal]\fR" This signal is emitted whenever the user presses the horizontal slider. -.SH "void QScrollView::horizontalSliderReleased ()\fC [signal]\fR" +.SH "void TQScrollView::horizontalSliderReleased ()\fC [signal]\fR" This signal is emitted whenever the user releases the horizontal slider. -.SH "bool QScrollView::isHorizontalSliderPressed ()" +.SH "bool TQScrollView::isHorizontalSliderPressed ()" Returns TRUE if horizontal slider is pressed by user; otherwise returns FALSE. -.SH "bool QScrollView::isVerticalSliderPressed ()" +.SH "bool TQScrollView::isVerticalSliderPressed ()" Returns TRUE if vertical slider is pressed by user; otherwise returns FALSE. -.SH "int QScrollView::leftMargin () const\fC [protected]\fR" +.SH "int TQScrollView::leftMargin () const\fC [protected]\fR" Returns the left margin. .PP See also setMargins(). -.SH "void QScrollView::moveChild ( TQWidget * child, int x, int y )\fC [virtual]\fR" +.SH "void TQScrollView::moveChild ( TQWidget * child, int x, int y )\fC [virtual]\fR" Repositions the \fIchild\fR widget to (\fIx\fR, \fIy\fR). This function is the same as addChild(). -.SH "void QScrollView::removeChild ( TQWidget * child )" +.SH "void TQScrollView::removeChild ( TQWidget * child )" Removes the \fIchild\fR widget from the scrolled area. Note that this happens automatically if the \fIchild\fR is deleted. -.SH "void QScrollView::repaintContents ( int x, int y, int w, int h, bool erase = TRUE )" +.SH "void TQScrollView::repaintContents ( int x, int y, int w, int h, bool erase = TRUE )" Calls repaint() on a rectangle defined by \fIx\fR, \fIy\fR, \fIw\fR, \fIh\fR, translated appropriately. If the rectangle is not visible, nothing is repainted. If \fIerase\fR is TRUE the background is cleared using the background color. .PP See also updateContents(). -.SH "void QScrollView::repaintContents ( const TQRect & r, bool erase = TRUE )" +.SH "void TQScrollView::repaintContents ( const TQRect & r, bool erase = TRUE )" This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. .PP Repaints the contents of rectangle \fIr\fR. If \fIerase\fR is TRUE the background is cleared using the background color. -.SH "void QScrollView::repaintContents ( bool erase = TRUE )" +.SH "void TQScrollView::repaintContents ( bool erase = TRUE )" This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. .PP Repaints the contents. If \fIerase\fR is TRUE the background is cleared using the background color. -.SH "void QScrollView::resizeContents ( int w, int h )\fC [virtual slot]\fR" +.SH "void TQScrollView::resizeContents ( int w, int h )\fC [virtual slot]\fR" Sets the size of the contents area to \fIw\fR pixels wide and \fIh\fR pixels high and updates the viewport accordingly. -.SH "ResizePolicy QScrollView::resizePolicy () const" +.SH "ResizePolicy TQScrollView::resizePolicy () const" Returns the resize policy. See the "resizePolicy" property for details. -.SH "int QScrollView::rightMargin () const\fC [protected]\fR" +.SH "int TQScrollView::rightMargin () const\fC [protected]\fR" Returns the right margin. .PP See also setMargins(). -.SH "void QScrollView::scrollBy ( int dx, int dy )\fC [slot]\fR" +.SH "void TQScrollView::scrollBy ( int dx, int dy )\fC [slot]\fR" Scrolls the content by \fIdx\fR to the left and \fIdy\fR upwards. -.SH "void QScrollView::setContentsPos ( int x, int y )\fC [virtual slot]\fR" +.SH "void TQScrollView::setContentsPos ( int x, int y )\fC [virtual slot]\fR" Scrolls the content so that the point \fI(x, y)\fR is in the top-left corner. .PP Example: process/process.cpp. -.SH "void QScrollView::setCornerWidget ( TQWidget * corner )\fC [virtual]\fR" +.SH "void TQScrollView::setCornerWidget ( TQWidget * corner )\fC [virtual]\fR" Sets the widget in the \fIcorner\fR between the two scroll bars. .PP You will probably also want to set at least one of the scroll bar modes to AlwaysOn. @@ -727,7 +727,7 @@ Any previous \fIcorner\fR widget is hidden. .PP You may call setCornerWidget() with the same widget at different times. .PP -All widgets set here will be deleted by the QScrollView when it is destroyed unless you separately reparent the widget after setting some other corner widget (or 0). +All widgets set here will be deleted by the TQScrollView when it is destroyed unless you separately reparent the widget after setting some other corner widget (or 0). .PP Any \fInewly\fR set widget should have no current parent. .PP @@ -736,98 +736,98 @@ By default, no corner widget is present. See also vScrollBarMode and hScrollBarMode. .PP Example: scrollview/scrollview.cpp. -.SH "void QScrollView::setDragAutoScroll ( bool b )\fC [virtual]\fR" +.SH "void TQScrollView::setDragAutoScroll ( bool b )\fC [virtual]\fR" Sets whether autoscrolling in drag move events is enabled to \fIb\fR. See the "dragAutoScroll" property for details. -.SH "void QScrollView::setHBarGeometry ( QScrollBar & hbar, int x, int y, int w, int h )\fC [virtual protected]\fR" +.SH "void TQScrollView::setHBarGeometry ( TQScrollBar & hbar, int x, int y, int w, int h )\fC [virtual protected]\fR" Called when the horizontal scroll bar geometry changes. This is provided as a protected function so that subclasses can do interesting things such as providing extra buttons in some of the space normally used by the scroll bars. .PP The default implementation simply gives all the space to \fIhbar\fR. The new geometry is given by \fIx\fR, \fIy\fR, \fIw\fR and \fIh\fR. .PP See also setVBarGeometry(). -.SH "void QScrollView::setHScrollBarMode ( ScrollBarMode )\fC [virtual]\fR" +.SH "void TQScrollView::setHScrollBarMode ( ScrollBarMode )\fC [virtual]\fR" Sets the mode for the horizontal scroll bar. See the "hScrollBarMode" property for details. -.SH "void QScrollView::setMargins ( int left, int top, int right, int bottom )\fC [virtual protected]\fR" +.SH "void TQScrollView::setMargins ( int left, int top, int right, int bottom )\fC [virtual protected]\fR" Sets the margins around the scrolling area to \fIleft\fR, \fItop\fR, \fIright\fR and \fIbottom\fR. This is useful for applications such as spreadsheets with "locked" rows and columns. The marginal space is \fIinside\fR the frameRect() and is left blank; reimplement drawFrame() or put widgets in the unused area. .PP By default all margins are zero. .PP See also frameChanged(). -.SH "void QScrollView::setResizePolicy ( ResizePolicy )\fC [virtual]\fR" +.SH "void TQScrollView::setResizePolicy ( ResizePolicy )\fC [virtual]\fR" Sets the resize policy. See the "resizePolicy" property for details. -.SH "void QScrollView::setStaticBackground ( bool y )" +.SH "void TQScrollView::setStaticBackground ( bool y )" Sets the scrollview to have a static background if \fIy\fR is TRUE, or a scrolling background if \fIy\fR is FALSE. By default, the background is scrolling. .PP Be aware that this mode is quite slow, as a full repaint of the visible area has to be triggered on every contents move. .PP See also hasStaticBackground(). -.SH "void QScrollView::setVBarGeometry ( QScrollBar & vbar, int x, int y, int w, int h )\fC [virtual protected]\fR" +.SH "void TQScrollView::setVBarGeometry ( TQScrollBar & vbar, int x, int y, int w, int h )\fC [virtual protected]\fR" Called when the vertical scroll bar geometry changes. This is provided as a protected function so that subclasses can do interesting things such as providing extra buttons in some of the space normally used by the scroll bars. .PP The default implementation simply gives all the space to \fIvbar\fR. The new geometry is given by \fIx\fR, \fIy\fR, \fIw\fR and \fIh\fR. .PP See also setHBarGeometry(). -.SH "void QScrollView::setVScrollBarMode ( ScrollBarMode )\fC [virtual]\fR" +.SH "void TQScrollView::setVScrollBarMode ( ScrollBarMode )\fC [virtual]\fR" Sets the mode for the vertical scroll bar. See the "vScrollBarMode" property for details. -.SH "void QScrollView::showChild ( TQWidget * child, bool y = TRUE )" +.SH "void TQScrollView::showChild ( TQWidget * child, bool y = TRUE )" \fBThis function is obsolete.\fR It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code. .PP Sets the visibility of \fIchild\fR. Equivalent to TQWidget::show() or TQWidget::hide(). -.SH "int QScrollView::topMargin () const\fC [protected]\fR" +.SH "int TQScrollView::topMargin () const\fC [protected]\fR" Returns the top margin. .PP See also setMargins(). -.SH "void QScrollView::updateContents ( int x, int y, int w, int h )" +.SH "void TQScrollView::updateContents ( int x, int y, int w, int h )" Calls update() on a rectangle defined by \fIx\fR, \fIy\fR, \fIw\fR, \fIh\fR, translated appropriately. If the rectangle is not visible, nothing is repainted. .PP See also repaintContents(). -.SH "void QScrollView::updateContents ( const TQRect & r )" +.SH "void TQScrollView::updateContents ( const TQRect & r )" This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. .PP Updates the contents in rectangle \fIr\fR -.SH "void QScrollView::updateContents ()" +.SH "void TQScrollView::updateContents ()" This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. -.SH "void QScrollView::updateScrollBars ()\fC [slot]\fR" +.SH "void TQScrollView::updateScrollBars ()\fC [slot]\fR" Updates scroll bars: all possibilities are considered. You should never need to call this in your code. -.SH "ScrollBarMode QScrollView::vScrollBarMode () const" +.SH "ScrollBarMode TQScrollView::vScrollBarMode () const" Returns the mode for the vertical scroll bar. See the "vScrollBarMode" property for details. -.SH "QScrollBar * QScrollView::verticalScrollBar () const" +.SH "TQScrollBar * TQScrollView::verticalScrollBar () const" Returns the component vertical scroll bar. It is made available to allow accelerators, autoscrolling, etc. .PP It should not be used for other purposes. .PP This function never returns 0. -.SH "void QScrollView::verticalSliderPressed ()\fC [signal]\fR" +.SH "void TQScrollView::verticalSliderPressed ()\fC [signal]\fR" This signal is emitted whenever the user presses the vertical slider. -.SH "void QScrollView::verticalSliderReleased ()\fC [signal]\fR" +.SH "void TQScrollView::verticalSliderReleased ()\fC [signal]\fR" This signal is emitted whenever the user releases the vertical slider. -.SH "TQWidget * QScrollView::viewport () const" +.SH "TQWidget * TQScrollView::viewport () const" Returns the viewport widget of the scrollview. This is the widget containing the contents widget or which is the drawing area. .PP Examples: .)l helpsystem/tooltip.cpp and scrollview/scrollview.cpp. -.SH "void QScrollView::viewportPaintEvent ( TQPaintEvent * pe )\fC [virtual protected]\fR" +.SH "void TQScrollView::viewportPaintEvent ( TQPaintEvent * pe )\fC [virtual protected]\fR" This is a low-level painting routine that draws the viewport contents. Reimplement this if drawContents() is too high-level (for example, if you don't want to open a TQPainter on the viewport). The paint event is passed in \fIpe\fR. -.SH "void QScrollView::viewportResizeEvent ( QResizeEvent * )\fC [virtual protected]\fR" +.SH "void TQScrollView::viewportResizeEvent ( QResizeEvent * )\fC [virtual protected]\fR" To provide simple processing of events on the contents, this function receives all resize events sent to the viewport. .PP See also TQWidget::resizeEvent(). .PP Example: chart/canvasview.cpp. -.SH "TQSize QScrollView::viewportSize ( int x, int y ) const" +.SH "TQSize TQScrollView::viewportSize ( int x, int y ) const" Returns the viewport size for size (\fIx\fR, \fIy\fR). .PP The viewport size depends on \fI(x, y)\fR (the size of the contents), the size of this widget and the modes of the horizontal and vertical scroll bars. .PP This function permits widgets that can trade vertical and horizontal space for each other to control scroll bar appearance better. For example, a word processor or web browser can control the width of the right margin accurately, whether or not there needs to be a vertical scroll bar. -.SH "void QScrollView::viewportToContents ( int vx, int vy, int & x, int & y ) const" +.SH "void TQScrollView::viewportToContents ( int vx, int vy, int & x, int & y ) const" Translates a point (\fIvx\fR, \fIvy\fR) on the viewport() widget to a point (\fIx\fR, \fIy\fR) in the contents. -.SH "TQPoint QScrollView::viewportToContents ( const TQPoint & vp ) const" +.SH "TQPoint TQScrollView::viewportToContents ( const TQPoint & vp ) const" This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. .PP Returns the point on the viewport \fIvp\fR translated to a point in the contents. -.SH "int QScrollView::visibleHeight () const" +.SH "int TQScrollView::visibleHeight () const" Returns the vertical amount of the content that is visible. See the "visibleHeight" property for details. -.SH "int QScrollView::visibleWidth () const" +.SH "int TQScrollView::visibleWidth () const" Returns the horizontal amount of the content that is visible. See the "visibleWidth" property for details. .SS "Property Documentation" .SH "int contentsHeight" @@ -849,15 +849,15 @@ Get this property's value with contentsY(). .SH "bool dragAutoScroll" This property holds whether autoscrolling in drag move events is enabled. .PP -If this property is set to TRUE (the default), the QScrollView automatically scrolls the contents in drag move events if the user moves the cursor close to a border of the view. Of course this works only if the viewport accepts drops. Specifying FALSE disables this autoscroll feature. +If this property is set to TRUE (the default), the TQScrollView automatically scrolls the contents in drag move events if the user moves the cursor close to a border of the view. Of course this works only if the viewport accepts drops. Specifying FALSE disables this autoscroll feature. .PP -\fBWarning:\fR Enabling this property might not be enough to effectively turn on autoscrolling. If you put a custom widget in the QScrollView, you might need to call TQDragEvent::ignore() on the event in the dragEnterEvent() and dragMoveEvent() reimplementations. +\fBWarning:\fR Enabling this property might not be enough to effectively turn on autoscrolling. If you put a custom widget in the TQScrollView, you might need to call TQDragEvent::ignore() on the event in the dragEnterEvent() and dragMoveEvent() reimplementations. .PP Set this property's value with setDragAutoScroll() and get this property's value with dragAutoScroll(). .SH "ScrollBarMode hScrollBarMode" This property holds the mode for the horizontal scroll bar. .PP -The default mode is QScrollView::Auto. +The default mode is TQScrollView::Auto. .PP See also vScrollBarMode. .PP @@ -873,7 +873,7 @@ Set this property's value with setResizePolicy() and get this property's value w .SH "ScrollBarMode vScrollBarMode" This property holds the mode for the vertical scroll bar. .PP -The default mode is QScrollView::Auto. +The default mode is TQScrollView::Auto. .PP See also hScrollBarMode. .PP @@ -888,7 +888,7 @@ This property holds the horizontal amount of the content that is visible. Get this property's value with visibleWidth(). .SH "SEE ALSO" -.BR http://doc.trolltech.com/ntqscrollview.html +.BR http://doc.trolltech.com/tqscrollview.html .BR http://www.trolltech.com/faq/tech.html .SH COPYRIGHT Copyright 1992-2007 Trolltech ASA, http://www.trolltech.com. See the diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqslider.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqslider.3qt index a6382be60..adbdcbab2 100644 --- a/doc/man/man3/tqslider.3qt +++ b/doc/man/man3/tqslider.3qt @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ '\" t -.TH QSlider 3qt "2 February 2007" "Trolltech AS" \" -*- nroff -*- +.TH TQSlider 3qt "2 February 2007" "Trolltech AS" \" -*- nroff -*- .\" Copyright 1992-2007 Trolltech ASA. All rights reserved. See the .\" license file included in the distribution for a complete license .\" statement. @@ -7,9 +7,9 @@ .ad l .nh .SH NAME -QSlider \- Vertical or horizontal slider +TQSlider \- Vertical or horizontal slider .SH SYNOPSIS -\fC#include <ntqslider.h>\fR +\fC#include <tqslider.h>\fR .PP Inherits TQWidget and QRangeControl. .PP @@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ Inherits TQWidget and QRangeControl. .BI "\fBQSlider\fR ( int minValue, int maxValue, int pageStep, int value, Orientation orientation, TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )" .br .ti -1c -.BI "\fB~QSlider\fR ()" +.BI "\fB~TQSlider\fR ()" .br .ti -1c .BI "virtual void \fBsetOrientation\fR ( Orientation )" @@ -164,11 +164,11 @@ Inherits TQWidget and QRangeControl. .br .in -1c .SH DESCRIPTION -The QSlider widget provides a vertical or horizontal slider. +The TQSlider widget provides a vertical or horizontal slider. .PP The slider is the classic widget for controlling a bounded value. It lets the user move a slider along a horizontal or vertical groove and translates the slider's position into an integer value within the legal range. .PP -QSlider inherits QRangeControl, which provides the "integer" side of the slider. setRange() and value() are likely to be used by practically all slider users; see the QRangeControl documentation for information about the many other functions that class provides. +TQSlider inherits QRangeControl, which provides the "integer" side of the slider. setRange() and value() are likely to be used by practically all slider users; see the QRangeControl documentation for information about the many other functions that class provides. .PP The main functions offered by the slider itself are tickmark and orientation control; you can use setTickmarks() to indicate where you want the tickmarks to be, setTickInterval() to indicate how many of them you want and setOrientation() to indicate whether the slider is to be horizontal or vertical. .PP @@ -181,9 +181,9 @@ A slider accepts focus on Tab and uses the mouse wheel and a suitable keyboard i .ce 1 .B "[Image Omitted]" .PP -See also QScrollBar, QSpinBox, GUI Design Handbook: Slider, and Basic Widgets. +See also TQScrollBar, TQSpinBox, GUI Design Handbook: Slider, and Basic Widgets. .SS "Member Type Documentation" -.SH "QSlider::TickSetting" +.SH "TQSlider::TickSetting" This enum specifies where the tickmarks are to be drawn relative to the slider's groove and the handle the user moves. .TP \fCQSlider::NoMarks\fR - do not draw any tickmarks. @@ -198,51 +198,51 @@ This enum specifies where the tickmarks are to be drawn relative to the slider's .TP \fCQSlider::Right\fR - draw tickmarks to the right of the (vertical) slider .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION -.SH "QSlider::QSlider ( TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )" +.SH "TQSlider::TQSlider ( TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )" Constructs a vertical slider. .PP The \fIparent\fR and \fIname\fR arguments are sent on to the TQWidget constructor. -.SH "QSlider::QSlider ( Orientation orientation, TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )" +.SH "TQSlider::TQSlider ( Orientation orientation, TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )" Constructs a slider. .PP The \fIorientation\fR must be TQt::Vertical or TQt::Horizontal. .PP The \fIparent\fR and \fIname\fR arguments are sent on to the TQWidget constructor. -.SH "QSlider::QSlider ( int minValue, int maxValue, int pageStep, int value, Orientation orientation, TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )" +.SH "TQSlider::TQSlider ( int minValue, int maxValue, int pageStep, int value, Orientation orientation, TQWidget * parent, const char * name = 0 )" Constructs a slider whose value can never be smaller than \fIminValue\fR or greater than \fImaxValue\fR, whose page step size is \fIpageStep\fR and whose value is initially \fIvalue\fR (which is guaranteed to be in range using bound()). .PP If \fIorientation\fR is TQt::Vertical the slider is vertical and if it is TQt::Horizontal the slider is horizontal. .PP The \fIparent\fR and \fIname\fR arguments are sent on to the TQWidget constructor. -.SH "QSlider::~QSlider ()" +.SH "TQSlider::~TQSlider ()" Destructor. -.SH "void QSlider::addStep ()\fC [slot]\fR" +.SH "void TQSlider::addStep ()\fC [slot]\fR" Moves the slider one pageStep() up or right. -.SH "int QSlider::lineStep () const" +.SH "int TQSlider::lineStep () const" Returns the current line step. See the "lineStep" property for details. -.SH "int QSlider::maxValue () const" +.SH "int TQSlider::maxValue () const" Returns the current maximum value of the slider. See the "maxValue" property for details. -.SH "int QSlider::minValue () const" +.SH "int TQSlider::minValue () const" Returns the current minimum value of the slider. See the "minValue" property for details. -.SH "Orientation QSlider::orientation () const" +.SH "Orientation TQSlider::orientation () const" Returns the slider's orientation. See the "orientation" property for details. -.SH "int QSlider::pageStep () const" +.SH "int TQSlider::pageStep () const" Returns the current page step. See the "pageStep" property for details. -.SH "void QSlider::rangeChange ()\fC [virtual protected]\fR" +.SH "void TQSlider::rangeChange ()\fC [virtual protected]\fR" Implements the virtual QRangeControl function. .PP Reimplemented from QRangeControl. -.SH "void QSlider::setLineStep ( int )" +.SH "void TQSlider::setLineStep ( int )" Sets the current line step. See the "lineStep" property for details. -.SH "void QSlider::setMaxValue ( int )" +.SH "void TQSlider::setMaxValue ( int )" Sets the current maximum value of the slider. See the "maxValue" property for details. -.SH "void QSlider::setMinValue ( int )" +.SH "void TQSlider::setMinValue ( int )" Sets the current minimum value of the slider. See the "minValue" property for details. -.SH "void QSlider::setOrientation ( Orientation )\fC [virtual]\fR" +.SH "void TQSlider::setOrientation ( Orientation )\fC [virtual]\fR" Sets the slider's orientation. See the "orientation" property for details. -.SH "void QSlider::setPageStep ( int )" +.SH "void TQSlider::setPageStep ( int )" Sets the current page step. See the "pageStep" property for details. -.SH "void QSlider::setPalette ( const TQPalette & p )\fC [virtual]\fR" +.SH "void TQSlider::setPalette ( const TQPalette & p )\fC [virtual]\fR" Reimplements the virtual function TQWidget::setPalette(). .PP Sets the background color to the mid color for Motif style sliders using palette \fIp\fR. @@ -259,39 +259,39 @@ See also minValue and maxValue. .PP Examples: .)l listbox/listbox.cpp, t12/lcdrange.cpp, t5/main.cpp, t6/main.cpp, t8/lcdrange.cpp, and xform/xform.cpp. -.SH "void QSlider::setTickInterval ( int )\fC [virtual]\fR" +.SH "void TQSlider::setTickInterval ( int )\fC [virtual]\fR" Sets the interval between tickmarks. See the "tickInterval" property for details. -.SH "void QSlider::setTickmarks ( TickSetting )\fC [virtual]\fR" +.SH "void TQSlider::setTickmarks ( TickSetting )\fC [virtual]\fR" Sets the tickmark settings for this slider. See the "tickmarks" property for details. -.SH "void QSlider::setTracking ( bool enable )\fC [virtual]\fR" +.SH "void TQSlider::setTracking ( bool enable )\fC [virtual]\fR" Sets whether slider tracking is enabled to \fIenable\fR. See the "tracking" property for details. -.SH "void QSlider::setValue ( int )\fC [virtual slot]\fR" +.SH "void TQSlider::setValue ( int )\fC [virtual slot]\fR" Sets the current slider value. See the "value" property for details. -.SH "void QSlider::sliderMoved ( int value )\fC [signal]\fR" +.SH "void TQSlider::sliderMoved ( int value )\fC [signal]\fR" This signal is emitted when the slider is dragged, with the new slider \fIvalue\fR as its argument. -.SH "void QSlider::sliderPressed ()\fC [signal]\fR" +.SH "void TQSlider::sliderPressed ()\fC [signal]\fR" This signal is emitted when the user presses the slider with the mouse. -.SH "TQRect QSlider::sliderRect () const" +.SH "TQRect TQSlider::sliderRect () const" Returns the slider handle rectangle. (This is the visual marker that the user can move.) -.SH "void QSlider::sliderReleased ()\fC [signal]\fR" +.SH "void TQSlider::sliderReleased ()\fC [signal]\fR" This signal is emitted when the user releases the slider with the mouse. -.SH "int QSlider::sliderStart () const" +.SH "int TQSlider::sliderStart () const" Returns the start position of the slider. -.SH "void QSlider::subtractStep ()\fC [slot]\fR" +.SH "void TQSlider::subtractStep ()\fC [slot]\fR" Moves the slider one pageStep() down or left. -.SH "int QSlider::tickInterval () const" +.SH "int TQSlider::tickInterval () const" Returns the interval between tickmarks. See the "tickInterval" property for details. -.SH "TickSetting QSlider::tickmarks () const" +.SH "TickSetting TQSlider::tickmarks () const" Returns the tickmark settings for this slider. See the "tickmarks" property for details. -.SH "bool QSlider::tracking () const" +.SH "bool TQSlider::tracking () const" Returns TRUE if slider tracking is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "tracking" property for details. -.SH "int QSlider::value () const" +.SH "int TQSlider::value () const" Returns the current slider value. See the "value" property for details. -.SH "void QSlider::valueChange ()\fC [virtual protected]\fR" +.SH "void TQSlider::valueChange ()\fC [virtual protected]\fR" Implements the virtual QRangeControl function. .PP Reimplemented from QRangeControl. -.SH "void QSlider::valueChanged ( int value )\fC [signal]\fR" +.SH "void TQSlider::valueChanged ( int value )\fC [signal]\fR" This signal is emitted when the slider value is changed, with the new slider \fIvalue\fR as its argument. .PP Examples: @@ -308,7 +308,7 @@ Set this property's value with setLineStep() and get this property's value with .SH "int maxValue" This property holds the current maximum value of the slider. .PP -When setting this property, the QSlider::minValue is adjusted, if necessary, to ensure that the range remains valid. +When setting this property, the TQSlider::minValue is adjusted, if necessary, to ensure that the range remains valid. .PP See also setRange(). .PP @@ -316,7 +316,7 @@ Set this property's value with setMaxValue() and get this property's value with .SH "int minValue" This property holds the current minimum value of the slider. .PP -When setting this property, the QSlider::maxValue is adjusted, if necessary, to ensure that the range remains valid. +When setting this property, the TQSlider::maxValue is adjusted, if necessary, to ensure that the range remains valid. .PP See also setRange(). .PP @@ -346,7 +346,7 @@ Set this property's value with setTickInterval() and get this property's value w .SH "TickSetting tickmarks" This property holds the tickmark settings for this slider. .PP -The valid values are in QSlider::TickSetting. The default is NoMarks. +The valid values are in TQSlider::TickSetting. The default is NoMarks. .PP See also tickInterval. .PP @@ -365,7 +365,7 @@ Set this property's value with setValue() and get this property's value with val See also QRangeControl::value() and prevValue(). .SH "SEE ALSO" -.BR http://doc.trolltech.com/ntqslider.html +.BR http://doc.trolltech.com/tqslider.html .BR http://www.trolltech.com/faq/tech.html .SH COPYRIGHT Copyright 1992-2007 Trolltech ASA, http://www.trolltech.com. See the diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqspinbox.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqspinbox.3qt index 4c126eb63..cc6c631d5 100644 --- a/doc/man/man3/tqspinbox.3qt +++ b/doc/man/man3/tqspinbox.3qt @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ '\" t -.TH QSpinBox 3qt "2 February 2007" "Trolltech AS" \" -*- nroff -*- +.TH TQSpinBox 3qt "2 February 2007" "Trolltech AS" \" -*- nroff -*- .\" Copyright 1992-2007 Trolltech ASA. All rights reserved. See the .\" license file included in the distribution for a complete license .\" statement. @@ -7,22 +7,22 @@ .ad l .nh .SH NAME -QSpinBox \- Spin box widget (spin button) +TQSpinBox \- Spin box widget (spin button) .SH SYNOPSIS -\fC#include <ntqspinbox.h>\fR +\fC#include <tqspinbox.h>\fR .PP Inherits TQWidget and QRangeControl. .PP .SS "Public Members" .in +1c .ti -1c -.BI "\fBQSpinBox\fR ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )" +.BI "\fBTQSpinBox\fR ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )" .br .ti -1c -.BI "\fBQSpinBox\fR ( int minValue, int maxValue, int step = 1, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )" +.BI "\fBTQSpinBox\fR ( int minValue, int maxValue, int step = 1, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )" .br .ti -1c -.BI "\fB~QSpinBox\fR ()" +.BI "\fB~TQSpinBox\fR ()" .br .ti -1c .BI "TQString \fBtext\fR () const" @@ -175,7 +175,7 @@ Inherits TQWidget and QRangeControl. .BI "virtual void \fBinterpretText\fR ()" .br .ti -1c -.BI "QLineEdit * \fBeditor\fR () const" +.BI "TQLineEdit * \fBeditor\fR () const" .br .ti -1c .BI "virtual void \fBvalueChange\fR ()" @@ -194,33 +194,33 @@ Inherits TQWidget and QRangeControl. .br .in -1c .SH DESCRIPTION -The QSpinBox class provides a spin box widget (spin button). +The TQSpinBox class provides a spin box widget (spin button). .PP -QSpinBox allows the user to choose a value either by clicking the up/down buttons to increase/decrease the value currently displayed or by typing the value directly into the spin box. If the value is entered directly into the spin box, Enter (or Return) must be pressed to apply the new value. The value is usually an integer. +TQSpinBox allows the user to choose a value either by clicking the up/down buttons to increase/decrease the value currently displayed or by typing the value directly into the spin box. If the value is entered directly into the spin box, Enter (or Return) must be pressed to apply the new value. The value is usually an integer. .PP -Every time the value changes QSpinBox emits the valueChanged() signal. The current value can be fetched with value() and set with setValue(). +Every time the value changes TQSpinBox emits the valueChanged() signal. The current value can be fetched with value() and set with setValue(). .PP The spin box keeps the value within a numeric range, and to multiples of the lineStep() size (see QRangeControl for details). Clicking the up/down buttons or using the keyboard accelerator's up and down arrows will increase or decrease the current value in steps of size lineStep(). The minimum and maximum value and the step size can be set using one of the constructors, and can be changed later with setMinValue(), setMaxValue() and setLineStep(). .PP -Most spin boxes are directional, but QSpinBox can also operate as a circular spin box, i.e. if the range is 0-99 and the current value is 99, clicking "up" will give 0. Use setWrapping() if you want circular behavior. +Most spin boxes are directional, but TQSpinBox can also operate as a circular spin box, i.e. if the range is 0-99 and the current value is 99, clicking "up" will give 0. Use setWrapping() if you want circular behavior. .PP The displayed value can be prepended and appended with arbitrary strings indicating, for example, currency or the unit of measurement. See setPrefix() and setSuffix(). The text in the spin box is retrieved with text() (which includes any prefix() and suffix()), or with cleanText() (which has no prefix(), no suffix() and no leading or trailing whitespace). currentValueText() returns the spin box's current value as text. .PP Normally the spin box displays up and down arrows in the buttons. You can use setButtonSymbols() to change the display to show \fB+\fR and \fB-\fR symbols if you prefer. In either case the up and down arrow keys work as expected. .PP -It is often desirable to give the user a special (often default) choice in addition to the range of numeric values. See setSpecialValueText() for how to do this with QSpinBox. +It is often desirable to give the user a special (often default) choice in addition to the range of numeric values. See setSpecialValueText() for how to do this with TQSpinBox. .PP The default TQWidget::focusPolicy() is StrongFocus. .PP -If using prefix(), suffix() and specialValueText() don't provide enough control, you can ignore them and subclass QSpinBox instead. +If using prefix(), suffix() and specialValueText() don't provide enough control, you can ignore them and subclass TQSpinBox instead. .PP -QSpinBox can easily be subclassed to allow the user to input things other than an integer value as long as the allowed input can be mapped to a range of integers. This can be done by overriding the virtual functions mapValueToText() and mapTextToValue(), and setting another suitable validator using setValidator(). +TQSpinBox can easily be subclassed to allow the user to input things other than an integer value as long as the allowed input can be mapped to a range of integers. This can be done by overriding the virtual functions mapValueToText() and mapTextToValue(), and setting another suitable validator using setValidator(). .PP For example, these functions could be changed so that the user provided values from 0.0 to 10.0, or -1 to signify 'Auto', while the range of integers used inside the program would be -1 to 100: .PP .nf .br - class MySpinBox : public QSpinBox + class MySpinBox : public TQSpinBox .br { .br @@ -271,52 +271,52 @@ For example, these functions could be changed so that the user provided values f .ce 1 .B "[Image Omitted]" .PP -See also QScrollBar, QSlider, GUI Design Handbook: Spin Box, and Basic Widgets. +See also TQScrollBar, TQSlider, GUI Design Handbook: Spin Box, and Basic Widgets. .SS "Member Type Documentation" -.SH "QSpinBox::ButtonSymbols" +.SH "TQSpinBox::ButtonSymbols" This enum type determines what the buttons in a spin box show. .TP -\fCQSpinBox::UpDownArrows\fR - the buttons show little arrows in the classic style. +\fCTQSpinBox::UpDownArrows\fR - the buttons show little arrows in the classic style. .TP -\fCQSpinBox::PlusMinus\fR - the buttons show \fB+\fR and \fB-\fR symbols. +\fCTQSpinBox::PlusMinus\fR - the buttons show \fB+\fR and \fB-\fR symbols. .PP -See also QSpinBox::buttonSymbols. +See also TQSpinBox::buttonSymbols. .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION -.SH "QSpinBox::QSpinBox ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )" +.SH "TQSpinBox::TQSpinBox ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )" Constructs a spin box with the default QRangeControl range and step values. It is called \fIname\fR and has parent \fIparent\fR. .PP See also minValue, maxValue, setRange(), lineStep, and setSteps(). -.SH "QSpinBox::QSpinBox ( int minValue, int maxValue, int step = 1, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )" +.SH "TQSpinBox::TQSpinBox ( int minValue, int maxValue, int step = 1, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )" Constructs a spin box that allows values from \fIminValue\fR to \fImaxValue\fR inclusive, with step amount \fIstep\fR. The value is initially set to \fIminValue\fR. .PP The spin box is called \fIname\fR and has parent \fIparent\fR. .PP See also minValue, maxValue, setRange(), lineStep, and setSteps(). -.SH "QSpinBox::~QSpinBox ()" +.SH "TQSpinBox::~TQSpinBox ()" Destroys the spin box, freeing all memory and other resources. -.SH "ButtonSymbols QSpinBox::buttonSymbols () const" +.SH "ButtonSymbols TQSpinBox::buttonSymbols () const" Returns the current button symbol mode. See the "buttonSymbols" property for details. -.SH "TQString QSpinBox::cleanText () const\fC [virtual]\fR" +.SH "TQString TQSpinBox::cleanText () const\fC [virtual]\fR" Returns the spin box's text with no prefix(), suffix() or leading or trailing whitespace. See the "cleanText" property for details. -.SH "TQString QSpinBox::currentValueText ()\fC [protected]\fR" +.SH "TQString TQSpinBox::currentValueText ()\fC [protected]\fR" Returns the full text calculated from the current value, including any prefix and suffix. If there is special value text and the value is minValue() the specialValueText() is returned. -.SH "TQRect QSpinBox::downRect () const" +.SH "TQRect TQSpinBox::downRect () const" Returns the geometry of the "down" button. -.SH "QLineEdit * QSpinBox::editor () const\fC [protected]\fR" -Returns a pointer to the embedded QLineEdit. -.SH "bool QSpinBox::eventFilter ( TQObject * o, TQEvent * ev )\fC [virtual protected]\fR" -Intercepts and handles the events coming to the embedded QLineEdit that have special meaning for the QSpinBox. The object is passed as \fIo\fR and the event is passed as \fIev\fR. +.SH "TQLineEdit * TQSpinBox::editor () const\fC [protected]\fR" +Returns a pointer to the embedded TQLineEdit. +.SH "bool TQSpinBox::eventFilter ( TQObject * o, TQEvent * ev )\fC [virtual protected]\fR" +Intercepts and handles the events coming to the embedded TQLineEdit that have special meaning for the TQSpinBox. The object is passed as \fIo\fR and the event is passed as \fIev\fR. .PP Reimplemented from TQObject. -.SH "void QSpinBox::interpretText ()\fC [virtual protected]\fR" -QSpinBox calls this after the user has manually edited the contents of the spin box (i.e. by typing in the embedded QLineEdit, rather than using the up/down buttons/keys). +.SH "void TQSpinBox::interpretText ()\fC [virtual protected]\fR" +TQSpinBox calls this after the user has manually edited the contents of the spin box (i.e. by typing in the embedded TQLineEdit, rather than using the up/down buttons/keys). .PP The default implementation of this function interprets the new text using mapTextToValue(). If mapTextToValue() is successful, it changes the spin box's value; if not, the value is left unchanged. .PP See also editor(). -.SH "int QSpinBox::lineStep () const" +.SH "int TQSpinBox::lineStep () const" Returns the line step. See the "lineStep" property for details. -.SH "int QSpinBox::mapTextToValue ( bool * ok )\fC [virtual protected]\fR" +.SH "int TQSpinBox::mapTextToValue ( bool * ok )\fC [virtual protected]\fR" This virtual function is used by the spin box whenever it needs to interpret text entered by the user as a value. The text is available as text() and as cleanText(), and this function must parse it if possible. If \fIok\fR is not 0: if it parses the text successfully, \fI*ok\fR is set to TRUE; otherwise \fI*ok\fR is set to FALSE. .PP Subclasses that need to display spin box values in a non-numeric way need to reimplement this function. @@ -326,7 +326,7 @@ Note that TQt handles specialValueText() separately; this function is only conce The default implementation tries to interpret the text() as an integer in the standard way and returns the integer value. .PP See also interpretText() and mapValueToText(). -.SH "TQString QSpinBox::mapValueToText ( int v )\fC [virtual protected]\fR" +.SH "TQString TQSpinBox::mapValueToText ( int v )\fC [virtual protected]\fR" This virtual function is used by the spin box whenever it needs to display value \fIv\fR. The default implementation returns a string containing \fIv\fR printed in the standard way. Reimplementations may return anything. (See the example in the detailed description.) .PP Note that TQt does not call this function for specialValueText() and that neither prefix() nor suffix() are included in the return value. @@ -334,73 +334,73 @@ Note that TQt does not call this function for specialValueText() and that neithe If you reimplement this, you may also need to reimplement mapTextToValue(). .PP See also updateDisplay() and mapTextToValue(). -.SH "int QSpinBox::maxValue () const" +.SH "int TQSpinBox::maxValue () const" Returns the maximum value of the spin box. See the "maxValue" property for details. -.SH "int QSpinBox::minValue () const" +.SH "int TQSpinBox::minValue () const" Returns the minimum value of the spin box. See the "minValue" property for details. -.SH "TQString QSpinBox::prefix () const\fC [virtual]\fR" +.SH "TQString TQSpinBox::prefix () const\fC [virtual]\fR" Returns the spin box's prefix. See the "prefix" property for details. -.SH "void QSpinBox::rangeChange ()\fC [virtual protected]\fR" +.SH "void TQSpinBox::rangeChange ()\fC [virtual protected]\fR" This virtual function is called by QRangeControl whenever the range has changed. It adjusts the default validator and updates the display; if you need additional processing, you can reimplement this function. .PP Reimplemented from QRangeControl. -.SH "void QSpinBox::selectAll ()\fC [virtual slot]\fR" +.SH "void TQSpinBox::selectAll ()\fC [virtual slot]\fR" Selects all the text in the spin box's editor. -.SH "void QSpinBox::setButtonSymbols ( ButtonSymbols )\fC [virtual]\fR" +.SH "void TQSpinBox::setButtonSymbols ( ButtonSymbols )\fC [virtual]\fR" Sets the current button symbol mode. See the "buttonSymbols" property for details. -.SH "void QSpinBox::setLineStep ( int )" +.SH "void TQSpinBox::setLineStep ( int )" Sets the line step. See the "lineStep" property for details. -.SH "void QSpinBox::setMaxValue ( int )" +.SH "void TQSpinBox::setMaxValue ( int )" Sets the maximum value of the spin box. See the "maxValue" property for details. -.SH "void QSpinBox::setMinValue ( int )" +.SH "void TQSpinBox::setMinValue ( int )" Sets the minimum value of the spin box. See the "minValue" property for details. -.SH "void QSpinBox::setPrefix ( const TQString & text )\fC [virtual slot]\fR" +.SH "void TQSpinBox::setPrefix ( const TQString & text )\fC [virtual slot]\fR" Sets the spin box's prefix to \fItext\fR. See the "prefix" property for details. -.SH "void QSpinBox::setSpecialValueText ( const TQString & text )\fC [virtual]\fR" +.SH "void TQSpinBox::setSpecialValueText ( const TQString & text )\fC [virtual]\fR" Sets the special-value text to \fItext\fR. See the "specialValueText" property for details. -.SH "void QSpinBox::setSuffix ( const TQString & text )\fC [virtual slot]\fR" +.SH "void TQSpinBox::setSuffix ( const TQString & text )\fC [virtual slot]\fR" Sets the suffix of the spin box to \fItext\fR. See the "suffix" property for details. -.SH "void QSpinBox::setValidator ( const QValidator * v )\fC [virtual]\fR" +.SH "void TQSpinBox::setValidator ( const QValidator * v )\fC [virtual]\fR" Sets the validator to \fIv\fR. The validator controls what keyboard input is accepted when the user is editing in the value field. The default is to use a suitable QIntValidator. .PP Use setValidator(0) to turn off input validation (entered input will still be kept within the spin box's range). -.SH "void QSpinBox::setValue ( int value )\fC [virtual slot]\fR" +.SH "void TQSpinBox::setValue ( int value )\fC [virtual slot]\fR" Sets the value of the spin box to \fIvalue\fR. See the "value" property for details. -.SH "void QSpinBox::setWrapping ( bool on )\fC [virtual]\fR" +.SH "void TQSpinBox::setWrapping ( bool on )\fC [virtual]\fR" Sets whether it is possible to step the value from the highest value to the lowest value and vice versa to \fIon\fR. See the "wrapping" property for details. -.SH "TQString QSpinBox::specialValueText () const" +.SH "TQString TQSpinBox::specialValueText () const" Returns the special-value text. See the "specialValueText" property for details. -.SH "void QSpinBox::stepDown ()\fC [virtual slot]\fR" +.SH "void TQSpinBox::stepDown ()\fC [virtual slot]\fR" Decreases the spin box's value one lineStep(), wrapping as necessary if wrapping() is TRUE. This is the same as clicking on the pointing-down button and can be used for keyboard accelerators, for example. .PP See also stepUp(), subtractLine(), lineStep, setSteps(), value, and value. -.SH "void QSpinBox::stepUp ()\fC [virtual slot]\fR" +.SH "void TQSpinBox::stepUp ()\fC [virtual slot]\fR" Increases the spin box's value by one lineStep(), wrapping as necessary if wrapping() is TRUE. This is the same as clicking on the pointing-up button and can be used for keyboard accelerators, for example. .PP See also stepDown(), addLine(), lineStep, setSteps(), value, and value. -.SH "TQString QSpinBox::suffix () const\fC [virtual]\fR" +.SH "TQString TQSpinBox::suffix () const\fC [virtual]\fR" Returns the suffix of the spin box. See the "suffix" property for details. -.SH "TQString QSpinBox::text () const" +.SH "TQString TQSpinBox::text () const" Returns the spin box's text, including any prefix() and suffix(). See the "text" property for details. -.SH "void QSpinBox::textChanged ()\fC [protected slot]\fR" +.SH "void TQSpinBox::textChanged ()\fC [protected slot]\fR" This slot is called whenever the user edits the spin box's text. -.SH "TQRect QSpinBox::upRect () const" +.SH "TQRect TQSpinBox::upRect () const" Returns the geometry of the "up" button. -.SH "void QSpinBox::updateDisplay ()\fC [virtual protected]\fR" -Updates the contents of the embedded QLineEdit to reflect the current value using mapValueToText(). Also enables/disables the up/down push buttons accordingly. +.SH "void TQSpinBox::updateDisplay ()\fC [virtual protected]\fR" +Updates the contents of the embedded TQLineEdit to reflect the current value using mapValueToText(). Also enables/disables the up/down push buttons accordingly. .PP See also mapValueToText(). -.SH "const QValidator * QSpinBox::validator () const" +.SH "const QValidator * TQSpinBox::validator () const" Returns the validator that constrains editing for this spin box if there is any; otherwise returns 0. .PP See also setValidator() and QValidator. -.SH "int QSpinBox::value () const" +.SH "int TQSpinBox::value () const" Returns the value of the spin box. See the "value" property for details. -.SH "void QSpinBox::valueChange ()\fC [virtual protected]\fR" -This virtual function is called by QRangeControl whenever the value has changed. The QSpinBox reimplementation updates the display and emits the valueChanged() signals; if you need additional processing, either reimplement this or connect to one of the valueChanged() signals. +.SH "void TQSpinBox::valueChange ()\fC [virtual protected]\fR" +This virtual function is called by QRangeControl whenever the value has changed. The TQSpinBox reimplementation updates the display and emits the valueChanged() signals; if you need additional processing, either reimplement this or connect to one of the valueChanged() signals. .PP Reimplemented from QRangeControl. -.SH "void QSpinBox::valueChanged ( int value )\fC [signal]\fR" +.SH "void TQSpinBox::valueChanged ( int value )\fC [signal]\fR" This signal is emitted every time the value of the spin box changes; the new value is passed in \fIvalue\fR. This signal will be emitted as a result of a call to setValue(), or because the user changed the value by using a keyboard accelerator or mouse click, etc. .PP Note that the valueChanged() signal is emitted \fIevery\fR time, not just for the "last" step; i.e. if the user clicks "up" three times, this signal is emitted three times. @@ -409,7 +409,7 @@ See also value. .PP Examples: .)l listbox/listbox.cpp, qfd/fontdisplayer.cpp, and scribble/scribble.cpp. -.SH "void QSpinBox::valueChanged ( const TQString & valueText )\fC [signal]\fR" +.SH "void TQSpinBox::valueChanged ( const TQString & valueText )\fC [signal]\fR" This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. .PP This signal is emitted whenever the valueChanged( int ) signal is emitted, i.e. every time the value of the spin box changes (whatever the cause, e.g. by setValue(), by a keyboard accelerator, by mouse clicks, etc.). @@ -417,7 +417,7 @@ This signal is emitted whenever the valueChanged( int ) signal is emitted, i.e. The \fIvalueText\fR parameter is the same string that is displayed in the edit field of the spin box. .PP See also value, prefix, suffix, and specialValueText. -.SH "bool QSpinBox::wrapping () const" +.SH "bool TQSpinBox::wrapping () const" Returns TRUE if it is possible to step the value from the highest value to the lowest value and vice versa; otherwise returns FALSE. See the "wrapping" property for details. .SS "Property Documentation" .SH "ButtonSymbols buttonSymbols" @@ -447,7 +447,7 @@ Set this property's value with setLineStep() and get this property's value with .SH "int maxValue" This property holds the maximum value of the spin box. .PP -When setting this property, QSpinBox::minValue is adjusted, if necessary, to ensure that the range remains valid. +When setting this property, TQSpinBox::minValue is adjusted, if necessary, to ensure that the range remains valid. .PP See also setRange() and specialValueText. .PP @@ -455,7 +455,7 @@ Set this property's value with setMaxValue() and get this property's value with .SH "int minValue" This property holds the minimum value of the spin box. .PP -When setting this property, QSpinBox::maxValue is adjusted, if necessary, to ensure that the range remains valid. +When setting this property, TQSpinBox::maxValue is adjusted, if necessary, to ensure that the range remains valid. .PP See also setRange() and specialValueText. .PP @@ -487,7 +487,7 @@ For example, if your spin box allows the user to choose the margin width in a pr .PP .nf .br - QSpinBox marginBox( -1, 20, 1, parent, "marginBox" ); + TQSpinBox marginBox( -1, 20, 1, parent, "marginBox" ); .br marginBox->setSuffix( " mm" ); .br @@ -547,7 +547,7 @@ See also minValue, maxValue, and setRange(). Set this property's value with setWrapping() and get this property's value with wrapping(). .SH "SEE ALSO" -.BR http://doc.trolltech.com/ntqspinbox.html +.BR http://doc.trolltech.com/tqspinbox.html .BR http://www.trolltech.com/faq/tech.html .SH COPYRIGHT Copyright 1992-2007 Trolltech ASA, http://www.trolltech.com. See the diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqsqleditorfactory.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqsqleditorfactory.3qt index 33a8557d2..c468c09f9 100644 --- a/doc/man/man3/tqsqleditorfactory.3qt +++ b/doc/man/man3/tqsqleditorfactory.3qt @@ -40,7 +40,7 @@ Inherits TQEditorFactory. .SH DESCRIPTION The TQSqlEditorFactory class is used to create the editors used by TQDataTable and TQSqlForm. .PP -TQSqlEditorFactory is used by TQDataTable and TQSqlForm to automatically create appropriate editors for a given TQSqlField. For example if the field is a QVariant::String a QLineEdit would be the default editor, whereas a QVariant::Int's default editor would be a QSpinBox. +TQSqlEditorFactory is used by TQDataTable and TQSqlForm to automatically create appropriate editors for a given TQSqlField. For example if the field is a QVariant::String a TQLineEdit would be the default editor, whereas a QVariant::Int's default editor would be a TQSpinBox. .PP If you want to create different editors for fields with the same data type, subclass TQSqlEditorFactory and reimplement the createEditor() function. .PP diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqsqlform.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqsqlform.3qt index 73d2a1bfd..0ec8d2987 100644 --- a/doc/man/man3/tqsqlform.3qt +++ b/doc/man/man3/tqsqlform.3qt @@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ Some sample code to initialize a form successfully: .PP .nf .br - QLineEdit myEditor( this ); + TQLineEdit myEditor( this ); .br TQSqlForm myForm( this ); .br diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqsqlpropertymap.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqsqlpropertymap.3qt index a41aeb310..df317d2bb 100644 --- a/doc/man/man3/tqsqlpropertymap.3qt +++ b/doc/man/man3/tqsqlpropertymap.3qt @@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ The SQL module uses TQt object properties to insert and extract values from edit .PP This class is used to map editors to SQL fields. This works by associating SQL editor class names to the properties used to insert and extract values to/from the editor. .PP -For example, a QLineEdit can be used to edit text strings and other data types in TQDataTables or TQSqlForms. Several properties are defined in QLineEdit, but only the \fItext\fR property is used to insert and extract text from a QLineEdit. Both TQDataTable and TQSqlForm use the global TQSqlPropertyMap for inserting and extracting values to and from an editor widget. The global property map defines several common widgets and properties that are suitable for many applications. You can add and remove widget properties to suit your specific needs. +For example, a TQLineEdit can be used to edit text strings and other data types in TQDataTables or TQSqlForms. Several properties are defined in TQLineEdit, but only the \fItext\fR property is used to insert and extract text from a TQLineEdit. Both TQDataTable and TQSqlForm use the global TQSqlPropertyMap for inserting and extracting values to and from an editor widget. The global property map defines several common widgets and properties that are suitable for many applications. You can add and remove widget properties to suit your specific needs. .PP If you want to use custom editors with your TQDataTable or TQSqlForm, you must install your own TQSqlPropertyMap for that table or form. Example: .PP @@ -123,7 +123,7 @@ Constructs a TQSqlPropertyMap. .PP The default property mappings used by TQt widgets are: <center>.nf .TS -l - l. Widgets Property QCheckBox, QRadioButton checked QComboBox, QListBox currentItem TQDateEdit date TQDateTimeEdit dateTime TQTextBrowser source QButton, QDial, TQLabel, QLineEdit, QMultiLineEdit, QPushButton, TQTextEdit, text TQTimeEdit time QLCDNumber, QScrollBar QSlider, QSpinBox +l - l. Widgets Property TQCheckBox, TQRadioButton checked TQComboBox, QListBox currentItem TQDateEdit date TQDateTimeEdit dateTime TQTextBrowser source QButton, TQDial, TQLabel, TQLineEdit, QMultiLineEdit, TQPushButton, TQTextEdit, text TQTimeEdit time TQLCDNumber, TQScrollBar TQSlider, TQSpinBox .TE .fi </center> diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqstyle.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqstyle.3qt index 8f2ccd002..227736566 100644 --- a/doc/man/man3/tqstyle.3qt +++ b/doc/man/man3/tqstyle.3qt @@ -220,17 +220,17 @@ See also sizeFromContents(). .SH "TQStyle::ControlElement" This enum represents a ControlElement. A ControlElement is part of a widget that performs some action or displays information to the user. .TP -\fCTQStyle::CE_PushButton\fR - the bevel and default indicator of a QPushButton. +\fCTQStyle::CE_PushButton\fR - the bevel and default indicator of a TQPushButton. .TP -\fCTQStyle::CE_PushButtonLabel\fR - the label (iconset with text or pixmap) of a QPushButton. +\fCTQStyle::CE_PushButtonLabel\fR - the label (iconset with text or pixmap) of a TQPushButton. .TP -\fCTQStyle::CE_CheckBox\fR - the indicator of a QCheckBox. +\fCTQStyle::CE_CheckBox\fR - the indicator of a TQCheckBox. .TP -\fCTQStyle::CE_CheckBoxLabel\fR - the label (text or pixmap) of a QCheckBox. +\fCTQStyle::CE_CheckBoxLabel\fR - the label (text or pixmap) of a TQCheckBox. .TP -\fCTQStyle::CE_RadioButton\fR - the indicator of a QRadioButton. +\fCTQStyle::CE_RadioButton\fR - the indicator of a TQRadioButton. .TP -\fCTQStyle::CE_RadioButtonLabel\fR - the label (text or pixmap) of a QRadioButton. +\fCTQStyle::CE_RadioButtonLabel\fR - the label (text or pixmap) of a TQRadioButton. .TP \fCTQStyle::CE_TabBarTab\fR - the tab within a QTabBar (a QTab). .TP @@ -352,9 +352,9 @@ This enum represents a PixelMetric. A PixelMetric is a style dependent size repr .TP \fCTQStyle::PM_PopupMenuScrollerHeight\fR - height of the scroller area in a popupmenu. .TP -\fCTQStyle::PM_CheckListButtonSize\fR - area (width/height) of the checkbox/radiobutton in a QCheckListItem +\fCTQStyle::PM_CheckListButtonSize\fR - area (width/height) of the checkbox/radiobutton in a TQCheckListItem .TP -\fCTQStyle::PM_CheckListControllerSize\fR - area (width/height) of the controller in a QCheckListItem +\fCTQStyle::PM_CheckListControllerSize\fR - area (width/height) of the controller in a TQCheckListItem .TP \fCTQStyle::PM_DialogButtonsSeparator\fR - distance between buttons in a dialog buttons widget. .TP @@ -374,7 +374,7 @@ See also pixelMetric(). .SH "TQStyle::PrimitiveElement" This enum represents the PrimitiveElements of a style. A PrimitiveElement is a common GUI element, such as a checkbox indicator or pushbutton bevel. .TP -\fCTQStyle::PE_ButtonCommand\fR - button used to initiate an action, for example, a QPushButton. +\fCTQStyle::PE_ButtonCommand\fR - button used to initiate an action, for example, a TQPushButton. .TP \fCTQStyle::PE_ButtonDefault\fR - this button is the default button, e.g. in a dialog. .TP @@ -394,7 +394,7 @@ This enum represents the PrimitiveElements of a style. A PrimitiveElement is a c .TP \fCTQStyle::PE_ArrowLeft\fR - left arrow. .TP -\fCTQStyle::PE_SpinWidgetUp\fR - up symbol for a spin widget, for example a QSpinBox. +\fCTQStyle::PE_SpinWidgetUp\fR - up symbol for a spin widget, for example a TQSpinBox. .TP \fCTQStyle::PE_SpinWidgetDown\fR - down symbol for a spin widget. .TP @@ -402,11 +402,11 @@ This enum represents the PrimitiveElements of a style. A PrimitiveElement is a c .TP \fCTQStyle::PE_SpinWidgetMinus\fR - decrease symbol for a spin widget. .TP -\fCTQStyle::PE_Indicator\fR - on/off indicator, for example, a QCheckBox. +\fCTQStyle::PE_Indicator\fR - on/off indicator, for example, a TQCheckBox. .TP \fCTQStyle::PE_IndicatorMask\fR - bitmap mask for an indicator. .TP -\fCTQStyle::PE_ExclusiveIndicator\fR - exclusive on/off indicator, for example, a QRadioButton. +\fCTQStyle::PE_ExclusiveIndicator\fR - exclusive on/off indicator, for example, a TQRadioButton. .TP \fCTQStyle::PE_ExclusiveIndicatorMask\fR - bitmap mask for an exclusive indicator. .TP @@ -448,9 +448,9 @@ This enum represents the PrimitiveElements of a style. A PrimitiveElement is a c .TP \fCTQStyle::PE_SizeGrip\fR - window resize handle; see also TQSizeGrip. .TP -\fCTQStyle::PE_CheckMark\fR - generic check mark; see also QCheckBox. +\fCTQStyle::PE_CheckMark\fR - generic check mark; see also TQCheckBox. .TP -\fCTQStyle::PE_ScrollBarAddLine\fR - scrollbar line increase indicator (i.e. scroll down); see also QScrollBar. +\fCTQStyle::PE_ScrollBarAddLine\fR - scrollbar line increase indicator (i.e. scroll down); see also TQScrollBar. .TP \fCTQStyle::PE_ScrollBarSubLine\fR - scrollbar line decrease indicator (i.e. scroll up). .TP @@ -528,7 +528,7 @@ This enum represents a StyleHint. A StyleHint is a general look and/or feel hint .TP \fCTQStyle::SH_GUIStyle\fR - the GUI style to use. .TP -\fCTQStyle::SH_ScrollBar_BackgroundMode\fR - the background mode for a QScrollBar. Possible values are any of those in the BackgroundMode enum. +\fCTQStyle::SH_ScrollBar_BackgroundMode\fR - the background mode for a TQScrollBar. Possible values are any of those in the BackgroundMode enum. .TP \fCTQStyle::SH_ScrollBar_MiddleClickAbsolutePosition\fR - a boolean value. If TRUE, middle clicking on a scrollbar causes the slider to jump to that position. If FALSE, the middle clicking is ignored. .TP @@ -648,7 +648,7 @@ This enum represents a SubControl within a ComplexControl. .TP \fCTQStyle::SC_None\fR - special value that matches no other SubControl. .TP -\fCTQStyle::SC_ScrollBarAddLine\fR - scrollbar add line (i.e. down/right arrow); see also QScrollbar. +\fCTQStyle::SC_ScrollBarAddLine\fR - scrollbar add line (i.e. down/right arrow); see also TQScrollbar. .TP \fCTQStyle::SC_ScrollBarSubLine\fR - scrollbar sub line (i.e. up/left arrow). .TP @@ -664,7 +664,7 @@ This enum represents a SubControl within a ComplexControl. .TP \fCTQStyle::SC_ScrollBarGroove\fR - special subcontrol which contains the area in which the slider handle may move. .TP -\fCTQStyle::SC_SpinWidgetUp\fR - spinwidget up/increase; see also QSpinBox. +\fCTQStyle::SC_SpinWidgetUp\fR - spinwidget up/increase; see also TQSpinBox. .TP \fCTQStyle::SC_SpinWidgetDown\fR - spinwidget down/decrease. .TP @@ -674,7 +674,7 @@ This enum represents a SubControl within a ComplexControl. .TP \fCTQStyle::SC_SpinWidgetButtonField\fR - spinwidget button field. .TP -\fCTQStyle::SC_ComboBoxEditField\fR - combobox edit field; see also QComboBox. +\fCTQStyle::SC_ComboBoxEditField\fR - combobox edit field; see also TQComboBox. .TP \fCTQStyle::SC_ComboBoxArrow\fR - combobox arrow .TP @@ -793,7 +793,7 @@ The \fIwidget\fR argument is a pointer to a TQWidget or one of its subclasses. T .TS l - l. ComplexControl .br -& Widget Cast Style Flags Notes Options Notes CC_SpinWidget(const QSpinWidget *) Style_Enabled Set if the spinwidget is enabled. Unused. Style_HasFocus Set if the spinwidget has input focus. CC_ComboBox(const QComboBox *) Style_Enabled Set if the combobox is enabled. Unused. Style_HasFocus Set if the combobox has input focus. CC_ScrollBar(const QScrollBar *) Style_Enabled Set if the scrollbar is enabled. Unused. Style_HasFocus Set if the scrollbar has input focus. CC_Slider(const QSlider *) Style_Enabled Set if the slider is enabled. Unused. Style_HasFocus Set if the slider has input focus. CC_ToolButton(const TQToolButton *) Style_Enabled Set if the toolbutton is enabled. TQStyleOption ( ArrowType t ) +& Widget Cast Style Flags Notes Options Notes CC_SpinWidget(const TQSpinWidget *) Style_Enabled Set if the spinwidget is enabled. Unused. Style_HasFocus Set if the spinwidget has input focus. CC_ComboBox(const TQComboBox *) Style_Enabled Set if the combobox is enabled. Unused. Style_HasFocus Set if the combobox has input focus. CC_ScrollBar(const TQScrollBar *) Style_Enabled Set if the scrollbar is enabled. Unused. Style_HasFocus Set if the scrollbar has input focus. CC_Slider(const TQSlider *) Style_Enabled Set if the slider is enabled. Unused. Style_HasFocus Set if the slider has input focus. CC_ToolButton(const TQToolButton *) Style_Enabled Set if the toolbutton is enabled. TQStyleOption ( ArrowType t ) .TP opt.arrowType() When the tool button only contains an arrow, \fIt\fR is the arrow's type. Style_HasFocus Set if the toolbutton has input focus. Style_Down Set if the toolbutton is down (ie. mouse button or space pressed). Style_On Set if the toolbutton is a toggle button and is toggled on. Style_AutoRaise Set if the toolbutton has auto-raise enabled. Style_Raised Set if the button is not down, not on and doesn't contain the mouse when auto-raise is enabled. CC_TitleBar(const TQWidget *) Style_Enabled Set if the titlebar is enabled. Unused. CC_ListView(const QListView *) Style_Enabled Set if the titlebar is enabled. TQStyleOption ( QListViewItem *item ) .TP @@ -822,21 +822,21 @@ The \fIwidget\fR argument is a pointer to a TQWidget or one of its subclasses. T .TS l - l. ControlElement .br -& Widget Cast Style Flags Notes Options Notes CE_PushButton(const QPushButton *) +& Widget Cast Style Flags Notes Options Notes CE_PushButton(const TQPushButton *) .PP and .PP -CE_PushButtonLabel(const QPushButton *) Style_Enabled Set if the button is enabled. Unused. Style_HasFocus Set if the button has input focus. Style_Raised Set if the button is not down, not on and not flat. Style_On Set if the button is a toggle button and toggled on. Style_Down Set if the button is down (i.e., the mouse button or space bar is pressed on the button). Style_ButtonDefault Set if the button is a default button. CE_CheckBox(const QCheckBox *) +CE_PushButtonLabel(const TQPushButton *) Style_Enabled Set if the button is enabled. Unused. Style_HasFocus Set if the button has input focus. Style_Raised Set if the button is not down, not on and not flat. Style_On Set if the button is a toggle button and toggled on. Style_Down Set if the button is down (i.e., the mouse button or space bar is pressed on the button). Style_ButtonDefault Set if the button is a default button. CE_CheckBox(const TQCheckBox *) .PP and .PP -CE_CheckBoxLabel(const QCheckBox *) +CE_CheckBoxLabel(const TQCheckBox *) .PP Style_Enabled Set if the checkbox is enabled. Unused. -Style_HasFocus Set if the checkbox has input focus. Style_On Set if the checkbox is checked. Style_Off Set if the checkbox is not checked. Style_NoChange Set if the checkbox is in the NoChange state. Style_Down Set if the checkbox is down (i.e., the mouse button or space bar is pressed on the button). CE_RadioButton(const QRadioButton *) +Style_HasFocus Set if the checkbox has input focus. Style_On Set if the checkbox is checked. Style_Off Set if the checkbox is not checked. Style_NoChange Set if the checkbox is in the NoChange state. Style_Down Set if the checkbox is down (i.e., the mouse button or space bar is pressed on the button). CE_RadioButton(const TQRadioButton *) .PP and .PP -CE_RadioButtonLabel(const QRadioButton *) Style_Enabled Set if the radiobutton is enabled. Unused. Style_HasFocus Set if the radiobutton has input focus. Style_On Set if the radiobutton is checked. Style_Off Set if the radiobutton is not checked. Style_Down Set if the radiobutton is down (i.e., the mouse button or space bar is pressed on the radiobutton). CE_TabBarTab(const QTabBar *) +CE_RadioButtonLabel(const TQRadioButton *) Style_Enabled Set if the radiobutton is enabled. Unused. Style_HasFocus Set if the radiobutton has input focus. Style_On Set if the radiobutton is checked. Style_Off Set if the radiobutton is not checked. Style_Down Set if the radiobutton is down (i.e., the mouse button or space bar is pressed on the radiobutton). CE_TabBarTab(const QTabBar *) .PP and .PP @@ -939,7 +939,7 @@ Returns the pixel metric for \fImetric\fR. The \fIwidget\fR argument is a pointe .PP <center>.nf .TS -l - l. PixelMetric Widget Cast PM_SliderControlThickness (const QSlider *) PM_SliderLength (const QSlider *) PM_SliderTickmarkOffset (const QSlider *) PM_SliderSpaceAvailable (const QSlider *) PM_TabBarTabOverlap (const QTabBar *) PM_TabBarTabHSpace (const QTabBar *) PM_TabBarTabVSpace (const QTabBar *) PM_TabBarBaseHeight (const QTabBar *) PM_TabBarBaseOverlap +l - l. PixelMetric Widget Cast PM_SliderControlThickness (const TQSlider *) PM_SliderLength (const TQSlider *) PM_SliderTickmarkOffset (const TQSlider *) PM_SliderSpaceAvailable (const TQSlider *) PM_TabBarTabOverlap (const QTabBar *) PM_TabBarTabHSpace (const QTabBar *) PM_TabBarTabVSpace (const QTabBar *) PM_TabBarBaseHeight (const QTabBar *) PM_TabBarBaseOverlap .TE .fi </center> @@ -988,7 +988,7 @@ The \fIwidget\fR argument is a pointer to a TQWidget or one of its subclasses. T .PP <center>.nf .TS -l - l. ContentsType Widget Cast Options Notes CT_PushButton (const QPushButton *) Unused. CT_CheckBox (const QCheckBox *) Unused. CT_RadioButton (const QRadioButton *) Unused. CT_ToolButton (const TQToolButton *) Unused. CT_ComboBox (const QComboBox *) Unused. CT_Splitter (const QSplitter *) Unused. CT_DockWindow (const QDockWindow *) Unused. CT_ProgressBar (const QProgressBar *) Unused. CT_PopupMenuItem (const TQPopupMenu *) TQStyleOption ( TQMenuItem *mi ) +l - l. ContentsType Widget Cast Options Notes CT_PushButton (const TQPushButton *) Unused. CT_CheckBox (const TQCheckBox *) Unused. CT_RadioButton (const TQRadioButton *) Unused. CT_ToolButton (const TQToolButton *) Unused. CT_ComboBox (const TQComboBox *) Unused. CT_Splitter (const QSplitter *) Unused. CT_DockWindow (const QDockWindow *) Unused. CT_ProgressBar (const QProgressBar *) Unused. CT_PopupMenuItem (const TQPopupMenu *) TQStyleOption ( TQMenuItem *mi ) .TP opt.menuItem() .TE @@ -1020,7 +1020,7 @@ The \fIwidget\fR argument is a pointer to a TQWidget or one of its subclasses. T .PP <center>.nf .TS -l - l. SubRect Widget Cast SR_PushButtonContents (const QPushButton *) SR_PushButtonFocusRect (const QPushButton *) SR_CheckBoxIndicator (const QCheckBox *) SR_CheckBoxContents (const QCheckBox *) SR_CheckBoxFocusRect (const QCheckBox *) SR_RadioButtonIndicator (const QRadioButton *) SR_RadioButtonContents (const QRadioButton *) SR_RadioButtonFocusRect (const QRadioButton *) SR_ComboBoxFocusRect (const QComboBox *) SR_DockWindowHandleRect (const TQWidget *) SR_ProgressBarGroove (const QProgressBar *) SR_ProgressBarContents (const QProgressBar *) SR_ProgressBarLabel +l - l. SubRect Widget Cast SR_PushButtonContents (const TQPushButton *) SR_PushButtonFocusRect (const TQPushButton *) SR_CheckBoxIndicator (const TQCheckBox *) SR_CheckBoxContents (const TQCheckBox *) SR_CheckBoxFocusRect (const TQCheckBox *) SR_RadioButtonIndicator (const TQRadioButton *) SR_RadioButtonContents (const TQRadioButton *) SR_RadioButtonFocusRect (const TQRadioButton *) SR_ComboBoxFocusRect (const TQComboBox *) SR_DockWindowHandleRect (const TQWidget *) SR_ProgressBarGroove (const QProgressBar *) SR_ProgressBarContents (const QProgressBar *) SR_ProgressBarLabel .TE .fi </center> diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqstyleoption.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqstyleoption.3qt index e51c82131..7731f990b 100644 --- a/doc/man/man3/tqstyleoption.3qt +++ b/doc/man/man3/tqstyleoption.3qt @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ TQStyleOption \- Optional parameters for TQStyle functions .BI "\fBTQStyleOption\fR ( QListViewItem * i )" .br .ti -1c -.BI "\fBTQStyleOption\fR ( QCheckListItem * i )" +.BI "\fBTQStyleOption\fR ( TQCheckListItem * i )" .br .ti -1c .BI "\fBTQStyleOption\fR ( TQt::ArrowType a )" @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ TQStyleOption \- Optional parameters for TQStyle functions .BI "QTab * \fBtab\fR () const" .br .ti -1c -.BI "QCheckListItem * \fBcheckListItem\fR () const" +.BI "TQCheckListItem * \fBcheckListItem\fR () const" .br .ti -1c .BI "QListViewItem * \fBlistViewItem\fR () const" @@ -152,8 +152,8 @@ Pass a color, \fIc\fR. Pass a QTab, \fIt\fR. .SH "TQStyleOption::TQStyleOption ( QListViewItem * i )" Pass a QListViewItem, \fIi\fR. -.SH "TQStyleOption::TQStyleOption ( QCheckListItem * i )" -Pass a QCheckListItem, \fIi\fR. +.SH "TQStyleOption::TQStyleOption ( TQCheckListItem * i )" +Pass a TQCheckListItem, \fIi\fR. .SH "TQStyleOption::TQStyleOption ( TQt::ArrowType a )" Pass an TQt::ArrowType, \fIa\fR. .SH "TQStyleOption::TQStyleOption ( const TQRect & r )" @@ -162,7 +162,7 @@ Pass a TQRect, \fIr\fR. Pass a TQWidget, \fIw\fR. .SH "TQt::ArrowType TQStyleOption::arrowType () const" Returns an arrow type if the appropriate constructor was called; otherwise the return value is undefined. -.SH "QCheckListItem * TQStyleOption::checkListItem () const" +.SH "TQCheckListItem * TQStyleOption::checkListItem () const" Returns a check list item if the appropriate constructor was called; otherwise the return value is undefined. .SH "const TQColor & TQStyleOption::color () const" Returns a color if the appropriate constructor was called; otherwise the return value is undefined. diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqt.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqt.3qt index 5fcbc99a5..648cf3870 100644 --- a/doc/man/man3/tqt.3qt +++ b/doc/man/man3/tqt.3qt @@ -1052,7 +1052,7 @@ This type is used to signify an object's orientation. .TP \fCQt::Vertical\fR .PP -Orientation is used with QScrollBar for example. +Orientation is used with TQScrollBar for example. .SH "TQt::PaintUnit" .TP \fCQt::PixelUnit\fR @@ -1282,7 +1282,7 @@ There are also a number of flags which you can use to customize the appearance o .TP \fCQt::WStyle_StaysOnTop\fR - informs the window system that the window should stay on top of all other windows. Note that on some window managers on X11 you also have to pass WX11BypassWM for this flag to work correctly. .TP -\fCQt::WStyle_Dialog\fR - indicates that the window is a logical subwindow of its parent (i.e. a dialog). The window will not get its own taskbar entry and will be kept on top of its parent by the window system. Usually it will also be minimized when the parent is minimized. If not customized, the window is decorated with a slightly simpler title bar. This is the flag QDialog uses. +\fCQt::WStyle_Dialog\fR - indicates that the window is a logical subwindow of its parent (i.e. a dialog). The window will not get its own taskbar entry and will be kept on top of its parent by the window system. Usually it will also be minimized when the parent is minimized. If not customized, the window is decorated with a slightly simpler title bar. This is the flag TQDialog uses. .TP \fCQt::WStyle_Splash\fR - indicates that the window is a splash screen. On X11, we try to follow NETWM standard for a splash screen window if the window manager supports is otherwise it is equivalent to WX11BypassWM. On other platforms, it is equivalent to WStyle_NoBorder \fC|\fR WMacNoSheet \fC|\fR WStyle_Tool \fC|\fR WWinOwnDC .PP diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqtabdialog.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqtabdialog.3qt index 1206c06da..6dbc626e7 100644 --- a/doc/man/man3/tqtabdialog.3qt +++ b/doc/man/man3/tqtabdialog.3qt @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ QTabDialog \- Stack of tabbed widgets .SH SYNOPSIS \fC#include <ntqtabdialog.h>\fR .PP -Inherits QDialog. +Inherits TQDialog. .PP .SS "Public Members" .in +1c @@ -188,7 +188,7 @@ Each tab is either enabled or disabled at any given time (see setTabEnabled()). .PP You can change a tab's label and iconset using changeTab(). A tab page can be removed with removePage() and shown with showPage(). The current page is given by currentPage(). .PP -QTabDialog does not support tabs on the sides or bottom, nor can you set or retrieve the visible page. If you need more functionality than QTabDialog provides, consider creating a QDialog and using a QTabBar with QTabWidgets. +QTabDialog does not support tabs on the sides or bottom, nor can you set or retrieve the visible page. If you need more functionality than QTabDialog provides, consider creating a TQDialog and using a QTabBar with QTabWidgets. .PP Most of the functionality in QTabDialog is provided by a QTabWidget. .PP @@ -199,10 +199,10 @@ Most of the functionality in QTabDialog is provided by a QTabWidget. .ce 1 .B "[Image Omitted]" .PP -See also QDialog and Dialog Classes. +See also TQDialog and Dialog Classes. .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION .SH "QTabDialog::QTabDialog ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = FALSE, WFlags f = 0 )" -Constructs a QTabDialog with only an OK button. The \fIparent\fR, \fIname\fR, \fImodal\fR and widget flag, \fIf\fR, arguments are passed on to the QDialog constructor. +Constructs a QTabDialog with only an OK button. The \fIparent\fR, \fIname\fR, \fImodal\fR and widget flag, \fIf\fR, arguments are passed on to the TQDialog constructor. .SH "QTabDialog::~QTabDialog ()" Destroys the tab dialog. .SH "void QTabDialog::aboutToShow ()\fC [signal]\fR" @@ -238,7 +238,7 @@ It should be connected to a slot (or several slots) that change the application' .PP See also cancelButtonPressed(), defaultButtonPressed(), and setApplyButton(). .SH "void QTabDialog::cancelButtonPressed ()\fC [signal]\fR" -This signal is emitted when the Cancel button is clicked. It is automatically connected to QDialog::reject(), which will hide the dialog. +This signal is emitted when the Cancel button is clicked. It is automatically connected to TQDialog::reject(), which will hide the dialog. .PP The Cancel button should not change the application's state at all, so you should generally not need to connect it to any slot. .PP diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqtable.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqtable.3qt index 42d62234a..54930c9a4 100644 --- a/doc/man/man3/tqtable.3qt +++ b/doc/man/man3/tqtable.3qt @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ QTable \- Flexible editable table widget .SH SYNOPSIS \fC#include <ntqtable.h>\fR .PP -Inherits QScrollView. +Inherits TQScrollView. .PP Inherited by TQDataTable. .PP @@ -489,9 +489,9 @@ QTable is easy to use, although it does have a large API because of the comprehe .br .fi .PP -The first line constructs the table specifying its size in rows and columns. We then insert a pixmap and some text into the \fIsame\fR cell, with the pixmap appearing to the left of the text. QTable cells can be populated with QTableItems, QComboTableItems or by QCheckTableItems. By default a vertical header appears at the left of the table showing row numbers and a horizontal header appears at the top of the table showing column numbers. (The numbers displayed start at 1, although row and column numbers within QTable begin at 0.) +The first line constructs the table specifying its size in rows and columns. We then insert a pixmap and some text into the \fIsame\fR cell, with the pixmap appearing to the left of the text. QTable cells can be populated with QTableItems, TQComboTableItems or by TQCheckTableItems. By default a vertical header appears at the left of the table showing row numbers and a horizontal header appears at the top of the table showing column numbers. (The numbers displayed start at 1, although row and column numbers within QTable begin at 0.) .PP -If you want to use mouse tracking call setMouseTracking( TRUE ) on the \fIviewport\fR; (see QScrollView). +If you want to use mouse tracking call setMouseTracking( TRUE ) on the \fIviewport\fR; (see TQScrollView). .PP <center> .ce 1 @@ -521,21 +521,21 @@ All of a QTable's cells are empty when the table is constructed. .PP There are two approaches to populating the table's cells. The first and simplest approach is to use QTableItems or QTableItem subclasses. The second approach doesn't use QTableItems at all which is useful for very large sparse tables but requires you to reimplement a number of functions. We'll look at each approach in turn. .PP -To put a string in a cell use setText(). This function will create a new QTableItem for the cell if one doesn't already exist, and displays the text in it. By default the table item's widget will be a QLineEdit. A pixmap may be put in a cell with setPixmap(), which also creates a table item if required. A cell may contain \fIboth\fR a pixmap and text; the pixmap is displayed to the left of the text. Another approach is to construct a QTableItem or QTableItem subclass, set its properties, then insert it into a cell with setItem(). +To put a string in a cell use setText(). This function will create a new QTableItem for the cell if one doesn't already exist, and displays the text in it. By default the table item's widget will be a TQLineEdit. A pixmap may be put in a cell with setPixmap(), which also creates a table item if required. A cell may contain \fIboth\fR a pixmap and text; the pixmap is displayed to the left of the text. Another approach is to construct a QTableItem or QTableItem subclass, set its properties, then insert it into a cell with setItem(). .PP -If you want cells which contain comboboxes use the QComboTableItem class. Similarly if you require cells containing checkboxes use the QCheckTableItem class. These table items look and behave just like the combobox or checkbox widgets but consume far less memory. +If you want cells which contain comboboxes use the TQComboTableItem class. Similarly if you require cells containing checkboxes use the TQCheckTableItem class. These table items look and behave just like the combobox or checkbox widgets but consume far less memory. .PP .nf .br for ( int j = 0; j < numRows; ++j ) .br - table.setItem( j, 1, new QCheckTableItem( &table, "Check me" ) ); + table.setItem( j, 1, new TQCheckTableItem( &table, "Check me" ) ); .fi -In the example above we create a column of QCheckTableItems and insert them into the table using setItem(). +In the example above we create a column of TQCheckTableItems and insert them into the table using setItem(). .PP QTable takes ownership of its QTableItems and will delete them when the table itself is destroyed. You can take ownership of a table item using takeItem() which you use to move a cell's contents from one cell to another, either within the same table, or from one table to another. (See also, swapCells()). .PP -In-place editing of the text in QTableItems, and the values in QComboTableItems and QCheckTableItems works automatically. Cells may be editable or read-only, see QTableItem::EditType. If you want fine control over editing see beginEdit() and endEdit(). +In-place editing of the text in QTableItems, and the values in TQComboTableItems and TQCheckTableItems works automatically. Cells may be editable or read-only, see QTableItem::EditType. If you want fine control over editing see beginEdit() and endEdit(). .PP The contents of a cell can be retrieved as a QTableItem using item(), or as a string with text() or as a pixmap (if there is one) with pixmap(). A cell's bounding rectangle is given by cellGeometry(). Use updateCell() to repaint a cell, for example to clear away a cell's visual representation after it has been deleted with clearCell(). The table can be forced to scroll to show a particular cell with ensureCellVisible(). The isSelected() function indicates if a cell is selected. .PP @@ -600,7 +600,7 @@ See also TQWidget::clearWFlags() and TQt::WidgetFlags. .SH "QTable::QTable ( int numRows, int numCols, TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )" Constructs an empty table called \fIname\fR with \fInumRows\fR rows and \fInumCols\fR columns. The table is a child of \fIparent\fR. .PP -If you're using QTableItems to populate the table's cells, you can create QTableItem, QComboTableItem and QCheckTableItem items and insert them into the table using setItem(). (See the notes on large tables for an alternative to using QTableItems.) +If you're using QTableItems to populate the table's cells, you can create QTableItem, TQComboTableItem and TQCheckTableItem items and insert them into the table using setItem(). (See the notes on large tables for an alternative to using QTableItems.) .PP See also TQWidget::clearWFlags() and TQt::WidgetFlags. .SH "QTable::~QTable ()" @@ -698,21 +698,21 @@ This event handler is called whenever a QTable object receives a TQDragEnterEven .PP The focus is moved to the cell where the TQDragEnterEvent occurred. .PP -Reimplemented from QScrollView. +Reimplemented from TQScrollView. .SH "void QTable::contentsDragLeaveEvent ( TQDragLeaveEvent * e )\fC [virtual protected]\fR" This event handler is called when a drag activity leaves \fIthis\fR QTable object with event \fIe\fR. .PP -Reimplemented from QScrollView. +Reimplemented from TQScrollView. .SH "void QTable::contentsDragMoveEvent ( TQDragMoveEvent * e )\fC [virtual protected]\fR" This event handler is called whenever a QTable object receives a TQDragMoveEvent \fIe\fR, i.e. when the user actually drags the mouse. .PP The focus is moved to the cell where the TQDragMoveEvent occurred. .PP -Reimplemented from QScrollView. +Reimplemented from TQScrollView. .SH "void QTable::contentsDropEvent ( TQDropEvent * e )\fC [virtual protected]\fR" This event handler is called when the user ends a drag and drop by dropping something onto \fIthis\fR QTable and thus triggers the drop event, \fIe\fR. .PP -Reimplemented from QScrollView. +Reimplemented from TQScrollView. .SH "void QTable::contextMenuRequested ( int row, int col, const TQPoint & pos )\fC [signal]\fR" This signal is emitted when the user invokes a context menu with the right mouse button (or with a system-specific keypress). The cell where the event took place is at \fIrow\fR, \fIcol\fR. \fIpos\fR is the position where the context menu will appear in the global coordinate system. This signal is always emitted, even if the contents of the cell are disabled. .SH "TQWidget * QTable::createEditor ( int row, int col, bool initFromCell ) const\fC [virtual protected]\fR" @@ -720,11 +720,11 @@ This function returns the widget which should be used as an editor for the conte .PP If \fIinitFromCell\fR is TRUE, the editor is used to edit the current contents of the cell (so the editor widget should be initialized with this content). If \fIinitFromCell\fR is FALSE, the content of the cell is replaced with the new content which the user entered into the widget created by this function. .PP -The default functionality is as follows: if \fIinitFromCell\fR is TRUE or the cell has a QTableItem and the table item's QTableItem::isReplaceable() is FALSE then the cell is asked to create an appropriate editor (using QTableItem::createEditor()). Otherwise a QLineEdit is used as the editor. +The default functionality is as follows: if \fIinitFromCell\fR is TRUE or the cell has a QTableItem and the table item's QTableItem::isReplaceable() is FALSE then the cell is asked to create an appropriate editor (using QTableItem::createEditor()). Otherwise a TQLineEdit is used as the editor. .PP If you want to create your own editor for certain cells, implement a custom QTableItem subclass and reimplement QTableItem::createEditor(). .PP -If you are not using QTableItems and you don't want to use a QLineEdit as the default editor, subclass QTable and reimplement this function with code like this: +If you are not using QTableItems and you don't want to use a TQLineEdit as the default editor, subclass QTable and reimplement this function with code like this: .PP .nf .br @@ -789,7 +789,7 @@ Draws the table contents on the painter \fIp\fR. This function is optimized so t .PP Additionally, drawContents() highlights the current cell. .PP -Reimplemented from QScrollView. +Reimplemented from TQScrollView. .SH "void QTable::dropped ( TQDropEvent * e )\fC [signal]\fR" This signal is emitted when a drop event occurred on the table. .PP @@ -1138,7 +1138,7 @@ Sets the pixmap in the cell at \fIrow\fR, \fIcol\fR to \fIpix\fR. .PP If the cell does not contain a table item a QTableItem is created with an EditType of \fCOnTyping\fR, otherwise the existing table item's pixmap (if any) is replaced with \fIpix\fR. .PP -Note that QComboTableItems and QCheckTableItems don't show pixmaps. +Note that TQComboTableItems and TQCheckTableItems don't show pixmaps. .PP See also pixmap(), setText(), setItem(), and QTableItem::setPixmap(). .PP diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqtableitem.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqtableitem.3qt index 563a3908d..94edc175d 100644 --- a/doc/man/man3/tqtableitem.3qt +++ b/doc/man/man3/tqtableitem.3qt @@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ QTableItem \- The cell content for QTable cells .PP Inherits Qt. .PP -Inherited by QComboTableItem and QCheckTableItem. +Inherited by TQComboTableItem and TQCheckTableItem. .PP .SS "Public Members" .in +1c @@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ The QTableItem class provides the cell content for QTable cells. .PP For many applications QTableItems are ideal for presenting and editing the contents of QTable cells. In situations where you need to create very large tables you may prefer an alternative approach to using QTableItems: see the notes on large tables. .PP -A QTableItem contains a cell's data, by default, a string and a pixmap. The table item also holds the cell's display size and how the data should be aligned. The table item specifies the cell's EditType and the editor used for in-place editing (by default a QLineEdit). If you want checkboxes use QCheckTableItem, and if you want comboboxes use QComboTableItem. The EditType (set in the constructor) determines whether the cell's contents may be edited. +A QTableItem contains a cell's data, by default, a string and a pixmap. The table item also holds the cell's display size and how the data should be aligned. The table item specifies the cell's EditType and the editor used for in-place editing (by default a TQLineEdit). If you want checkboxes use TQCheckTableItem, and if you want comboboxes use TQComboTableItem. The EditType (set in the constructor) determines whether the cell's contents may be edited. .PP If a pixmap is specified it is displayed to the left of any text. You can change the text or pixmap with setText() and setPixmap() respectively. For text you can use setWordWrap(). .PP @@ -148,9 +148,9 @@ Table items can be deleted with delete in the standard way; the table and cell w .PP Note, that if you have a table item that is not currently in a table then anything you do to that item other than insert it into a table will result in undefined behaviour. .PP -Reimplement createEditor() and setContentFromEditor() if you want to use your own widget instead of a QLineEdit for editing cell contents. Reimplement paint() if you want to display custom content. +Reimplement createEditor() and setContentFromEditor() if you want to use your own widget instead of a TQLineEdit for editing cell contents. Reimplement paint() if you want to display custom content. .PP -It is important to ensure that your custom widget can accept the keyboard focus, so that the user can use the tab key to navigate the table as normal. Therefore, if the widget returned by createEditor() does not itself accept the keyboard focus, it is necessary to nominate a child widget to do so on its behalf. For example, a QHBox with two child QLineEdit widgets may use one of them to accept the keyboard focus: +It is important to ensure that your custom widget can accept the keyboard focus, so that the user can use the tab key to navigate the table as normal. Therefore, if the widget returned by createEditor() does not itself accept the keyboard focus, it is necessary to nominate a child widget to do so on its behalf. For example, a QHBox with two child TQLineEdit widgets may use one of them to accept the keyboard focus: .PP .nf .br @@ -160,9 +160,9 @@ It is important to ensure that your custom widget can accept the keyboard focus, .br QHBox* hbox = new QHBox( table()->viewport() ); .br - hbox->setFocusProxy(new QLineEdit( hbox )); + hbox->setFocusProxy(new TQLineEdit( hbox )); .br - new QLineEdit( hbox ); + new TQLineEdit( hbox ); .br return hbox; .br @@ -178,7 +178,7 @@ By default, table items may be replaced by new QTableItems during the lifetime o .PP </center> .PP -See also QCheckTableItem, QComboTableItem, and Advanced Widgets. +See also TQCheckTableItem, TQComboTableItem, and Advanced Widgets. .PP .SS "Member Type Documentation" .SH "QTableItem::EditType" @@ -186,7 +186,7 @@ This enum is used to define whether a cell is editable or read-only (in conjunct .TP \fCQTableItem::Always\fR - The cell always \fIlooks\fR editable. .PP -Using this EditType ensures that the editor created with createEditor() (by default a QLineEdit) is always visible. This has implications for the alignment of the content: the default editor aligns everything (even numbers) to the left whilst numerical values in the cell are by default aligned to the right. +Using this EditType ensures that the editor created with createEditor() (by default a TQLineEdit) is always visible. This has implications for the alignment of the content: the default editor aligns everything (even numbers) to the left whilst numerical values in the cell are by default aligned to the right. .PP If a cell with the edit type Always looks misaligned you could reimplement createEditor() for these items. .TP @@ -200,25 +200,25 @@ The OnTyping edit type is the default when QTableItem objects are created by the .PP The cell is actually editable only if QTable::isRowReadOnly() is FALSE for its row, QTable::isColumnReadOnly() is FALSE for its column, and QTable::isReadOnly() is FALSE. .PP -QComboTableItems have an isEditable() property. This property is used to indicate whether the user may enter their own text or are restricted to choosing one of the choices in the list. QComboTableItems may be interacted with only if they are editable in accordance with their EditType as described above. +TQComboTableItems have an isEditable() property. This property is used to indicate whether the user may enter their own text or are restricted to choosing one of the choices in the list. TQComboTableItems may be interacted with only if they are editable in accordance with their EditType as described above. .PP .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION .SH "QTableItem::QTableItem ( QTable * table, EditType et )" Creates a table item that is a child of table \fItable\fR with no text. The item has the EditType \fIet\fR. .PP -The table item will use a QLineEdit for its editor, will not word-wrap and will occupy a single cell. Insert the table item into a table with QTable::setItem(). +The table item will use a TQLineEdit for its editor, will not word-wrap and will occupy a single cell. Insert the table item into a table with QTable::setItem(). .PP The table takes ownership of the table item, so a table item should not be inserted into more than one table at a time. .SH "QTableItem::QTableItem ( QTable * table, EditType et, const TQString & text )" Creates a table item that is a child of table \fItable\fR with text \fItext\fR. The item has the EditType \fIet\fR. .PP -The table item will use a QLineEdit for its editor, will not word-wrap and will occupy a single cell. Insert the table item into a table with QTable::setItem(). +The table item will use a TQLineEdit for its editor, will not word-wrap and will occupy a single cell. Insert the table item into a table with QTable::setItem(). .PP The table takes ownership of the table item, so a table item should not be inserted into more than one table at a time. .SH "QTableItem::QTableItem ( QTable * table, EditType et, const TQString & text, const TQPixmap & p )" Creates a table item that is a child of table \fItable\fR with text \fItext\fR and pixmap \fIp\fR. The item has the EditType \fIet\fR. .PP -The table item will display the pixmap to the left of the text. It will use a QLineEdit for editing the text, will not word-wrap and will occupy a single cell. Insert the table item into a table with QTable::setItem(). +The table item will display the pixmap to the left of the text. It will use a TQLineEdit for editing the text, will not word-wrap and will occupy a single cell. Insert the table item into a table with QTable::setItem(). .PP The table takes ownership of the table item, so a table item should not be inserted in more than one table at a time. .SH "QTableItem::~QTableItem ()\fC [virtual]\fR" @@ -240,7 +240,7 @@ Returns the column span of the table item, usually 1. .PP See also setSpan() and rowSpan(). .SH "TQWidget * QTableItem::createEditor () const\fC [virtual]\fR" -This virtual function creates an editor which the user can interact with to edit the cell's contents. The default implementation creates a QLineEdit. +This virtual function creates an editor which the user can interact with to edit the cell's contents. The default implementation creates a TQLineEdit. .PP If the function returns 0, the cell is read-only. .PP @@ -256,7 +256,7 @@ If you reimplement this function you'll almost certainly need to reimplement set .br // create an editor - a combobox in our case .br - ( (ComboItem*)this )->cb = new QComboBox( table()->viewport() ); + ( (ComboItem*)this )->cb = new TQComboBox( table()->viewport() ); .br TQObject::connect( cb, TQ_SIGNAL( activated( int ) ), table(), TQ_SLOT( doValueChanged() ) ); .br @@ -335,9 +335,9 @@ Returns the Run Time Type Identification value for this table item which for QTa .PP When you create subclasses based on QTableItem make sure that each subclass returns a unique rtti() value. It is advisable to use values greater than 1000, preferably large random numbers, to allow for extensions to this class. .PP -See also QCheckTableItem::rtti() and QComboTableItem::rtti(). +See also TQCheckTableItem::rtti() and TQComboTableItem::rtti(). .PP -Reimplemented in QComboTableItem and QCheckTableItem. +Reimplemented in TQComboTableItem and TQCheckTableItem. .SH "void QTableItem::setCol ( int c )\fC [virtual]\fR" Sets column \fIc\fR as the table item's column. Usually you will not need to call this function. .PP @@ -347,7 +347,7 @@ See also col(), setRow(), and colSpan(). .SH "void QTableItem::setContentFromEditor ( TQWidget * w )\fC [virtual]\fR" Whenever the content of a cell has been edited by the editor \fIw\fR, QTable calls this virtual function to copy the new values into the QTableItem. .PP -If you reimplement createEditor() and return something that is not a QLineEdit you will need to reimplement this function. +If you reimplement createEditor() and return something that is not a TQLineEdit you will need to reimplement this function. .PP .nf .br @@ -359,9 +359,9 @@ If you reimplement createEditor() and return something that is not a QLineEdit y .br // value of the item (its text), with the value of the combobox .br - if ( w->inherits( "QComboBox" ) ) + if ( w->inherits( "TQComboBox" ) ) .br - setText( ( (QComboBox*)w )->currentText() ); + setText( ( (TQComboBox*)w )->currentText() ); .br else .br @@ -382,7 +382,7 @@ Sets pixmap \fIp\fR to be this item's pixmap. .PP Note that setPixmap() does not update the cell the table item belongs to. Use QTable::updateCell() to repaint the cell's contents. .PP -For QComboTableItems and QCheckTableItems this function has no visible effect. +For TQComboTableItems and TQCheckTableItems this function has no visible effect. .PP See also QTable::setPixmap(), pixmap(), and setText(). .SH "void QTableItem::setReplaceable ( bool b )\fC [virtual]\fR" @@ -430,7 +430,7 @@ To ensure that the current value of the editor is returned, setContentFromEditor .TP if the editMode() is Always, or .TP -if editMode() is \fInot\fR Always but the editor of the cell is active and the editor is not a QLineEdit. +if editMode() is \fInot\fR Always but the editor of the cell is active and the editor is not a TQLineEdit. .PP This means that text() returns the original text value of the item if the editor is a line edit, until the user commits an edit (e.g. by pressing Enter or Tab) in which case the new text is returned. For other editors (e.g. a combobox) setContentFromEditor() is always called so the currently display value is the one returned. .PP diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqtextedit.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqtextedit.3qt index b990e3b25..3da294e96 100644 --- a/doc/man/man3/tqtextedit.3qt +++ b/doc/man/man3/tqtextedit.3qt @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ TQTextEdit \- Powerful single-page rich text editor .SH SYNOPSIS \fC#include <tqtextedit.h>\fR .PP -Inherits QScrollView. +Inherits TQScrollView. .PP Inherited by QMultiLineEdit, TQTextBrowser, and TQTextView. .PP @@ -924,7 +924,7 @@ Reimplemented to allow tabbing through links. If \fIn\fR is TRUE the tab moves t .SH "TQFont TQTextEdit::font () const" \fBThis function is obsolete.\fR It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code. .PP -Returns QScrollView::font() +Returns TQScrollView::font() .PP \fBWarning:\fR In previous versions this function returned the font of the current format. This lead to confusion. Please use currentFont() instead. .PP diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqtoolbar.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqtoolbar.3qt index cc5f6d130..3db564029 100644 --- a/doc/man/man3/tqtoolbar.3qt +++ b/doc/man/man3/tqtoolbar.3qt @@ -71,13 +71,13 @@ To use TQToolBar you simply create a TQToolBar as a child of a TQMainWindow, cre .PP This extract from the application/application.cpp example shows the creation of a new toolbar as a child of a TQMainWindow and adding two TQActions. .PP -You may use most widgets within a toolbar, with TQToolButton and QComboBox being the most common. +You may use most widgets within a toolbar, with TQToolButton and TQComboBox being the most common. .PP If you create a new widget on an already visible TQToolBar, this widget will automatically become visible without needing a show() call. (This differs from every other TQt widget container. We recommend calling show() anyway since we hope to fix this anomaly in a future release.) .PP TQToolBars, like QDockWindows, are located in QDockAreas or float as top-level windows. TQMainWindow provides four QDockAreas (top, left, right and bottom). When you create a new toolbar (as in the example above) as a child of a TQMainWindow the toolbar will be added to the top dock area. You can move it to another dock area (or float it) by calling TQMainWindow::moveDockWindow(). QDock areas lay out their windows in Lines. .PP -If the main window is resized so that the area occupied by the toolbar is too small to show all its widgets a little arrow button (which looks like a right-pointing chevron, '»') will appear at the right or bottom of the toolbar depending on its orientation. Clicking this button pops up a menu that shows the 'overflowing' items. TQToolButtons are represented in the menu using their textLabel property, other QButton subclasses are represented using their text property, and QComboBoxes are represented as submenus, with the caption text being used in the submenu item. +If the main window is resized so that the area occupied by the toolbar is too small to show all its widgets a little arrow button (which looks like a right-pointing chevron, '»') will appear at the right or bottom of the toolbar depending on its orientation. Clicking this button pops up a menu that shows the 'overflowing' items. TQToolButtons are represented in the menu using their textLabel property, other QButton subclasses are represented using their text property, and TQComboBoxes are represented as submenus, with the caption text being used in the submenu item. .PP Usually a toolbar will get precisely the space it needs. However, with setHorizontalStretchable(), setVerticalStretchable() or setStretchableWidget() you can tell the main window to expand the toolbar to fill all available space in the specified orientation. .PP diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqtoolbutton.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqtoolbutton.3qt index 608b2ea2b..58007a990 100644 --- a/doc/man/man3/tqtoolbutton.3qt +++ b/doc/man/man3/tqtoolbutton.3qt @@ -158,7 +158,7 @@ A tool button can offer additional choices in a popup menu. The feature is somet .PP </center> TQToolbar with TQToolbuttons .PP -See also QPushButton, TQToolBar, TQMainWindow, GUI Design Handbook: Push Button, and Basic Widgets. +See also TQPushButton, TQToolBar, TQMainWindow, GUI Design Handbook: Push Button, and Basic Widgets. .SS "Member Type Documentation" .SH "TQToolButton::TextPosition" The position of the tool button's textLabel in relation to the tool button's icon. diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqvalidator.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqvalidator.3qt index c62519dad..b0d607cd1 100644 --- a/doc/man/man3/tqvalidator.3qt +++ b/doc/man/man3/tqvalidator.3qt @@ -56,9 +56,9 @@ For an editable combobox that accepts URLs, any well-formed URL is Acceptable, " For a spin box that accepts lengths, "11cm" and "1in" are Acceptable, "11" and the empty string are Intermediate and" http://www.trolltech.com" and "hour" are Invalid. .IP .PP -fixup() is provided for validators that can repair some user errors. The default implementation does nothing. QLineEdit, for example, will call fixup() if the user presses Enter (or Return) and the content is not currently valid. This allows the fixup() function the opportunity of performing some magic to make an Invalid string Acceptable. +fixup() is provided for validators that can repair some user errors. The default implementation does nothing. TQLineEdit, for example, will call fixup() if the user presses Enter (or Return) and the content is not currently valid. This allows the fixup() function the opportunity of performing some magic to make an Invalid string Acceptable. .PP -QValidator is typically used with QLineEdit, QSpinBox and QComboBox. +QValidator is typically used with TQLineEdit, TQSpinBox and TQComboBox. .PP See also Miscellaneous Classes. .SS "Member Type Documentation" diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqwidget.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqwidget.3qt index 9eb3ada21..5fc7aa322 100644 --- a/doc/man/man3/tqwidget.3qt +++ b/doc/man/man3/tqwidget.3qt @@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ TQWidget \- The base class of all user interface objects .PP Inherits TQObject and TQPaintDevice. .PP -Inherited by QButton, QFrame, QDialog, QComboBox, TQDataBrowser, TQDataView, TQDateTimeEditBase, TQDateTimeEdit, TQDesktopWidget, QDial, QDockArea, TQGLWidget, QHeader, TQMainWindow, QMotifWidget, QNPWidget, QScrollBar, TQSizeGrip, QSlider, QSpinBox, QSplashScreen, TQStatusBar, QTabBar, QTabWidget, TQWorkspace, and QXtWidget. +Inherited by QButton, QFrame, TQDialog, TQComboBox, TQDataBrowser, TQDataView, TQDateTimeEditBase, TQDateTimeEdit, TQDesktopWidget, TQDial, QDockArea, TQGLWidget, QHeader, TQMainWindow, QMotifWidget, QNPWidget, TQScrollBar, TQSizeGrip, TQSlider, TQSpinBox, QSplashScreen, TQStatusBar, QTabBar, QTabWidget, TQWorkspace, and QXtWidget. .PP .SS "Public Members" .in +1c @@ -998,15 +998,15 @@ The TQWidget class is the base class of all user interface objects. .PP The widget is the atom of the user interface: it receives mouse, keyboard and other events from the window system, and paints a representation of itself on the screen. Every widget is rectangular, and they are sorted in a Z-order. A widget is clipped by its parent and by the widgets in front of it. .PP -A widget that isn't embedded in a parent widget is called a top-level widget. Usually, top-level widgets are windows with a frame and a title bar (although it is also possible to create top-level widgets without such decoration if suitable widget flags are used). In Qt, TQMainWindow and the various subclasses of QDialog are the most common top-level windows. +A widget that isn't embedded in a parent widget is called a top-level widget. Usually, top-level widgets are windows with a frame and a title bar (although it is also possible to create top-level widgets without such decoration if suitable widget flags are used). In Qt, TQMainWindow and the various subclasses of TQDialog are the most common top-level windows. .PP A widget without a parent widget is always a top-level widget. .PP -Non-top-level widgets are child widgets. These are child windows in their parent widgets. You cannot usually distinguish a child widget from its parent visually. Most other widgets in TQt are useful only as child widgets. (It is possible to make, say, a button into a top-level widget, but most people prefer to put their buttons inside other widgets, e.g. QDialog.) +Non-top-level widgets are child widgets. These are child windows in their parent widgets. You cannot usually distinguish a child widget from its parent visually. Most other widgets in TQt are useful only as child widgets. (It is possible to make, say, a button into a top-level widget, but most people prefer to put their buttons inside other widgets, e.g. TQDialog.) .PP If you want to use a TQWidget to hold child widgets you will probably want to add a layout to the parent TQWidget. (See Layouts.) .PP -TQWidget has many member functions, but some of them have little direct functionality: for example, TQWidget has a font property, but never uses this itself. There are many subclasses which provide real functionality, such as QPushButton, QListBox and QTabDialog, etc. +TQWidget has many member functions, but some of them have little direct functionality: for example, TQWidget has a font property, but never uses this itself. There are many subclasses which provide real functionality, such as TQPushButton, QListBox and QTabDialog, etc. .SH "Groups of functions:" <center>.nf .TS @@ -1413,7 +1413,7 @@ Sometimes, you will want to reimplement this function. For example, a web browse .PP Child widgets call focusNextPrevChild() on their parent widgets, but only the top-level widget decides where to redirect focus. By overriding this method for an object, you thus gain control of focus traversal for all child widgets. .PP -\fBWarning:\fR QScrollView uses it own logic for this function, which does the right thing in most cases. But if you are using a QScrollView and want complete control of the focus chain you'll need to override QScrollView::focusNextPrevChild() and your top-level widgets' focusNextPrevChild() functions. +\fBWarning:\fR TQScrollView uses it own logic for this function, which does the right thing in most cases. But if you are using a TQScrollView and want complete control of the focus chain you'll need to override TQScrollView::focusNextPrevChild() and your top-level widgets' focusNextPrevChild() functions. .PP See also focusData(). .SH "void TQWidget::focusOutEvent ( QFocusEvent * )\fC [virtual protected]\fR" @@ -1533,7 +1533,7 @@ Hide events are sent to widgets immediately after they have been hidden. .PP See also event() and QHideEvent. .PP -Reimplemented in QScrollBar. +Reimplemented in TQScrollBar. .SH "const TQPixmap * TQWidget::icon () const" Returns the widget's icon. See the "icon" property for details. .SH "TQString TQWidget::iconText () const" @@ -1629,7 +1629,7 @@ See also keyReleaseEvent(), QKeyEvent::ignore(), focusPolicy, focusInEvent(), fo .PP Example: picture/picture.cpp. .PP -Reimplemented in QLineEdit and TQTextEdit. +Reimplemented in TQLineEdit and TQTextEdit. .SH "void TQWidget::keyReleaseEvent ( QKeyEvent * e )\fC [virtual protected]\fR" This event handler, for event \fIe\fR, can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive key release events for the widget. .PP @@ -1726,7 +1726,7 @@ Returns the widget's minimum size. See the "minimumSize" property for details. .SH "TQSize TQWidget::minimumSizeHint () const\fC [virtual]\fR" Returns the recommended minimum size for the widget. See the "minimumSizeHint" property for details. .PP -Reimplemented in QLineEdit. +Reimplemented in TQLineEdit. .SH "int TQWidget::minimumWidth () const" Returns the widget's minimum width. See the "minimumWidth" property for details. .SH "void TQWidget::mouseDoubleClickEvent ( QMouseEvent * e )\fC [virtual protected]\fR" @@ -1957,7 +1957,7 @@ Scrolls the widget including its children \fIdx\fR pixels to the right and \fIdy .PP After scrolling, scroll() sends a paint event for the the part that is read but not written. For example, when scrolling 10 pixels rightwards, the leftmost ten pixels of the widget need repainting. The paint event may be delivered immediately or later, depending on some heuristics (note that you might have to force processing of paint events using QApplication::sendPostedEvents() when using scroll() and move() in combination). .PP -See also QScrollView, erase(), and bitBlt(). +See also TQScrollView, erase(), and bitBlt(). .SH "void TQWidget::scroll ( int dx, int dy, const TQRect & r )" This is an overloaded member function, provided for convenience. It behaves essentially like the above function. .PP @@ -1965,7 +1965,7 @@ This version only scrolls \fIr\fR and does not move the children of the widget. .PP If \fIr\fR is empty or invalid, the result is undefined. .PP -See also QScrollView, erase(), and bitBlt(). +See also TQScrollView, erase(), and bitBlt(). .SH "void TQWidget::setAcceptDrops ( bool on )\fC [virtual]\fR" Sets whether drop events are enabled for this widget to \fIon\fR. See the "acceptDrops" property for details. .SH "void TQWidget::setActiveWindow ()\fC [virtual]\fR" @@ -2071,7 +2071,7 @@ Sets the way the widget accepts keyboard focus. See the "focusPolicy" property f .SH "void TQWidget::setFocusProxy ( TQWidget * w )\fC [virtual]\fR" Sets the widget's focus proxy to widget \fIw\fR. If \fIw\fR is 0, the function resets this widget to have no focus proxy. .PP -Some widgets, such as QComboBox, can "have focus", but create a child widget to actually handle the focus. QComboBox, for example, creates a QLineEdit which handles the focus. +Some widgets, such as TQComboBox, can "have focus", but create a child widget to actually handle the focus. TQComboBox, for example, creates a TQLineEdit which handles the focus. .PP setFocusProxy() sets the widget which will actually get focus when" this widget" gets it. If there is a focus proxy, focusPolicy(), setFocusPolicy(), setFocus() and hasFocus() all operate on the focus proxy. .PP @@ -2079,7 +2079,7 @@ See also focusProxy(). .SH "void TQWidget::setFont ( const TQFont & )\fC [virtual]\fR" Sets the font currently set for the widget. See the "font" property for details. .PP -Reimplemented in QComboBox, TQLabel, and QTabDialog. +Reimplemented in TQComboBox, TQLabel, and QTabDialog. .SH "void TQWidget::setFont ( const TQFont & f, bool )" \fBThis function is obsolete.\fR It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code. .PP @@ -2101,7 +2101,7 @@ Sets enables or disables the use of input methods for this widget to \fIb\fR. Se .SH "void TQWidget::setKeyCompression ( bool compress )\fC [virtual protected]\fR" Enables key event compression, if \fIcompress\fR is TRUE, and disables it if \fIcompress\fR is FALSE. .PP -Key compression is off by default (except for QLineEdit and TQTextEdit), so widgets receive one key press event for each key press (or more, since autorepeat is usually on). If you turn it on and your program doesn't keep up with key input, TQt may try to compress key events so that more than one character can be processed in each event. +Key compression is off by default (except for TQLineEdit and TQTextEdit), so widgets receive one key press event for each key press (or more, since autorepeat is usually on). If you turn it on and your program doesn't keep up with key input, TQt may try to compress key events so that more than one character can be processed in each event. .PP For example, a word processor widget might receive 2, 3 or more characters in each QKeyEvent::text(), if the layout recalculation takes too long for the CPU. .PP @@ -2167,7 +2167,7 @@ Sets whether mouse tracking is enabled for the widget to \fIenable\fR. See the " .SH "void TQWidget::setPalette ( const TQPalette & )\fC [virtual]\fR" Sets the widget's palette. See the "palette" property for details. .PP -Reimplemented in QComboBox, QScrollBar, and QSlider. +Reimplemented in TQComboBox, TQScrollBar, and TQSlider. .SH "void TQWidget::setPalette ( const TQPalette & p, bool )" \fBThis function is obsolete.\fR It is provided to keep old source working. We strongly advise against using it in new code. .PP @@ -2287,7 +2287,7 @@ See also showEvent(), hide(), showMinimized(), showMaximized(), showNormal(), vi Examples: .)l aclock/main.cpp, life/main.cpp, popup/popup.cpp, t1/main.cpp, t3/main.cpp, t4/main.cpp, and toplevel/options.ui.h. .PP -Reimplemented in QDialog and TQMenuBar. +Reimplemented in TQDialog and TQMenuBar. .SH "void TQWidget::showEvent ( QShowEvent * )\fC [virtual protected]\fR" This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive widget show events. .PP @@ -2678,7 +2678,7 @@ This property holds whether the widget accepts keyboard focus. .PP Keyboard focus is initially disabled (i.e. focusPolicy() == TQWidget::NoFocus). .PP -You must enable keyboard focus for a widget if it processes keyboard events. This is normally done from the widget's constructor. For instance, the QLineEdit constructor calls setFocusPolicy(TQWidget::StrongFocus). +You must enable keyboard focus for a widget if it processes keyboard events. This is normally done from the widget's constructor. For instance, the TQLineEdit constructor calls setFocusPolicy(TQWidget::StrongFocus). .PP See also focusPolicy, focusInEvent(), focusOutEvent(), keyPressEvent(), keyReleaseEvent(), and enabled. .PP @@ -2688,7 +2688,7 @@ This property holds the way the widget accepts keyboard focus. .PP The policy is TQWidget::TabFocus if the widget accepts keyboard focus by tabbing, TQWidget::ClickFocus if the widget accepts focus by clicking, TQWidget::StrongFocus if it accepts both, and TQWidget::NoFocus (the default) if it does not accept focus at all. .PP -You must enable keyboard focus for a widget if it processes keyboard events. This is normally done from the widget's constructor. For instance, the QLineEdit constructor calls setFocusPolicy(TQWidget::StrongFocus). +You must enable keyboard focus for a widget if it processes keyboard events. This is normally done from the widget's constructor. For instance, the TQLineEdit constructor calls setFocusPolicy(TQWidget::StrongFocus). .PP See also focusEnabled, focusInEvent(), focusOutEvent(), keyPressEvent(), keyReleaseEvent(), and enabled. .PP @@ -2812,7 +2812,7 @@ This property holds whether the widget is a dialog widget. .PP A dialog widget is a secondary top-level widget, i.e. a top-level widget with a parent. .PP -See also isTopLevel and QDialog. +See also isTopLevel and TQDialog. .PP Get this property's value with isDialog(). .SH "bool isModal" @@ -2820,7 +2820,7 @@ This property holds whether the widget is a modal widget. .PP This property only makes sense for top-level widgets. A modal widget prevents widgets in all other top-level widgets from getting any input. .PP -See also isTopLevel, isDialog, and QDialog. +See also isTopLevel, isDialog, and TQDialog. .PP Get this property's value with isModal(). .SH "bool isPopup" @@ -2838,7 +2838,7 @@ A top-level widget is a widget which usually has a frame and a caption (title). .PP A top-level widget can have a parent widget. It will then be grouped with its parent and deleted when the parent is deleted, minimized when the parent is minimized etc. If supported by the window manager, it will also have a common taskbar entry with its parent. .PP -QDialog and TQMainWindow widgets are by default top-level, even if a parent widget is specified in the constructor. This behavior is specified by the WType_TopLevel widget flag. +TQDialog and TQMainWindow widgets are by default top-level, even if a parent widget is specified in the constructor. This behavior is specified by the WType_TopLevel widget flag. .PP See also topLevelWidget(), isDialog, isModal, isPopup, isDesktop, and parentWidget(). .PP @@ -3086,7 +3086,7 @@ This property holds the default layout behavior of the widget. .PP If there is a QLayout that manages this widget's children, the size policy specified by that layout is used. If there is no such QLayout, the result of this function is used. .PP -The default policy is Preferred/Preferred, which means that the widget can be freely resized, but prefers to be the size sizeHint() returns. Button-like widgets set the size policy to specify that they may stretch horizontally, but are fixed vertically. The same applies to lineedit controls (such as QLineEdit, QSpinBox or an editable QComboBox) and other horizontally orientated widgets (such as QProgressBar). TQToolButton's are normally square, so they allow growth in both directions. Widgets that support different directions (such as QSlider, QScrollBar or QHeader) specify stretching in the respective direction only. Widgets that can provide scrollbars (usually subclasses of QScrollView) tend to specify that they can use additional space, and that they can make do with less than sizeHint(). +The default policy is Preferred/Preferred, which means that the widget can be freely resized, but prefers to be the size sizeHint() returns. Button-like widgets set the size policy to specify that they may stretch horizontally, but are fixed vertically. The same applies to lineedit controls (such as TQLineEdit, TQSpinBox or an editable TQComboBox) and other horizontally orientated widgets (such as QProgressBar). TQToolButton's are normally square, so they allow growth in both directions. Widgets that support different directions (such as TQSlider, TQScrollBar or QHeader) specify stretching in the respective direction only. Widgets that can provide scrollbars (usually subclasses of TQScrollView) tend to specify that they can use additional space, and that they can make do with less than sizeHint(). .PP See also sizeHint, QLayout, TQSizePolicy, and updateGeometry(). .PP diff --git a/doc/man/man3/tqwizard.3qt b/doc/man/man3/tqwizard.3qt index 41db7b131..7fc09aa89 100644 --- a/doc/man/man3/tqwizard.3qt +++ b/doc/man/man3/tqwizard.3qt @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ QWizard \- Framework for wizard dialogs .SH SYNOPSIS \fC#include <ntqwizard.h>\fR .PP -Inherits QDialog. +Inherits TQDialog. .PP .SS "Public Members" .in +1c @@ -64,19 +64,19 @@ Inherits QDialog. .BI "virtual void \fBsetAppropriate\fR ( TQWidget * page, bool appropriate )" .br .ti -1c -.BI "QPushButton * \fBbackButton\fR () const" +.BI "TQPushButton * \fBbackButton\fR () const" .br .ti -1c -.BI "QPushButton * \fBnextButton\fR () const" +.BI "TQPushButton * \fBnextButton\fR () const" .br .ti -1c -.BI "QPushButton * \fBfinishButton\fR () const" +.BI "TQPushButton * \fBfinishButton\fR () const" .br .ti -1c -.BI "QPushButton * \fBcancelButton\fR () const" +.BI "TQPushButton * \fBcancelButton\fR () const" .br .ti -1c -.BI "QPushButton * \fBhelpButton\fR () const" +.BI "TQPushButton * \fBhelpButton\fR () const" .br .in -1c .SS "Public Slots" @@ -161,7 +161,7 @@ Example code is available here: wizard/wizard.cpp wizard/wizard.h See also Abstract Widget Classes, Dialog Classes, and Organizers. .SH MEMBER FUNCTION DOCUMENTATION .SH "QWizard::QWizard ( TQWidget * parent = 0, const char * name = 0, bool modal = FALSE, WFlags f = 0 )" -Constructs an empty wizard dialog. The \fIparent\fR, \fIname\fR, \fImodal\fR and \fIf\fR arguments are passed to the QDialog constructor. +Constructs an empty wizard dialog. The \fIparent\fR, \fIname\fR, \fImodal\fR and \fIf\fR arguments are passed to the TQDialog constructor. .SH "QWizard::~QWizard ()" Destroys the object and frees any allocated resources, including all pages and controllers. .SH "void QWizard::addPage ( TQWidget * page, const TQString & title )\fC [virtual]\fR" @@ -174,23 +174,23 @@ Called when the Next button is clicked; this virtual function returns TRUE if \f Called when the user clicks the Back button; this function shows the preceding relevant page in the sequence. .PP See also appropriate(). -.SH "QPushButton * QWizard::backButton () const" +.SH "TQPushButton * QWizard::backButton () const" Returns a pointer to the dialog's Back button .PP By default, this button is connected to the back() slot, which is virtual so you can reimplement it in a QWizard subclass. Use setBackEnabled() to enable/disable this button. -.SH "QPushButton * QWizard::cancelButton () const" +.SH "TQPushButton * QWizard::cancelButton () const" Returns a pointer to the dialog's Cancel button .PP -By default, this button is connected to the QDialog::reject() slot, which is virtual so you can reimplement it in a QWizard subclass. +By default, this button is connected to the TQDialog::reject() slot, which is virtual so you can reimplement it in a QWizard subclass. .SH "TQWidget * QWizard::currentPage () const" Returns a pointer to the current page in the sequence. Although the wizard does its best to make sure that this value is never 0, it can be if you try hard enough. -.SH "QPushButton * QWizard::finishButton () const" +.SH "TQPushButton * QWizard::finishButton () const" Returns a pointer to the dialog's Finish button .PP -By default, this button is connected to the QDialog::accept() slot, which is virtual so you can reimplement it in a QWizard subclass. Use setFinishEnabled() to enable/disable this button. +By default, this button is connected to the TQDialog::accept() slot, which is virtual so you can reimplement it in a QWizard subclass. Use setFinishEnabled() to enable/disable this button. .SH "void QWizard::help ()\fC [virtual protected slot]\fR" Called when the user clicks the Help button, this function emits the helpClicked() signal. -.SH "QPushButton * QWizard::helpButton () const" +.SH "TQPushButton * QWizard::helpButton () const" Returns a pointer to the dialog's Help button .PP By default, this button is connected to the help() slot, which is virtual so you can reimplement it in a QWizard subclass. Use setHelpEnabled() to enable/disable this button. @@ -212,7 +212,7 @@ This virtual function is responsible for laying out the title row. Called when the user clicks the Next button, this function shows the next relevant page in the sequence. .PP See also appropriate(). -.SH "QPushButton * QWizard::nextButton () const" +.SH "TQPushButton * QWizard::nextButton () const" Returns a pointer to the dialog's Next button .PP By default, this button is connected to the next() slot, which is virtual so you can reimplement it in a QWizard subclass. Use setNextEnabled() to enable/disable this button. |